Proteus AMT

ADAPTIVE MODULATION TRANSPORT

Digital Microwave Radio

7 TO 38 GHZ; 4 TO 100 MBPS;
2E1 TO 32E1, 2DS1 TO 32DS1, & 10/100BASET

System User’s Manual

Part Number: 8831900-00
Revision U
Issued: 08/06

*Also marketed as Proteus 3G

 © Copyright 2003, Microwave Networks Inc., USA. All rights reserved.
Information in this manual is subject to change without notice. No part of this publication may
be reproduced or distributed in any form or by any means, electronic or mechanical, for any
purpose, without the express written permission of Microwave Networks Incorporated.
TRADEMARKS
Proteus AMT and Proteus EM are registered trademarks of Microwave Networks Inc.
Proteus AMT is also marketed as Proteus 3G - a registered trademark of Microwave Networks Inc.
Microsoft is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corp.
HP is a registered trademark of Hewlett-Packard Corp.
All other products or services referred to in this manual are the trademarks, service marks, or product
names of their respective holders.
DISCLAIMER
The products, specifications, configurations, and other technical information regarding the
products contained in this manual are subject to change without notice. All the statements,
technical information, and recommendations contained in this manual are believed to be
accurate and reliable but are presented without warranty of any kind, and users must take full
responsibility for the application of any products specified in this manual.
IN NO EVENT SHALL MICROWAVE NETWORKS INCORPORATED OR ITS
SUPPLIERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY INDIRECT, SPECIAL, CONSEQUENTIAL, OR
INCIDENTAL DAMAGES, INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, LOST PROFITS OR
LOSS OR DAMAGE TO DATA ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE
THIS MANUAL, EVEN IF MICROWAVE NETWORKS INCORPORATED HAS BEEN
ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.
COMPLIANCE
Microwave Networks Incorporated hereby declares that this wireless
communication system is in compliance with the essential requirements and
other relevant provisions of Directive 1999/5/EC.
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to
the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful
interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired operation.
 WARRANTY

Commercial Warranty
Products manufactured by Microwave Networks Incorporated ("MNI") are
warranted to be free from defect in material and workmanship under normal
use and service for a period of two (2) years from the date of shipment. In
the event of a defect during the warranty period, Buyer will return the
defective item to the MNI depot repair facility for repair or replacement.
Repair at MNI's option may include the replacement of parts or equipment
and all replaced parts or equipment shall be the property of MNI. Parts or
equipment replaced during the warranty period are warranted for the
remainder of the original applicable warranty period or ninety (90) days,
whichever is greater. This expressed warranty is extended by MNI to the
original Buyer for commercial, industrial or governmental use. Such action
on the part of MNI shall be the full extent of MNI's liability and Buyer's
exclusive remedy for breach of warranty. Expenses of Buyer such as travel
expenses are not covered by this warranty.

This warranty extends only to products manufactured by MNI, and it is

expressly conditioned upon the equipment having been installed in
accordance with the installation practices accepted by the
telecommunications industry, the standard installation and configuration
practices recommended by MNI, and the equipment having been maintained
in accordance with MNI recommended standard maintenance practices.
Vendor products and other equipment not manufactured by MNI are
excluded, but carry their own separate limited warranties.

This warranty shall automatically terminate if the product is used in other

than its normal and customary use, has been subject to misuse, accident,
neglect, or damage, is improperly disassembled, improper alterations or
repairs, or if nonconforming parts are used in the product, unless done by a
service facility authorized by MNI to perform warranty service. The
warranty for the software shall automatically terminate if the software is
altered, added, or removed from the platform without the prior written
authorization of MNI. The software provided by MNI does not include virus
protection and this warranty does not cover damages caused by viruses,
infiltration, and other malicious activities.

Proteus AMT System User’s Manual Page iii

WARRANTY

Because each radio system is unique, MNI disclaims liability for range, coverage, or operation
of a system as a whole under this warranty. This warranty shall not cover any damages caused
by Acts of God including, but not limited to, flood, lightning, seismic activity; and events of
Force Majeure such as fire, explosion, war, civil disturbance, et al.

THIS MNI WARRANTY IS GIVEN IN LIEU OF ALL OTHER WARRANTIES, EITHER

EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, WHICH ARE SPECIFICALLY EXCLUDED, INCLUDING
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
PURPOSE.

An authorization to return products under this warranty must be obtained from a MNI
Customer Service Representative prior to making shipment to MNI's service location, and all
returns shall be shipped freight pre-paid. MNI shall be responsible for return freight charges
only on repaired and replaced products found to be defective.

Contacting Us
Company Headquarters:
Microwave Networks Incorporated
4000 Greenbriar
Stafford, TX 77477
USA
Tel 281.263.6500
Fax 281.263.6400
Toll free in US 1.888.225.6429

Internet: www.microwavenetworks.com

24-Hour Customer Service Hotline

Tel 281.263.6501
Toll free in US 1.888.225.4762
International
London
Tel 44.1628.788383
Fax 44.1628.788424

Proteus AMT System User’s Manual Page iv

 Proteus AMT Manual — Revision History
Rev. A —1st Release, 02/2003
Revision B, 07/2003
Front matter Cover, history, TOC
Chapter 1, Radio Description 1-8 to 1-38
Chapter 2, Installation 2-8 to 2-15
Appendix A, RF Unit Frequencies A-1, A-3
Appendix C C-9, C-10
Revision C, 09/2003
Front matter Cover, history, TOC
Chapter 1, Radio Description 1-3, 1-13, 1-14, 1-15, 1-19, 1-28 to 1-37
Chapter 2, Installation 2-4, 2-11, 2-15, 2-17, 2-20, 2-23, 2-24
Chapter 3, Commissioning 3-6
Chapter 4, Operation 4-7, 4-9, 4-12 to 4-14
Appendix A, RF Unit Frequencies A-1 to A-6 (all)
Appendix C, Radio Management Interfaces C-8, C-14
Appendix D, WAN / IPO-Air Channel Routing all (new)
Appendix E, VLANs-Virtual Local Area Networks all (new)
Revision D, 10/2003
Front matter Cover, history, TOC
Chapter 1, Radio Description 1-28 to 1-37
Chapter 2, Installation 2-15, 2-20 to 2-26
Chapter 5, Maintenance 5-5
Revision E, 12/2003, 1/2004
Front matter Cover, history, warranty, TOC
Chapter 1, Radio Description 1-1, 1-3, 1-4, 1-5, 1-7, 1-12, 1-18 to 1-21, 1-23, 1-25, 1-28 to 1-40
Chapter 2, Installation 2-11, 2-12, 2-16, 2-17, 2-19, 2-20, 2-23
Chapter 3, Commissioning 3-2, 3-9
Chapter 4, Operation 4-9, 4-12, 4-13
Chapter 5, Maintenance 5-5, 5-7
Appendix A, RF Unit Frequencies all; A-1, A-4
Appendix B, Alarm Definitions B-1
Appendix C, Radio Management Interfaces all, C-10
Appendix E, VLANs-Virtual Local Area Networks all
Revision F, 4/2004
Front matter Cover, history, warranty, TOC
Chapter 1, Radio Description 1-1, 1-3, 1-5, 1-6, 1-8 to 1-10, 1-13, 1-16, 1-18, 1-20, 1-22, 1-23, 1-24, 1-
25, 1-27, 1-29 to 1-40
Chapter 2, Installation 2-2, 2-7, 2-9, 2-10, 2-11, 2-13, 2-14, 2-15, 2-17, 2-19, 2-23, 2-24
Chapter 3, Commissioning 3-2 to 3-5, 3-7 to 3-9
Chapter 4, Operation 4-4, 4-5, 4-6, 4-8 to 4-9, 4-11, 4-12, 4-13
Chapter 5, Maintenance 5-5, 5-8 to 5-10
Appendix C, Radio Management Interfaces C-1, C-2, C-3, C-4, C-5, C-6, C-7, C-8 to C-30
Appendix D, WAN/IPO-Air Channel Routing D-1, D-2, D-3, D-4, D-9, D-10, D-11, D-12 to D-16
Appendix E, VLANs-Virtual Local Area Networks E-9 to E-12
Revision G, 5/2004
Front matter Cover, history, Using this Manual, TOC
Chapter 1, Radio Description 1-7, 1-16 to 1-42
Chapter 2, Installation 2-1, 2-2, 2-8 to 2-28
Chapter 3, Commissioning 3-1
Chapter 4, Operation 4-5, 4-6 to 4-14
Chapter 5, Maintenance 5-4, 5-5, 5-8, 5-9, 5-10
Appendix C, Radio Management Interfaces C-9, C-10, C-11, C-30
Appendix E, VLANs removed – during beta status
Revision H, 7/2004
Front matter Cover, history
Chapter 1, Radio Description 1-16, 1-21
Chapter 2, Installation 2-15, 2-16, 2-19, 2-20
Chapter 4, Operation 4-5, 4-6 to 4-14

Page v Proteus AMT System User’s Manual

 Proteus AMT Manual — Revision History (Continued)
Revision J, 8/2004
Front matter Cover, history, manual intro.
Chapter 1, Radio Description 1-1, 1-2, 1-5, 1-8 to 1-13, 1-16, 1-21, 1-22, 1-28, 1-29, 1-36, 1-38
Chapter 2, Installation 2-1, 2-2, 2-3, 2-5, 2-8, 2-11 to 2-30
Chapter 3, Commissioning 3-2, 3-3, 3-6, 3-7
Chapter 4, Operation 4-1, 4-2, 4-5, 4-6, 4-7, 4-8, 4-9, 4-12, 4-13
Chapter 5, Maintenance 5-4, 5-6, 5-7
Appendix A, RF Unit Frequencies A-1 to A-10
Appendix E, VLANs E-1, E-2 (place-holder only)
Appendix F, North American Freq. Licensing All (new material)
Revision K, 12/2004
Front matter Cover, history, introduction, & content
Chapter 1, Radio Description 1-15, 1-30
Chapter 2, Installation 2-28 to 2-32
Chapter 5, Maintenance 5-7
Appendix A, RF Unit Frequencies All (added channel plans)
Appendix D, WAN/ IPO-Air Channel Routing All
Appendix G, Optional ODU Mounting All (new material)
Revision L, 1/2005
Front matter Cover, history
Chapter 1, Radio Description 1-30 to 1-41
Appendix B, Alarm Definitions B-2, B-3
Revision M, 5/2005
Front matter Cover, history
Chapter 1, Radio Description 1-4, 1-15, 1-26, 1-29 to 1-42
Chapter 2, Installation 2-1, 2-2, 2-8, 2-10 to 2-32
Chapter 3, Commissioning 3-2
Chapter 4, Operation 4-2, 4-11
Chapter 5, Maintenance 5-4, 5-7
Appendix A, RF Unit Frequencies A-6 to A-14
Appendix B, Alarm Definitions B-3, B-4
Appendix C, Radio Management Interfaces C-9 to C-11
Appendix E, VLANs All
Revision N, 6/2005
Front matter Cover, history (vi)
Chapter 1, Radio Description 1-30 to 1-42
Revision P, 8/2005
Front matter Cover, history, TOC
Chapter 1, Radio Description 1-7, 1-9, 1-12, 1-14, 1-15, 1-31, 1-32
Chapter 2, Installation 2-23, 2-29, 2-30, 2-31
Chapter 4, Operation 4-12, 4-13
Chapter 5, Maintenance 5-7
Appendix E, VLANs All (VLAN enabled)
Revision Q, 10/2005
Front matter Cover, history, TOC, LOT, LOF
Chapter 1, Radio Description 1-8, 1-24 to 1-42
Chapter 2, Installation 2-1, 2-8, 2-10
Chapter 3, Commissioning 3-6
Appendix A, Appendix C, Appendix D A-7, C-2, D-6
Revision R, 12/2005
Front matter Cover, history
Chapter 1, Radio Description 1-29, 1-30 1-33
Revision S, 1/2006
Chapter 1, Radio Description 1-5, 1-12, 1-14, 1-33 to 1-36
Chapter 3, Commissioning 3-6

Page vi Proteus AMT System User’s Manual

 Proteus AMT Manual — Revision History (Continued)
Revision T, 4/2006 [7/14/06-Added proper 15G ITU standard]
Front matter Cover, history, TOC
Chapter 1, Radio Description 1-2, 1-3, 1-4, 1-9, 1-10, 1-11, 1-13, 1-15, 1-16, 1-29 to 1-37. 1-28 [7/14/
06]
Chapter 2, Installation 2-29, 2-30, 2-32
Chapter 3, Commissioning 3-7
Chapter 5, Maintenance 5-6, 5-7
Appendix A, RF Unit Frequencies All
Revision U, 8/2006
Front matter Cover, history, TOC
Chapter 1, Radio Description 1-5, 1-8, 1-28, 1-30
Chapter 2, Installation 2-16
Chapter 3, Commissioning 3-2
Chapter 4, Operations 4-11, 4-12, 4-13
Appendix B, Alarm Definitions B-3
Appendix C, Radio Management Interfaces C-2, C-10, C-15, C-23, C-24
Appendix E, VLAN and Rate Limiting E-10, E-17
Appendix F, North American Frequency Licensing F-1, F-5

Page vii Proteus AMT System User’s Manual

Proteus AMT System User’s Manual Page viii
 Using This Manual

Introduction
This section is a guide to the Proteus AMT Radio information in this manual.

Manual Organization
This manual is organized into the following sections.

Using This Manual

Provides a quick look of how this manual presents our product information.

Table of Contents

Lists all chapters, sections, headings, and subheadings in the manual, as well
as where to find them.

Chapter 1–Radio Description

General radio description and system specifications.

Chapter 2–Installation

Instructions on how to unpack, configure, and install the radio.

Chapter 3–Commissioning

Instructions on how to align, configure, power, and test a radio and

microwave hop.

Proteus AMT System User’s Manual Page ix

Using This Manual

Chapter 4–Operation

Describes signal flow through the radio, switching and loopback. Includes
instructions on using radio features.

Chapter 5–Maintenance

Routine maintenance, diagnostics, repairs, and field upgrade procedures.

Appendix A–RF Frequencies

Lists ODU frequencies and sub-bands and their part numbers.

Appendix B–Alarm Definitions

Defines all radio alarms and alarm codes.

Appendix C–Radio Management Interfaces

Discusses craft terminal (VT100) and Windows-based radio interfaces.

Appendix D–WAN / IPO-Air Channel Routing

Explains the WAN, or IPO-Air, channel routing and routing procedures.

Appendix E––Virtual Local Area Networks

Explains VLAN implementation in the Proteus AMT radio.

Appendix F––North American Frequency Licensing

Provides FCC identifiers for Proteus AMT radios.

Appendix G––Optional ODU and RFU Mounting

Provides descriptions and installation instructions for offset RFU and

indoor, rack-mounted RFU options of the ODU.

Proteus AMT System User’s Manual Page x

 Microwave Networks

Table of Contents
Chapter 1 — Radio Description
Overview ....................................................................................................................... 1-1
Components........................................................................................................ 1-2
Configurations.................................................................................................... 1-2
Non-Protected Configuration.................................................................... 1-2
Hot-Standby (1:1) Protection.................................................................... 1-2
Indoor Unit .................................................................................................................... 1-4
Chassis................................................................................................................ 1-4
Front Panel ......................................................................................................... 1-5
Line Interface Modules ...................................................................................... 1-6
IDU Circuit Boards .......................................................................................... 1-11
Outdoor Unit................................................................................................................ 1-12
Radio Frequency Unit ...................................................................................... 1-12
Antenna ............................................................................................................ 1-14
Redundancy Switch Unit............................................................................................. 1-16
RSU Front Panel Features ................................................................................ 1-19
RSU Interconnect Cables ................................................................................. 1-21
IDU-to-ODU Interface Cable ...................................................................................... 1-22
Radio Management...................................................................................................... 1-23
Element Manager ............................................................................................. 1-23
EM Connections ..................................................................................... 1-24
SNMP ............................................................................................................... 1-24
SNMP Connection .................................................................................. 1-24
Text-Based Menu Interface.............................................................................. 1-25
Text-Based Interface Connection ........................................................... 1-25
Telnet................................................................................................................ 1-26
Telnet Connection................................................................................... 1-26
Engineering Orderwire (EOW) ................................................................................... 1-26
Specifications .............................................................................................................. 1-27
International Data Rates ................................................................................... 1-30
North American Data Rates ............................................................................. 1-33
Mixed Data Rates ............................................................................................. 1-37

Chapter 2 — Installation
Overview ....................................................................................................................... 2-1
Location.............................................................................................................. 2-1
Environment ....................................................................................................... 2-1
Grounding........................................................................................................... 2-2
Cable and Connector Considerations ................................................................. 2-2
Tools and Material......................................................................................................... 2-3
Preparing the Site .......................................................................................................... 2-3

Proteus AMT System User’s Manual Page xi

Table of Contents

Mount the Rack .................................................................................................. 2-3

Unpack Equipment............................................................................................. 2-4
Installing the Coaxial Cable .......................................................................................... 2-5
Assemble the Cable............................................................................................ 2-5
Install the Cable.................................................................................................. 2-7
Installing the Indoor Unit .............................................................................................. 2-8
Mount the IDU ................................................................................................... 2-8
Connect Power ................................................................................................... 2-8
IDU Power Protection ............................................................................ 2-10
Connect E1/T1 Line Signals to the IDU .......................................................... 2-11
16–32E1/DS1 Data Wiring on the Redundancy Switch......................... 2-12
Connect Network Management........................................................................ 2-16
Connect Auxiliary Interfaces ........................................................................... 2-17
Installing the Redundancy Switch Unit....................................................................... 2-20
Mount the RSU ................................................................................................ 2-20
Connect IDU and RSU..................................................................................... 2-20
Connect E1/T1 Line Signals to the RSU.......................................................... 2-21
Installing the ODU ...................................................................................................... 2-23
Fundamentals ................................................................................................... 2-23
Torque Specifications ............................................................................. 2-23
Unpack Hardware............................................................................................. 2-24
Attach the Standard Mounting Assembly ........................................................ 2-24
Attach the Antenna to the Mounting Assembly ............................................... 2-28
Attach the RF Unit to the Antenna................................................................... 2-29
Non-Protected Units ............................................................................... 2-29
Hot-Standby Protected Units .................................................................. 2-29
Attach the Early-Model 7/8-GHz RF Unit to the Antenna .............................. 2-31
Connect the Coaxial Cable to the ODU ........................................................... 2-32

Chapter 3 — Commissioning
Overview ....................................................................................................................... 3-1
Powering the Radio ....................................................................................................... 3-1
Verifying Radio Configuration ..................................................................................... 3-2
Aligning the ODU ......................................................................................................... 3-3
Course ODU Alignment..................................................................................... 3-4
Fine ODU Alignment ......................................................................................... 3-4
Set Final ODU Alignment ........................................................................ 3-4
Making Configuration Changes .................................................................................... 3-6
Configuring the ODU......................................................................................... 3-6
Set Transmit and Receive Frequency ....................................................... 3-6
Set Transmit Power Output ...................................................................... 3-6
Configuring the IDU .......................................................................................... 3-7
Set Capacity .............................................................................................. 3-7
Set Tributaries........................................................................................... 3-7

Page xii Proteus AMT System User’s Manual

 Microwave Networks

Set Orderwire and RS232 Auxiliary Channels......................................... 3-7

Configuring the RSU.......................................................................................... 3-8
Set Configuration Jumpers ....................................................................... 3-8
Set Protection Mode ................................................................................. 3-8
Set IP Data Routing .................................................................................. 3-8
Verifying Radio Operation ............................................................................................ 3-9

Chapter 4 — Operation
Overview ....................................................................................................................... 4-1
Basic Operation ............................................................................................................. 4-1
Line Interface ..................................................................................................... 4-2
Signal Multiplexing............................................................................................ 4-3
Service Channels ...................................................................................... 4-4
Management Channels.............................................................................. 4-5
Modulation and Coding...................................................................................... 4-5
IF Conversion and Multiplexing ........................................................................ 4-6
RF Conversion.................................................................................................... 4-7
Protection Switching ..................................................................................................... 4-8
Reverse Channel Switch..................................................................................... 4-9
User Interfaces............................................................................................................. 4-10
NMS / SNMP (Ethernet) .................................................................................. 4-10
MODEM / PPP (Serial IP) ............................................................................... 4-11
COMPUTER / CTI (Serial).............................................................................. 4-11
Management Software...................................................................................... 4-11

Chapter 5 — Maintenance
Overview ....................................................................................................................... 5-1
Customer Service Options............................................................................................. 5-1
Telephone Support ............................................................................................. 5-1
Repair and Exchange Services ........................................................................... 5-1
Technical Support Services................................................................................ 5-2
Maintenance .................................................................................................................. 5-3
Replacing IDU Components .............................................................................. 5-3
Replacing LIMs ........................................................................................ 5-3
Replacing the Power Supply Fuse ............................................................ 5-4
Replacing the Backup Battery .................................................................. 5-4
Replacing the Power Supply Board.......................................................... 5-5
Replacing IF Boards ................................................................................. 5-6
Replacing ODU RF Units .................................................................................. 5-7
Updating Firmware ............................................................................................ 5-8
Using EM to Update Firmware................................................................. 5-8
Using CTI to Update Firmware ................................................................ 5-9
Maintenance Checks.................................................................................................... 5-10

Proteus AMT System User’s Manual Page xiii

Table of Contents

Periodic Maintenance....................................................................................... 5-10

Monthly Checks...................................................................................... 5-10
Semi-Annual Checks .............................................................................. 5-10
Annual Checks........................................................................................ 5-10

Chapter A — RF Unit Frequencies

Overview ....................................................................................................................... A-1
Frequency and Channel Plans ....................................................................................... A-1
18GHz, 60/270-MHz IF..................................................................................... A-2
15GHz, 60/270-MHz IF..................................................................................... A-3
13GHz, 60/270-MHz IF..................................................................................... A-4
7GHz, 60/270-MHz IF....................................................................................... A-5
7GHz, 140/350-MHz IF..................................................................................... A-6
8GHz, 140/350-MHz IF..................................................................................... A-8
11 GHz, 140/350 MHz IF .................................................................................. A-9
13GHz, 140/350-MHz IF................................................................................... A-9
15GHz, 140/350-MHz IF................................................................................. A-10
18GHz, 140/350-MHz IF................................................................................. A-12
23GHz, 140/350-MHz IF................................................................................. A-12
26 GHz, 140/350 MHz IF ................................................................................ A-13
38 GHz, 140/350 MHz IF ................................................................................ A-14

Chapter B — Alarm Definitions

Chapter C — Radio Management Interfaces

Overview ....................................................................................................................... C-1
Connections ................................................................................................................... C-2
Computer............................................................................................................ C-2
NMS-SNMP ....................................................................................................... C-3
SNMP Basics ............................................................................................ C-3
Installing the SNMP MIB......................................................................... C-4
MIB Tables ............................................................................................... C-4
MODEM ............................................................................................................ C-5
Element Manager........................................................................................................... C-6
Key Features....................................................................................................... C-7
System Requirements......................................................................................... C-7
Basics ................................................................................................................. C-7
Polling and Port Indicators ....................................................................... C-8
Alarms ...................................................................................................... C-8
Event and Alarm Logging ........................................................................ C-8
Identifying Radios .................................................................................... C-8
Security..................................................................................................... C-8
EM Menus ................................................................................................ C-9

Page xiv Proteus AMT System User’s Manual

 Microwave Networks

Craft Terminal and Command Line Interface ............................................................. C-12

Menus ............................................................................................................... C-13
Main Menu.............................................................................................. C-13
Alarm Menu............................................................................................ C-13
Performance Menu.................................................................................. C-14
Test Menu ............................................................................................... C-14
Configuration Menu................................................................................ C-14
Utility Menu............................................................................................ C-14
Security and Radio Identity.............................................................................. C-15
Alarms .............................................................................................................. C-16
Performance ..................................................................................................... C-18
Test ................................................................................................................... C-20
Configuration ................................................................................................... C-23
Utility ............................................................................................................... C-28

Chapter D — WAN/IPO-Air Channel Routing

Overview ...................................................................................................................... D-1
LAN Port ........................................................................................................... D-1
WAN Port.......................................................................................................... D-1
WAN Port Communication ..................................................................... D-1
IP Data Routing ............................................................................................................ D-3
The Routing Table............................................................................................. D-3
Static Routes...................................................................................................... D-4
Example: Using Static Route to Connect a PC to a Radio ...................... D-5
Advantages of Static Routing .................................................................. D-6
Disadvantages of Static Routing.............................................................. D-6
Routing Information Protocol (RIP) ................................................................. D-6
Advantages of RIP................................................................................... D-6
Disadvantages of RIP .............................................................................. D-7
Bypassing Network Size Limit of RIP .................................................... D-7
MNI Protection Routing ............................................................................................. D-10
Advantages of MNI Protection Routing.......................................................... D-12
Disadvantages of MNI Protection Routing ..................................................... D-12
Setting MNI Protection Routing ..................................................................... D-12
Configuring MNI Protection Routing Using CTI.................................. D-13
Configuring Protection Routing Using EM........................................... D-15
Configuring Protection Routing Using SNMP ...................................... D-16

Chapter E — Configuring Virtual Local Area Networks and Rate Limiting on

100BaseT LIMs
Introduction ................................................................................................................... E-1
VLAN Features ............................................................................................................. E-1
VLAN Feature Notes ......................................................................................... E-2

Proteus AMT System User’s Manual Page xv

Table of Contents

Setting VLAN Membership ............................................................................... E-2

Configuring VLAN Using EM...................................................................................... E-3
VLAN Device (LIM) Configuration .................................................................. E-3
Port-Based VLAN Configuration ...................................................................... E-6
Setting Up the Port-Based VLAN Configuration with EM...................... E-8
VLAN Table Configuration ............................................................................. E-10
Rate Limiting Configuration ............................................................................ E-11
Configuring VLANs Using CTI.................................................................................. E-14
Setting Up the Port-Based VLAN Configuration with CTI ................... E-16

Chapter F — North American Frequency Licensing

Overview ....................................................................................................................... F-1

Chapter G — Optional ODU and RFU Mounting

Overview ....................................................................................................................... G-1
Offset ODU Mounting ....................................................................................... G-1
RFU Rack Mounting Kit .................................................................................... G-4
Installing the Mounting Kits.......................................................................................... G-6
Installing the Offset Mounting Kit ..................................................................... G-6
Installing the Rack Mounting Kit....................................................................... G-6
Selecting Waveguide ..................................................................................................... G-7

Page xvi Proteus AMT System User’s Manual

 Microwave Networks

List of Figures
Chapter 1 — Radio Description
Figure 1-1. Proteus AMT Radio ......................................................................................... 1-1
Figure 1-2. Hot-Standby Configuration .............................................................................. 1-3
Figure 1-3. IDU Chassis and Components......................................................................... 1-4
Figure 1-4. IDU Front Panel ............................................................................................... 1-5
Figure 1-5. Line Interface Module (LIM) Interfaces ............................................................ 1-7
Figure 1-6. Proteus AMT ODU ......................................................................................... 1-12
Figure 1-7. RF Unit Features ........................................................................................... 1-13
Figure 1-8. Low Profile Antennas ..................................................................................... 1-14
Figure 1-9. 1.2- and 1.8m Antennas ................................................................................ 1-14
Figure 1-10. Hot-Standby ODU Mounting with Coupler ................................................... 1-15
Figure 1-11. Redundancy Switch Configurations with DB78 E1/DS1 Line Connector..... 1-17
Figure 1-12. Redundancy Switch Configurations with RJ48 E1/DS1 Line Connectors.... 1-18
Figure 1-13. RSU Front Panel-Left Side .......................................................................... 1-19
Figure 1-14. Line Interfaces of the Redundancy Switch Unit ........................................... 1-20
Figure 1-15. IDU to RSU Connections ............................................................................. 1-21
Figure 1-16. Signals Multiplexed onto the IDU-to-ODU Cable ........................................ 1-22

Chapter 2 — Installation
Figure 2-1. IDU Power Connection for -48V Input.............................................................. 2-9
Figure 2-2. IDU Power Connection for +24V Input............................................................. 2-9
Figure 2-3. Connecting Power Protection Devices........................................................... 2-10
Figure 2-4. 32E1/DS1 NP Configuration; Line Signal on DB78 ....................................... 2-12
Figure 2-5. Prefabricated DB78P Cable........................................................................... 2-14
Figure 2-6. 32E1/DS1 NP Configuration; Line Signal on RJ48 ........................................ 2-15
Figure 2-7. Handset ......................................................................................................... 2-17
Figure 2-8. IDU to RSU Connections ............................................................................... 2-20
Figure 2-9. RSU E1/DS1 Line Connections ..................................................................... 2-22
Figure 2-10. Non-Protected ODU Mounting Dimensions ................................................. 2-25
Figure 2-11. Protected ODU Mounting Dimensions ......................................................... 2-26
Figure 2-12. Early-Model 7-GHz ODU Pole Mount Hardware.......................................... 2-31

Chapter 3 — Commissioning
Figure 3-1. Typical Antenna Side Lobes ........................................................................... 3-5

Chapter 4 — Operation
Figure 4-1. Simplified Radio Link Diagram......................................................................... 4-1
Figure 4-2. Major Functions of the Proteus AMT Radio .................................................... 4-2
Figure 4-3. LIM Functions .................................................................................................. 4-2
Figure 4-4. IDU Signal Processing ..................................................................................... 4-3
Figure 4-5. Multiplexing Data I/O Lines .............................................................................. 4-3
Figure 4-6. Multiplexing Overhead Channels ..................................................................... 4-4

Proteus AMT System User’s Manual Page xix

Table of Contents

Figure 4-7. OW1/2 Operating Modes................................................................................. 4-5

Figure 4-8. ODU Functions ................................................................................................ 4-7
Figure 4-9. Hot-Standby Configuration .............................................................................. 4-8
Figure 4-10. Reverse Channel Switch Operation .............................................................. 4-9
Figure 4-11. User Interface Functions ............................................................................. 4-10
Figure 4-12. Craft Terminal Interface Radio Management Software Outline................... 4-12
Figure 4-13. Element Manager Radio Management Software Outline ............................ 4-13

Chapter 5 — Maintenance
Figure 5-1. IF Board in the IDU.......................................................................................... 5-6

Chapter A — RF Unit Frequencies

Chapter B — Alarm Definitions

Chapter C — Radio Management Interfaces

Figure C-1. Radio Management Ports ............................................................................... C-1
Figure C-2. SNMP MIB Tables .......................................................................................... C-4
Figure C-3. Element Manager Main Screen ...................................................................... C-6
Figure C-4. EM Menu and Status Bar................................................................................ C-8
Figure C-5. Radio Loopbacks .......................................................................................... C-21

Chapter D — WAN/IPO-Air Channel Routing

Figure D-1. Example Network ............................................................................................ D-5
Figure D-2. Example of a Large Non-Protected Network; RIP Enabled ............................ D-8
Figure D-3. Example of a Large Protected Network; RIP Enabled .................................... D-9
Figure D-4. Example of a Protected Link Using MNI Protection Routing......................... D-10
Figure D-5. Example IP Addresses for MNI Protection Routing ...................................... D-14
Figure D-6. EM Screens for MNI Protection Routing ....................................................... D-15

Chapter E — Configuring Virtual Local Area Networks and Rate Limiting on

100BaseT LIMs
Figure E-1. Element Manager’s VLAN Configuration Menu .............................................. E-3
Figure E-2. Port-Based VLAN Example............................................................................. E-6
Figure E-3. EM VLAN Port Configuration Screens - Rate Limiting Example ................... E-12

Chapter F — North American Frequency Licensing

Chapter G — Optional ODU and RFU Mounting

Figure G-1. ODU Offset Mount Kit, P/N 8708271-xx ........................................................ G-2
Figure G-2. RFU Rack Mount Kit, P/N 8708272-xx .......................................................... G-5

Page xx Proteus AMT System User’s Manual

 Microwave Networks

List of Tables
Chapter 1 — Radio Description
Table 1-A Typical Hot-Standby Switching Time ................................................................. 1-3
Table 1-B Front-Panel Features......................................................................................... 1-5
Table 1-C Line Interface Module Part Numbers................................................................. 1-6
Table 1-D PDH LIM Configurations.................................................................................... 1-8
Table 1-E Ethernet and PDH LIM Configurations .............................................................. 1-9
Table 1-F Major Components of the IDU ......................................................................... 1-11
Table 1-G RF Unit Part Numbers ..................................................................................... 1-13
Table 1-H RF Unit Connections ....................................................................................... 1-13
Table 1-I Redundancy Switche Units ............................................................................... 1-16
Table 1-J Common RSU Front-Panel Features ............................................................... 1-19
Table 1-K Hot-Standby Radio Interconnect Cables ......................................................... 1-21
Table 1-L IDU-to-ODU Cable Components...................................................................... 1-22
Table 1-M General Radio Specification............................................................................ 1-28
Table 1-N Environmental Specification ............................................................................ 1-29
Table 1-O Mechanical Specification................................................................................. 1-29
Table 1-P Power Specification ......................................................................................... 1-29
Table 1-Q Hot-Standby Branching Loss & Switch Time................................................... 1-29
Table 1-R RF Transmit Power.......................................................................................... 1-30
Table 1-S 2E1 to 1E3 System Specification .................................................................... 1-30
Table 1-T 20E1 to 32E1\2E3 System Specification ......................................................... 1-31
Table 1-U 100BaseT System Specification – International Bandwidth ............................ 1-31
Table 1-V 2 x 100BaseT* System – International Bandwidth........................................... 1-31
Table 1-W 2E1+100BaseT System Specification ............................................................ 1-31
Table 1-X 4E1+100BaseT System Specification ............................................................. 1-32
Table 1-Y 16E1+100BaseT System Specification ........................................................... 1-32
Table 1-Z RF Transmit Power .......................................................................................... 1-33
Table 1-AA 4DS1 to 24DS1 System Specification ........................................................... 1-33
Table 1-AB 28DS1\DS3 & 32DS1 System Specification.................................................. 1-34
Table 1-AC 2DS1+DS3 to 8DS1+DS3 System Specification........................................... 1-34
Table 1-AD 12DS1+DS3 to 2DS3 System Specification.................................................. 1-34
Table 1-AE 100BaseT System Specification – North American Bandwidths ................... 1-34
Table 1-AF 2 x 100BaseT* System – North American Bandwidths ................................. 1-35
Table 1-AG 2DS1+100BaseT System Specification ........................................................ 1-35
Table 1-AH 4DS1+100BaseT System Specification ........................................................ 1-35
Table 1-AI 8DS1+100BaseT System Specification......................................................... 1-36
Table 1-AJ 12DS1+100BaseT System Specifications ..................................................... 1-36
Table 1-AK 16DS1+100BaseT System Specifications.................................................... 1-36
Table 1-AL DS3+100BaseT System Specifications ......................................................... 1-36
Table 1-AM 2E1+2DS1 to 16E1+16DS1 System Specifications...................................... 1-37
Table 1-AN 2E1+DS3 to E3+DS3 System Specifications ................................................ 1-37

Proteus AMT System User’s Manual Page xxiii

Table of Contents

Chapter 2 — Installation
Table 2-A IDU-to-ODU Cable Components ....................................................................... 2-6
Table 2-B IDU-to-ODU Cable Assembly ............................................................................ 2-6
Table 2-C E1/DS1 Wiring (RJ48)..................................................................................... 2-11
Table 2-D E3/DS3 Wiring (BNC, 75-W) ........................................................................... 2-11
Table 2-E 100-BaseT Wiring (RJ45)................................................................................ 2-11
Table 2-F DB78 Line Signal Connector Wiring ................................................................ 2-13
Table 2-G Prefabricated DB78P Cable Wire List............................................................. 2-14
Table 2-H 16E1/DS1 Hot-Standby Wiring (HD, 100-pin) ................................................. 2-15
Table 2-I Modem Connection (IP Interface; Sub-D 9-Pin Male) ...................................... 2-16
Table 2-J Computer Port* (Serial; Sub-D 9-Pin Female) ................................................. 2-17
Table 2-K NMS Connection (IP Interface) ....................................................................... 2-17
Table 2-L OW1/2 (RJ45, 8-pin modular connection) ....................................................... 2-18
Table 2-M DTMF HANDSET (RJ-11, 4-pin)..................................................................... 2-18
Table 2-N AUX (26-pin Sub-D; High Density).................................................................. 2-19
Table 2-O RSU Interconnect Cables ............................................................................... 2-20
Table 2-P 100-BaseT Cabling Between IDU and RSU.................................................... 2-21
Table 2-Q Fastener Torque Specifications ..................................................................... 2-24

Chapter 3 — Commissioning
Table 3-A Redundancy Switch Unit Configuration Jumpers .............................................. 3-8

Chapter 4 — Operation
Table 4-A Typical Hot-Standby Switching Time................................................................. 4-9

Chapter 5 — Maintenance

Chapter A — RF Unit Frequencies

Table A-A RF Frequencies and Channel Plans ................................................................. A-2
Table A-B 18GHz, 1010-MHz T/R Spacing; 60/270-MHz IF ............................................. A-2
Table A-C 18GHz, 1560-MHz T/R Spacing; 60/270-MHz IF ............................................. A-2
Table A-D 15GHz, 315-MHz T/R Spacing; 60/270-MHz IF ............................................... A-3
Table A-E 15GHz, 420-MHz T/R Spacing; 60/270-MHz IF ............................................... A-3
Table A-F 15GHz, 475-MHz T/R Spacing; 60/270-MHz IF................................................ A-3
Table A-G 15GHz, 490-MHz T/R Spacing; 60/270-MHz IF ............................................... A-4
Table A-H 15GHz, 644-MHz T/R Spacing; 60/270-MHz IF ............................................... A-4
Table A-I 15GHz, 728-MHz T/R Spacing; 60/270-MHz IF................................................. A-4
Table A-J 13GHz, 266-MHz T/R Spacing; 60/270-MHz IF ................................................ A-4
Table A-K 7GHz, 154-MHz T/R Spacing; 60/270-MHz IF.................................................. A-5
Table A-L 7GHz, 160-MHz T/R Spacing; 60/270-MHz IF .................................................. A-5
Table A-M 7GHz, 161-MHz T/R Spacing; 60/270-MHz IF ................................................. A-5

Page xxiv Proteus AMT System User’s Manual

 Microwave Networks

Table A-N 7GHz, 154 MHz T/R Spacing; 140/350-MHz IF................................................ A-6
Table A-O 7GHz, 160 MHz T/R Spacing; 140/350-MHz IF ............................................... A-6
Table A-P 7GHz 161 MHz T/R Spacing; 140/350-MHz IF................................................. A-7
Table A-Q 7GHz 196 MHz T/R Spacing; 140/350-MHz IF ................................................ A-7
Table A-R 8GHz 119 MHz T/R Spacing; 140/350-MHz IF................................................. A-8
Table A-S 8GHz 208 MHz T/R Spacing; 140/350-MHz IF................................................. A-8
Table A-T 8GHz 266 MHz T/R Spacing; 140/350-MHz IF ................................................. A-8
Table A-U 8GHz 311.32 MHz T/R Spacing; 140/350-MHz IF............................................ A-8
Table A-V 11GHz 490 MHz T/R Spacing; 140/350-MHz IF............................................... A-9
Table A-W 11GHz 530 MHz T/R Spacing; 140/350-MHz IF.............................................. A-9
Table A-X 13GHz 266 MHz T/R Spacing; 140/350-MHz IF............................................... A-9
Table A-Y 15GHz, 315 MHz T/R Spacing; 140/350-MHz ................................................ A-10
Table A-Z 15GHz, 420 MHz T/R Spacing; 140/350-MHz IF ............................................ A-10
Table A-AA 15GHz, 490 MHz T/R Spacing; 140/350-MHz IF ......................................... A-10
Table A-AB 15GHz, 475 MHz T/R Spacing; 140/350-MHz.............................................. A-11
Table A-AC 15GHz, 640 MHz T/R Spacing; 140/350-MHz ............................................. A-11
Table A-AD 15GHz, 644 MHz T/R Spacing; 140/350-MHz ............................................. A-11
Table A-AE 15GHz, 728 MHz T/R Spacing; 140/350-MHz.............................................. A-11
Table A-AF 18GHz, 1010 MHz T/R Spacing; 140/350-MHz IF........................................ A-12
Table A-AG 18GHz, 1560 MHz T/R Spacing; 140/350-MHz IF ....................................... A-12
Table A-AH 23GHz, 1008 MHz T/R Spacing; 140/350-MHz ........................................... A-12
Table A-AI 23GHz, 1200 MHz T/R Spacing; 140/350-MHz ............................................. A-12
Table A-AJ 23GHz, 1232 MHz T/R Spacing; 140/350-MHz ............................................ A-13
Table A-AK 26 GHz, 800 MHz T/R Spacing; 140/350-MHz ............................................. A-13
Table A-AL 26 GHz, 1008 MHz T/R Spacing; 140/350-MHz ........................................... A-13
Table A-AM 38GHz, 700 MHz T/R Spacing; 140/350-MHz IF......................................... A-14
Table A-AN 38GHz, 1260 MHz T/R Spacing; 140/350-MHz IF ....................................... A-14

Chapter B — Alarm Definitions

Chapter C — Radio Management Interfaces

Table C-A EM Menus and Descriptions ............................................................................ C-9
Table C-B CLI Commands .............................................................................................. C-12

Chapter D — WAN/IPO-Air Channel Routing

Chapter E — Configuring Virtual Local Area Networks and Rate Limiting on

100BaseT LIMs
Table E-A VLAN Device Configuration Parameters ........................................................... E-4
Table E-B VLAN Parameters for Port-Based Configuration............................................... E-7
Table E-C VLAN Table Parameters ................................................................................. E-10

Proteus AMT System User’s Manual Page xxv

Table of Contents

Chapter F — North American Frequency Licensing

Table F-A Frequency Licensing Data; Standard Data Rates ............................................. F-1
Table F-B Frequency Licensing Data; All Data Rates & LIM Profile.................................. F-5

Chapter G — Optional ODU and RFU Mounting

Table G-A ODU - RFU Offset Mounting Kit ....................................................................... G-1
Table G-B Offset Mounting Kit Components, P/N 8708271-xx .......................................... G-3
Table G-C Waveguide Adapters on Offset Mounting Plate ............................................... G-3
Table G-D RFU Rack Mounting Kit.................................................................................... G-4
Table G-E ODU Rack Mounting Kit Components .............................................................. G-4
Table G-F Waveguide Adapters on Rack Mounting Plate ................................................. G-5
Table G-G Adapter to Waveguide Interface Dimensions ................................................... G-7
Table G-H Flexible Waveguide for Offset Mounting Option.............................................. G-8

Page xxvi Proteus AMT System User’s Manual

 Chapter 1
Radio Description

Overview
The Proteus AMT (Adaptive Modulation Transport) radio is a flexible
point-to-point digital microwave radio for 1.544- to 100-Mbps data. The
radio operates at frequencies from 7 to 38 GHz using 3.5- to 28-MHz
bandwidth.

Digital microwave radios provide a wireless communication path be-

tween two line-of-sight (LOS) locations up to 40 kilometers apart. The
radio converts digital signal input to radio frequency (RF) signals in the
millimeter-wave frequency bands and directs the signal to a facing site
using an integrated parabolic antenna. The receiving site converts the
signal into its original form. Tuning transmit/receive paths to comple-
ment frequencies allows full-duplex operation.

OUTDOOR UNIT (ODU)

INDOOR UNIT (IDU)

Figure 1-1. Proteus AMT Radio

Proteus AMT radios use a split indoor unit-outdoor unit (IDU/ODU) con-
figuration. Adaptive modulation and a range of plug-and-play line mod-
ules let you upgrade your link from low and medium capacity data traffic
to high speed traffic without replacing the radio.

Proteus AMT System User’s Manual Page 1-1

Radio Description

Components

The radio includes a rack mounted indoor signal-processing unit (IDU)

with two plug-in line interface modules and an outdoor radio frequency
unit with an integrated antenna (ODU). A single coaxial RG-8 cable car-
ries intermediate frequency (IF) signals, power, and radio telemetry be-
tween the IDU and ODU.
IDUs match modulation to IDUs automatically recognize line interface type and selects one of four
data-rate and bandwidth. modulation schemes for the aggregate data rate and bandwidth. Adapt-
able modulation for each aggregate data rate lets the user choose between
a high bit-efficiency modulation–such as 32 QAM–that uses less band-
width or a lower efficiency modulation–such as QPSK–that provides bet-
ter system gain (see LIM tables on page 1-7).
The ODU mounts outside on a grounded tower, pole, or wall mast. Units
operate in the 7/8, 10, 11, 13, 15, 18, 23, 26, 38-GHz frequency bands us-
ing ITU and North American RF channel plans. The ODU mounts di-
rectly to the antenna for easy installation and alignment.
Change fixed bandwidth The radio ships with a fixed occupied bandwidth of: 3.5, 5, 7, 10, 14, 20,
by swapping a board. 25, 28, or 30 MHz. Changing occupied bandwidth requires replacing the
IDU IF board (see Chapter 5–Maintenance). You do not have to change
or modify outdoor units to change data rate or occupied bandwidth.

The automatic transmit power control (ATPC) feature allows the radio to
maintain a constant receive signal level (RSL) at the receive site by am-
plifying or attenuating the transmitter. You configure RSL threshold and
maximum TX power. Minimum power is fix to 30 dB below the speci-
fied output of your radio. APC mode keeps RSL within +3 dB of the set
point by stepping far-end transmit power ±1 dB.

Configurations

Non-Protected Configuration
The non-protected system is ideal for low-cost non-critical links. Each
terminal has only one IDU and one ODU. The RF and digital signals are
not protected against propagation and equipment faults. On equipment
faults or path failure the connection breaks until maintenance personnel
either repair the fault or reroute the path.
Hot-Standby (1:1) Protection
A hot-standby (HSB) radio has two identical co-located terminals (IDU
and ODU) connected to a Redundancy Switch Unit (RSU). The RSU
provides protection switching for the transmit and receive signal paths.

Page 1-2 Proteus AMT System User’s Manual

 Overview

The hot-standby protected radio configuration uses redundant terminals

to protected against equipment or path failure. The antenna and RSU on
hot-standby configurations are not redundant.

Protection switching is The Redundancy Switch Unit (RSU) handles the switch between main
non-reverting—system will and standby units. Both transmit and receive signal paths switch to-
not switch to original radio
gether. Figure 1-2 shows the protected radio configuration.
once alarms clear.
Both radios operate at the same frequency. The main radio transmit path
connects via the through-arm of a coupler\combiner while the standby
radio connects via the coupled arm. Transmit power is 6.5-dB lower on
the standby path and 1.9-dB lower on the main path.

When a transmit failure occurs, the RSU switches the off-line transmitter
on line after a small amount of time from alarm discovery. Once the sec-
ondary transmitter is on-line, the far end receivers acquire the new signal
and must synchronize before sending data to the output ports. Table 1-A
list the typical system switch times.
Table 1-A Typical Hot-Standby Switching Time
IF BW Manual Software Loss of Signal High IDU Power ODU Power
Switch (Online Request) (Data Input) BER Fail Fail
28 MHz 281.3 ms 289.1 ms 318.1 ms 432.2 ms 309.1 ms 221.3 ms
14 MHz 175.4 ms 161.2 ms 175.4 ms 281.9 ms 190.8 ms 159.2 ms
7 MHz 164.2 ms 170.3 ms 196.0 ms 190.6 ms 190.6 ms 181.7 ms
3.5 MHz 313.8 ms 374.4 ms 361.4 ms 162.2 ms 162.0 ms 186.7 ms

The receive path uses the same coupler. Threshold on the standby re-
ceiver is about 6.5-dB worse and 1.9-dB on the main path. On a properly
planned path it is adequate for all but the worst conditions. Normally the
system operates only on the primary receivers and switches to standby
on hardware failure.

ID U
(M AIN )

CONTROL
D AT A
& S T AT U S
ODU
USER (M AIN )
D AT A HOT
S T AN D B Y CO UPLER
S W IT C H
ODU
(S T AN D B Y )

CONTROL
D AT A
& S T AT U S

ID U
(S T AN D B Y )

H S B _O P .V S D

Figure 1-2. Hot-Standby Configuration

Proteus AMT System User’s Manual Page 1-3

Radio Description

Indoor Unit

Chassis

The IDU chassis houses the main board, power supply, IF board,
front-panel board, and two plug-in line interface modules (LIMs, Figure
1-3). The aluminum chassis has heat sinks to dissipate heat.

Signal and power connectors and service indicators mount to the chassis
front panel. Front-access slots for plug-in LIMs let you “hot” swap mod-
ules in an operating IDU.

The IDU mounts in standard 19-inch equipment racks. A non-protected

IDU occupies one rack unit (1RU; 1.75 inch) of space, and the protected
configuration occupies from 3- to 4 RUs depending on capacity; two
RUs for the IDUs and 1 or 2 RUs for redundancy switch units (RSUs).
Each 16E1/DS1 LIM
requires an additional RU
for an RSU used as the
customer line cabling
point. A 32E1/DS1 needs
3RUs.

Figure 1-3. IDU Chassis and Components

The IDU chassis must be grounded to the facility grounding system to

minimize the likelihood of damage from lightning strikes and the impact
of electromagnetic- and radio frequency-interference (EMI/RFI).
Grounding systems for towers, shelters, and equipment racks that follow
published guidelines, such as ITU-T Recommendation K.27, provide the
ground reference necessary for reliable radio operation. The IDU front
panel includes ground connection points to connect to a suitable ground
bus.

Page 1-4 Proteus AMT System User’s Manual

 Indoor Unit

Front Panel

Signal and power connectors and service indicators mount to the chassis
front panel (Table 1-B). A green indicator lights when the unit is pow-
ered. Condition indicators light on major (red) and minor (yellow) alarm.

1 2 3 4 5 7 8 9 11

12 6 10

Figure 1-4. IDU Front Panel

The IDU includes front-access slots for plug-in LIMs, which may be re-
moved or replaced with the IDU mounted and powered. The same IDU
chassis accommodates all data rates and RF frequencies.
Table 1-B Front-Panel Features
1 DC Power 3-pin Phoenix connector to -48 Vdc or optional
+24 Vdc power. Mates with plug P/N 3024080-03.
2 ODU 50-Ω N-type connector for signal and power
between IDU and ODU. 22dB cable loss at 270- or
350 MHz (300/400m of TM-LMR-500).
3 LEDs Power (green), Major Alarm (red), and Minor
Alarm (yellow) indications
4 Handset 4-pin RJ-11 connector for engineering orderwire
(EOW). Uses a DTMF handset that operates over
a 64-kbps auxiliary channel. If EOW is not used (or
if the handset is not plugged in) the channel is free
for use as a clear channel (see O/W1,O/W2).
5 COMPUTER 9-pin sub-D connector. 9600bps RS-232 serial
connection for radio management interface. Sup-
ports both text and GUI interfaces.
6 MODEM 9-pin D-type connector for RS-232 serial interface
to an external modem. Dial-up access to the IDU
IP management interface using a terminal applica-
tion such as HyperTerminal. The V.90 port
auto-senses modem signaling.
7 NMS 1/2 Two RJ45 ports for radio management interface
using internet protocol (IP). Ports provide bridged
IP interface to a 64-kbps channel for network man-
agement traffic. When connecting from a com-
puter to either port, or when cabling from the NMS
port of an IDU to the NMS port of another IDU, use
a crossover cable.
8 O/W1,O/W2 Two RJ-45 connectors for 64-kbps Service Chan-
nel. Used to bridge the EOW if installed. Without
EOW, OW1 becomes an across-the-hop 64-kbps
clear channel at RS422 levels, while OW2 and
handset disable.

Proteus AMT System User’s Manual Page 1-5

Radio Description

Table 1-B Front-Panel Features (continued)

9 HSBY 26-pin high density sub-D connector for controls
and power between the IDU and Redundancy
Switch Unit (RSU).
10 AUX Alarm 26-pin high density sub-D connector. Input and
output for two RS-232 service channels (up to
19.2 kbps), four sets of normally open/normally
closed relay contacts that are mappable to radio
alarms, and five TTL inputs for monitoring external
devices.
11 LIM Bays Two openings in the front panel for plug-in line
interface modules.
12 Ground Bare metal area for grounding. Grounding hard-
ware provided, which you can replaced with your
preferred hardware.

Line Interface Modules

The two changeable line interface modules of the Proteus AMT radio
combine voice and data communications in a single IDU–PDH (plesio-
chronous digital hierarchy) voice communication and Ethernet data.
PDH LIMs provide the data input and output ports at international
(ETSI) data rates of 2, 4, 8, 12, 16E1, E3, 32E1 (2 x 16E1), and 2 x E3;
and North American rates of 2, 4, 8, 12, 16DS1, DS3, 32DS1, and 2 x
DS3.
10/100BaseT LIMs provide Fast Ethernet and support existing 10 Mb/s
networks. Table 1-C lists LIM assemblies. Figure 1-5 shows LIM front
panels.

Table 1-C Line Interface Module Part Numbers

Description Part Number
LIM, 8E1 8209259-02
LIM, 16E1 8209259-03
LIM, E3 8209259-04
LIM, 100BaseT 8209259-05
LIM, 8DS1 8209259-06
LIM, 16DS1 8209259-07
LIM, DS3 8209259-08

For a current list of valid LIMs operate either separately with the second (right) bay covered, or in
LIM configurations use the combination as Table 1-D and Table 1-E list. The 10/100BaseT LIM op-
VALID command of the CLI.
erates in the left bay. The Proteus AMT radio can also accommodate
non-standard line combinations such as, mixed North American (DS)
and ITU (E) rates, DS rates over ETSI channels, and E rates over FCC
channels.

Page 1-6 Proteus AMT System User’s Manual

 Indoor Unit

8E1/8DS1 LIM with RJ Connectors

2, 4, & 8E1 capacity

2, 4, & 8DS1 capacity
Per ITU-T Rec. G.703
RJ-48, shielded, 120-Ω balanced
HDB3/B8ZS line code

E3/DS3 LIM with BNC Connectors

1E3 & 1DS3 capacity

Per ITU-T Rec. G.703
2 x BNC, 75-Ω unbalanced
HDB3/B3ZS line code

10/100Base-T LIM with RJ connectors and data indicators

Up to 100 Mbit/s throughput

Per IEEE 802.3, IEEE 802.3U,
auto-negotiating
4 x RJ-45, shielded, 100-Ω balanced
Enable and activity indicators
4-port bridge, transparent, or
32-station VLAN

16E1/16DS1 and HSBY LIMs with high density connectors

2, 4, 8, 12, & 16E1 capacity

2, 4, 8, 12, & 16DS1 capacity
Per ITU-T Rec. G.703
100-pin, SCSI connector
120-Ω balanced
HDB3/B8ZS line code

Figure 1-5. Line Interface Module (LIM) Interfaces

Proteus AMT System User’s Manual Page 1-7

Radio Description

Table 1-D PDH LIM Configurations

Bandwidth LimA (left) LimB (right) Modulation Bandwidth LimA (left) LimB (right) Modulation
FCC Channel Plan (T-Carrier Format) ITU Channel Plan (E-Carrier Format)
5 MHz 4DS1 – QPSK 3.5 MHz 2E1 – QPSK
5 MHz 8DS1 – 16QAM 3.5 MHz 4E1 – 8PSK
5 MHz – – QPSK 7 MHz 4E1 4E1 16QAM
10 MHz 12DS1 – 8PSK 7 MHz 4E1 – QPSK
10 MHz 16DS1 8DS1 32QAM 7 MHz 8E1 4E1 32QAM
10 MHz 16DS1 – 16QAM 7 MHz 8E1 – 16QAM
10 MHz 8DS1 4DS1 8PSK 7 MHz 12E1 – 32QAM
10 MHz 8DS1 8DS1 16QAM 7 MHz – – QPSK
10 MHz 8DS1 – QPSK 14 MHz 16E1 4E1 16QAM
10 MHz – – QPSK 14 MHz 16E1 8E1 32QAM
20 MHz 12DS1 DS3 32QAM 14 MHz 16E1 – 16QAM
20 MHz 16DS1 16DS1 16QAM 14 MHz 4E1 4E1 QPSK
20 MHz 16DS1 8DS1 8PSK 14 MHz 4E1 E3 32QAM
20 MHz 16DS1 DS3 32QAM 14 MHz 8E1 8E1 16QAM
20 MHz 16DS1 – QPSK 14 MHz 8E1 E3 32QAM
20 MHz 2DS1 DS3 16QAM 14 MHz 8E1 – QPSK
20 MHz 4DS1 DS3 16QAM 14 MHz – – QPSK
20 MHz 8DS1 8DS1 QPSK 14 MHz – E3 16QAM
20 MHz 8DS1 DS3 16QAM 14 MHz E3 – 16QAM
20 MHz – DS3 8PSK 28 MHz 16E1 16E1 16QAM
20 MHz – – QPSK 28 MHz 16E1 4E1 QPSK
25 MHz 12DS1 DS3 16QAM 28 MHz 16E1 8E1 8PSK
25 MHz 16DS1 16DS1 8PSK 28 MHz 16E1 E3 16QAM
25 MHz 16DS1 8DS1 QPSK 28 MHz 16E1 – QPSK
25 MHz 16DS1 DS3 16QAM 28 MHz 4E1 E3 QPSK
25 MHz 2DS1 DS3 8PSK 28 MHz 8E1 8E1 QPSK
25 MHz 4DS1 DS3 8PSK 28 MHz 8E1 E3 8PSK
25 MHz 8DS1 DS3 8PSK 28 MHz E3 E3 16QAM
25 MHz DS3 DS3 32QAM 28 MHz – E3 QPSK
25 MHz – DS3 8PSK 28 MHz – – QPSK
25 MHz – – QPSK Mixed Signal Configurations
28 MHz 12DS1 DS3 8PSK 3.5 MHz 2E1 2DS1 16QAM
28 MHz 16DS1 16DS1 8PSK 7 MHz 2E1 2DS1 QPSK
28 MHz 16DS1 8DS1 QPSK 7 MHz 4E1 4DS1 8PSK
28 MHz 16DS1 DS3 16QAM 14 MHz 2E1 DS3 32QAM
28 MHz 2DS1 DS3 8PSK 14 MHz 4E1 4DS1 QPSK
28 MHz 4DS1 DS3 8PSK 14 MHz 8E1 8DS1 8PSK
28 MHz 8DS1 DS3 8PSK 28 MHz 16E1 16DS1 8PSK
28 MHz DS3 DS3 32QAM 28 MHz 16E1 DS3 16QAM
28 MHz – DS3 8PSK 28 MHz 2E1 DS3 8PSK
28 MHz 4E1 DS3 8PSK
28 MHz 8E1 8DS1 QPSK
28 MHz 8E1 DS3 8PSK
28 MHz E3 DS3 16QAM

Page 1-8 Proteus AMT System User’s Manual

 Indoor Unit

Table 1-E Ethernet and PDH LIM Configurations

Bandwidth LimA (left) LimB (right) Modulation Bandwidth LimA (left) LimB (right) Modulation
FCC Channel Plan ITU Channel Plan
5 MHz 100BaseT 100BT 16QAM 3.5 MHz 100BaseT 100BT 8PSK
5 MHz 100BT-HG* 100BT-HG* QPSK 3.5 MHz 100BT-HG* 100BT-HG* QPSK
5 MHz 2DS1 100BT 16QAM 3.5 MHz 2DS1 100BT 8PSK
5 MHz 2DS1 100BT-HG* QPSK 3.5 MHz 2DS1 100BT-HG* QPSK
5 MHz 4DS1 100BT 16QAM 3.5 MHz 2E1 100BT 8PSK
5 MHz 4DS1 100BT-HG* 8PSK 3.5 MHz 2E1 100BT-HG* QPSK
5 MHz 8DS1 100BT 16QAM 3.5 MHz None 100BT 8PSK
5 MHz None 100BT 16QAM 3.5 MHz None 100BT-HG* QPSK
5 MHz None 100BT-HG* QPSK 3.5 MHz None None QPSK
10 MHz 100BaseT 100BT 32QAM 7 MHz 100BaseT 100BT 16QAM
10 MHz 100BT-HG* 100BT-HG* QPSK 7 MHz 100BT-HG* 100BT-HG* QPSK
10 MHz 12DS1 100BT 32QAM 7 MHz 12E1 100BT 32QAM
10 MHz 12DS1 100BT-HG* 8PSK 7 MHz 2E1 100BT 32QAM
10 MHz 16DS1 100BT 32QAM 7 MHz 2E1 100BT-HG* QPSK
10 MHz 16DS1 100BT-HG* 16QAM 7 MHz 4E1 100BT 32QAM
10 MHz 2DS1 100BT 32QAM 7 MHz 4E1 100BT-HG* QPSK
10 MHz 2DS1 100BT-HG* QPSK 7 MHz 8E1 100BT 32QAM
10 MHz 4DS1 100BT 32QAM 7 MHz 8E1 100BT-HG* 16QAM
10 MHz 4DS1 100BT-HG* QPSK 7 MHz None 100BT-HG* QPSK
10 MHz 8DS1 100BT 32QAM 7 MHz None 100BT-HG* 32QAM
10 MHz 8DS1 100BT-HG* QPSK 7 MHz 100BaseT 100BT 32QAM
10 MHz None 100BT 32QAM 14 MHz 100BaseT 100BT 32QAM
10 MHz None 100BT-HG* QPSK 14 MHz 100BT-HG* 100BT-HG* QPSK
20 MHz 100BaseT 100BT 32QAM 14 MHz 12E1 100BT 32QAM
20 MHz 100BaseT DS3 32QAM 14 MHz 12E1 100BT-HG* 8PSK
20 MHz 100BT-HG* 100BT-HG* QPSK 14 MHz 16E1 100BT 32QAM
20 MHz 100BT-HG* DS3 16QAM 14 MHz 16E1 100BT-HG* 16QAM
20 MHz 12DS1 100BT 32QAM 14 MHz 2E1 100BT 32QAM
20 MHz 12DS1 100BT-HG* QPSK 14 MHz 2E1 100BT-HG* QPSK
20 MHz 16DS1 100BT 32QAM 14 MHz 4E1 100BT 32QAM
20 MHz 16DS1 100BT-HG* QPSK 14 MHz 4E1 100BT-HG* QPSK
20 MHz 2DS1 100BT 32QAM 14 MHz 8E1 100BT 32QAM
20 MHz 2DS1 100BT-HG* QPSK 14 MHz 8E1 100BT-HG* QPSK
20 MHz 4DS1 100BT 32QAM 14 MHz None 100BT 32QAM
20 MHz 4DS1 100BT-HG* QPSK 14 MHz None 100BT-HG* QPSK
20 MHz 8DS1 100BT 32QAM 28 MHz 100BaseT 100BT 32QAM
20 MHz 8DS1 100BT-HG* QPSK 28 MHz 100BT-HG* 100BT-HG* QPSK
20 MHz DS3 100BT 32QAM 28 MHz 12E1 100BT 32QAM
20 MHz DS3 100BT-HG* 16QAM 28 MHz 12E1 100BT-HG* QPSK
20 MHz None 100BT 32QAM 28 MHz 16E1 100BT 32QAM
20 MHz None 100BT-HG* QPSK 28 MHz 16E1 100BT-HG* QPSK
25 MHz 100BaseT 100BT 32QAM 28 MHz 2E1 100BT 32QAM
25 MHz 100BaseT DS3 32QAM 28 MHz 2E1 100BT-HG* QPSK
25 MHz 100BT-HG* 100BT-HG* QPSK 28 MHz 4E1 100BT 32QAM
25 MHz 100BT-HG* DS3 8PSK 28 MHz 4E1 100BT-HG* QPSK
25 MHz 12DS1 100BT 32QAM 28 MHz 8E1 100BT 32QAM
25 MHz 12DS1 100BT-HG* QPSK 28 MHz 8E1 100BT-HG* QPSK
25 MHz 16DS1 100BT 32QAM 28 MHz None 100BT 32QAM
25 MHz 16DS1 100BT-HG* QPSK 28 MHz None 100BT-HG* QPSK
25 MHz 2DS1 100BT 32QAM
25 MHz 2DS1 100BT-HG* QPSK
25 MHz 4DS1 100BT 32QAM

Proteus AMT System User’s Manual Page 1-9

Radio Description

Table 1-E Ethernet and PDH LIM Configurations (continued)

Bandwidth LimA (left) LimB (right) Modulation Bandwidth LimA (left) LimB (right) Modulation
FCC Channel Plan ITU Channel Plan
25 MHz 4DS1 100BT-HG* QPSK
25 MHz 8DS1 100BT 32QAM
25 MHz 8DS1 100BT-HG* QPSK
25 MHz None 100BT 32QAM
25 MHz None 100BT-HG* QPSK
28 MHz 100BaseT DS3 32QAM
28 MHz 100BT-HG* DS3 8PSK
28 MHz 12DS1 100BT 32QAM
28 MHz 12DS1 100BT-HG* QPSK
28 MHz 16DS1 100BT 32QAM
28 MHz 16DS1 100BT-HG* QPSK
28 MHz 2DS1 100BT 32QAM
28 MHz 2DS1 100BT-HG** QPSK
28 MHz 4DS1 100BT 32QAM
28 MHz 4DS1 100BT-HG* QPSK
28 MHz 8DS1 100BT 32QAM
28 MHz 8DS1 100BT-HG* QPSK
BT BaseT as in 10/100BaseT
* Option with 100BT LIM for either High Gain (HG) or high throughput depending on modulation setup.
Combining 100BT LIM with a E1/DS1 LIM reduces throughput by the equivalent PDH data rate (see “Specifications” on
page 1-27)

Page 1-10 Proteus AMT System User’s Manual

 Indoor Unit

IDU Circuit Boards

The IDU chassis houses four circuit boards:

Table 1-F Major Components of the IDU
Part Numbers
Component
60/270MHz IF 140/350MHz IF
Mainboard 8000567-01 8000567-02
IF Board; 3.5-MHz, ETSI 8000568-10 8000614-30
7-MHz, ETSI 8000568-11 8000614-31
14-MHz, ETSI 8000568-12 8000614-32
28-MHz, ETSI 8000568-13 8000614-33
5-MHz, FCC 8000568-11 8000614-01
10-MHz, FCC 8000568-12 8000614-02
20-MHz, FCC 8000568-13 8000614-03
25-MHz, FCC 8000568-13 8000614-03
Power Supply -48V 8000569-00
+24V 8000579-00
Front Panel 8000601-00

IDUs ship with mainboards matched with IF boards for an IF link at ei-
ther 60-MHz down and 270-MHz up, or an IF link at 140-MHz down
and 350-MHz up. DC power is either –48 or +24V.

IF bandpass filters reside on the IF board. Bandpass filters set the band-
width of the transmitted signal and provides adjacent channel rejection in
the receive path. The IF boards match radio bandwidth to radio capacity.

You can replace the IF board to change bandwidth. The IDU self-adjusts
to the new bandwidth. Changing bandwidth may affect the licensed spec-
trum of your radio; see Appendix F.

NOTE: Repair or replace radio components at a proper repair facility to

prevent damage from electrostatic discharge or mishandling.

Proteus AMT System User’s Manual Page 1-11

Radio Description

Outdoor Unit

Radio Frequency Unit

The outdoor unit (ODU) includes the radio frequency (RF) unit, an inte-
grated antenna with press-fit adapters, and the mounting hardware.

Mounting latches
Antenna

RF Unit

Mounting latches N-Type

input/output
connector

Figure 1-6. Proteus AMT ODU

Appendix G describes The RFU mounts to the antenna with latches, so it can be replaced with-
alternate ODU mounting out using tools or affecting antenna alignment.
configuration - offset and
rack mounting. Table 1-G lists the basic RFU part numbers. Codes show the digits for
transmit/receive spacing, high/low (go/return) channel, and sub-band.
Appendix A lists these specific units.

NOTE: The RF interface on early-model 7/8-GHz RF units were N-type

connectors. The installation kit included a flexible waveguide
and offset mounting hardware. Current units are press-fit (see
Chapter 2, Installation).

Page 1-12 Proteus AMT System User’s Manual

 Outdoor Unit

Table 1-G RF Unit Part Numbers

Frequency Part Number
Unit
Range (GHz) 60/270 MHz IF 140/350 MHz IF
7G 7.12 - 7.9 6300007-xx 63-07yyyy-zzx11-6100*
8G 7.9 - 8.5 6300008-xx 63-08yyyy-zzx11-6100
13G 12.75 - 13.25 6300w13-xx 63-13yyyy-zzx11-6100
15G 14.4 - 15.35 6300w15-xx 63-15yyyy-zzx11-6100
18G 17.7 - 19.7 6300w18-xx 63-18yyyy-zzx11-6100
23G 21.3 - 23.6 6300w23-xx 63-23yyyy-zzx11-6100
26G 24.25 - 26.5 6300w26-xx 63-26yyyy-zzx11-6100
38G 37.0 - 40.0 6300w38-xx 63-38yyyy-zzx11-6100
*. x – subunit or sub-band
y – T/R spacing
z– low band (00) / high band (10)

ANTENNA
POLARIZATION INTERFACE
MARK
LOCKABLE
LATCH

MOUNTING MOUNTING
CLAMPS CLAMPS

LOCKABLE N-TYPE
LATCH INPUT/OUPUT
(TO/FROM IDU)
AGC VOLTAGE
BACK SIDE VIEW FRONT CONNECTION
(FACES ANTENNA)

Figure 1-7. RF Unit Features

Table 1-H RF Unit Connections

Connection Description
IDU In/Out (From IDU) Type N female
AGC Voltage BNC
Direct coupling to antenna (Press fit
RF Input/Output using transitions). Early model 7/8-GHz
RFUs use N-Type connections.

Proteus AMT System User’s Manual Page 1-13

Radio Description

Antenna
Early model 7/8GHz The ODU uses 0.3, 0.6, and 0.8 meter, direct interface, high perfor-
radios interfaced antennas mance, low profile antennas for 13, 15, 18, 23, 26, 38-GHz radios. 1.2
through N-Type and 1.8-m high performance antennas are also available for 13, 15, 18,
connectors and flexible
waveguide. 23, an 26-GHz radios.

Current units are press-fit

like other units.

Figure 1-8. Low Profile Antennas

Figure 1-9. 1.2- and 1.8m Antennas

Appendix G describes Antennas include the radio interface flange (adapter) and mounting hard-
options for separate ware. Antenna mounting hardware is a single bracket that accommodates
antenna and RF unit left or right hand mounting and secures the antenna to a tower or pole.
placement -
offset and rack mounting.

Page 1-14 Proteus AMT System User’s Manual

 Outdoor Unit

Hot-standby ODUs include an unequal-split coupler (Figure 1-10) for

RF unit mounting and coupling. The coupler combines RF ports of two
RF units to a single antenna. Branching loss through the coupler is
1.9-dB on the main RF unit (transmit and receive) and 6.5-dB on the
standby RF unit.

Figure 1-10. Hot-Standby ODU Mounting with Coupler

RF units fasten to antennas with latches. The antenna has a self-fitting

feed assembly for direct 'push-fit' coupling of the RF unit.
Early model hot-standby Hot-standby couplers come with an push-fit antenna interface fixed to
couplers had an antenna the polarization you order. A polarization adapter for the alternate polar-
interface that was ization, typically horizontal polarization, ships in the same package as
vertically polarized, and
you rotated the complete the RF units. Change polarization by changing out polarization adapter.
RF assembly for horizontal On early-model couplers you had to change the orientation of the RF unit
polarization.
assembly (RFUs and coupler) relative to the fixed mounting position of
the antenna, and, on ODUs at 15-GHz and below, you also turned the
transition on the antenna.
All antenna mounting hardware includes course and fine adjustment
points for azimuth and elevation.

Proteus AMT System User’s Manual Page 1-15

Radio Description

Redundancy Switch Unit

The hot-standby (HSB) protected radio has two identical co-located ter-
minals (IDU and ODU) connected to a Redundancy Switch Unit (RSU).
The switch mounts between the two IDUs to provide protection switch-
ing for customer input and output signals. Customer input and output as
well as IDU control signals connect to the switch, which monitors alarms
on both radio paths.

An RSU provides HSB The RSU also acts as the data connection point for 16E1/DS1 IDUs.
switching and 16 customer Since LIM size does not support 16 line connections, each 16E1/DS1
data connections. LIM requires an additional RSU to provide the customer line interface. A
RSUs do not bridge or 32E1/DS1 IDU would need two RSUs.
protect the engineering
orderwire. Jumper cables Switches match line types of the LIMs in the IDUs as listed below and as
link NMS and OW ports of Figure 1-11 and Figure 1-12 show.
co-located radios; see
Table 2-L. Table 1-I Redundancy Switche Units
Line I/O Connections
Offline IDUs on protected RSU Line Type
systems mute the OW port DB78 RJ48 BNC
to prevent echo problems 8/16E1 8209265-10 8209265-00
on ancillary equipment. 17-32E1 8209265-11 8209265-01
8/16E1/E3* 8209265-12 8209265-02
E3 / DS3* — — 8209265-03
2xE3 / DS3* — — 8209265-04
8/16DS1 8209265-15 8209265-05
17-32DS1* 8209265-16 8209265-06
8/16DS1/DS3* 8209265-17 8209265-07
*. BNC connections for E3/DS3 lines.

The RSU has automatic and manual modes. Normally, the switch re-
mains in the AUTO mode. With no alarms the switch logic initially sends
signals through the main path. If RSU logic detects a traffic-affecting
alarm on the local (near-end) radio, it routes user traffic to the alternate
path. Transmitter and receiver paths switch together, but the far-end does
not switch.

A hot-standby switch is Auto-switching logic begins at the main terminal, but once switched
non-reverting and is not does not revert signals to the main path–even after alarms clear. On mul-
hitless. tiple alarms, major alarms have priority over minor alarms. If both paths
have major alarms, switch logic locks the system in its current state until
one terminal operates normally.

Manual switching is a user-controlled switch for maintenance and test-

ing. Manual switch has priority over switch logic.

Page 1-16 Proteus AMT System User’s Manual

 Redundancy Switch Unit

Switching is not hitless and errors occur each time the path switches.
Preventing RSU logic from reverting signals to the main path after
alarms clear allows a technician or operator to return the system to the
primary path at the least disruptive time.

Both ODUs operate on the same frequency and connect to the same an-
tenna through a directional coupler. The active path transmits directly to
the antenna. The transmitter of the path in standby gets attenuated by at
least 50 dB with a mute attenuator at the output of the transmit oscillator.

4/8/16E1
4/8/16DS1

E3
DS3

32E1
32DS1
1-16E1

17-32E1

4/8/16E1 + E3
4/8/16DS1 + DS3

Figure 1-11. Redundancy Switch Configurations with DB78 E1/DS1 Line Connector

Proteus AMT System User’s Manual Page 1-17

Radio Description

4/8/16E1
4/8/16DS1

E3
DS3

2xE3
2xDS3

32E1
32DS1

4/8/16E1 + E3
4/8/16DS1 + DS3

Figure 1-12. Redundancy Switch Configurations with RJ48 E1/DS1 Line Connectors

Page 1-18 Proteus AMT System User’s Manual

 Redundancy Switch Unit

RSU Front Panel Features

The Redundancy Switch Unit (RSU) has common features on the left
side of the front panel, which Figure 1-13 shows. Table 1-J describes the
common features. The right side of the front panel includes a ground lug
for attaching ESD protection devices.
1 2 3

1 2 3 4 5

4 5
Figure 1-13. RSU Front Panel-Left Side

All versions of the RSU have connections for 100BaseT Ethernet data
from the IDU: LAN, LANA, and LANB. The RSU only switches one of
the 100BaseT IDU ports.

Table 1-J Common RSU Front-Panel Features

1 CH1-16 RJ-48 8-pin shielded 120-Ω balanced connectors for
E1 line signals; 100-Ω for DS1.
DB78 high-density connector; 120-Ω balanced for E1;
100-Ω for DS1. Mating connector, PN 3070037-05,
included. See Chapter 2, Installation, for pinout.
2 LAN-A/B RJ-45 ports to connect 10/100BaseT to IDU LIMs.
LAN Customer 10/100BaseT connection.
PROG Maintenance port for RSU programming.
3 HSBY A/B 26-pin high density sub-D connection for connecting
power, controls, alarms, and NMS data from the IDU.
4 IDU A/B & Indicators light when switch activates associated
AUTO mode. Manual mode is either IDU A or B. AUTO
allows logic to determine appropriate switch.
5 AUTO/MAN Mode switch. For manual override to main or standby
Switch radio path. AUTO position allows switch logic to select
the appropriate path.

RSU line ports match RSU line ports (Figure 1-14) match those on the IDU. Figure 1-14 shows
those on the IDU. the RSU line connections. Chapter 2 details the pins of these connectors.
A high-density 100-pin connector interfaces line signals to 16E1 LIMs
on the IDU.

Proteus AMT System User’s Manual Page 1-19

Radio Description

• 4/8/16E1(DS1) interfaces use high-density connectors.

• E3(DS3) interfaces use BNC connectors. Connectors for
2xE3(DS3) are available but one side is inactive at 1E3(DS3).
• 32E1(DS1) requires two RSUs, one configured as the master unit
and one as a slave unit, to accommodate the customer data
connections. See Table 3-A‚Redundancy Switch Unit
Configuration Jumpers‚ page 3-8, Chapter 3.
• 4/8/16E1(DS1)+E3(DS3) interfaces includes the high-density
connectors and BNCs.

4/8/16E1 (DS1)

32 E1 (DS1)

E3 (DS3) / 2 x E3 (DS3)

4/8/16E1 (DS1) + E3 (DS3)

Figure 1-14. Line Interfaces of the Redundancy Switch Unit

Page 1-20 Proteus AMT System User’s Manual

 Redundancy Switch Unit

RSU Interconnect Cables

Hot-standby cables connect customer data and radio control signals from
the Redundancy Switch Unit (RSU) to both main and standby IDUs. See
Chapter 2, Installation, for connector details.

All versions of the RSU have connections for 100BaseT systems. The
RSU has three RJ45 connectors: customer input, main radio, and second-
ary radio. Although the 100BaseT LIM has four ports, the current RSU
provides one switch-protected path.

RSU to 100BaseT LIM

TXA

I N

IDU A

AUTO
IDU B

4 5 1 2 3
RSU to 100BaseT LIM

Figure 1-15. IDU to RSU Connections

RSUs do not bridge or Table 1-K Hot-Standby Radio Interconnect Cables

protect the engineering
Item Type P/N Description
orderwire. Jumper cables
(Item 5) link NMS and OW 1. 2 x DB26-pin 8108658-00 Cable between HSBY connections
ports of co-located radios. of IDU and RSU.
2. 2 x MDR100 3700050-00 Ribbon cable assembly interfaces
Offline IDUs mute the OW E1 data between IDU ad RSU. For
port to prevent echo 4 to 32E1/DS1 radios.
problems on ancillary
equipment. 3. 2 x BNC 8108021-17 6-inch BNC cable assembly to
interface E3/DS3 data between
IDU and RSU. One for transmit
and one for receive data
4. 2 x RJ45,13" * 8108726-00 Connects one port of a 100BaseT
LIM to the RSU. Cable wiring can
be straight-through (recom-
mended) or crossover.
5 2 x RJ48, 8" 8108726-01 EOW and NMS jumper cables*
* All RSUs have Ethernet connections for 100BaseT applications.

NOTE: The RSU protects one port of a 100BaseT LIM.

Proteus AMT System User’s Manual Page 1-21

Radio Description

IDU-to-ODU Interface Cable

A single RG-8A/U coaxial cable assembly that uses Type N connectors
at each end couples the IDU and ODU. The coaxial cable assembly car-
ries transmit IF at 270- or 350-MHz from the IDU to the ODU, and re-
ceiver IF at 60- or 140-MHz from the ODU to the IDU (Figure 1-16).
The cable also carries two radio telemetry channels at 5.5 and 10 MHz
for communication of alarm and control signals between the IDU and
ODU, and -48 VDC to power the ODU. Cable length is limited to 22 dB
cable loss at 270-or 350-MHz. 22 dB cable loss at 270-MHz is typically
300 meters of the recommended cable (Table 1-L).

Two types of cable are available: standard cable for cable runs through
conduit, and plenum cable for cable runs in environmental air spaces
(plenum spaces). Plenum cables provide adequate fire-resistance and
have low smoke-producing characteristics.

Cables and associated material ship un-assembled. Use the assembly

procedure in Chapter 2 to assemble your cable.

NOTE: If you use a standard RG8A/U cable from second-source, MNI

cannot guarantee radio operation to specification.

DATA LINK IF Down IF Up

5.5 MHz Up
60 MHZ or 140 MHZ 270 MHZ or 350 MHZ
10 MHz Down
DC

cable_spectrum.vsd

Figure 1-16. Signals Multiplexed onto the IDU-to-ODU Cable

Table 1-L IDU-to-ODU Cable Components

Description Part Number
RG-8 A/U cable - per meter (LMR-400) 9900641-00
N-Type connector - 2 per cable 9900642-00
RG-8 A/U plenum cable - per meter (LMR400LLPL) 9900646-00
N-type connector for 9900646 - 2 per cable 9900647-00
Ground kit for RG-8 cable 9900648-00
Crimp tool for 9900942-00 9900645-00
Cable-prep tool 9900643-00
Cable center-conductor de-burring tool 9900644-00

Page 1-22 Proteus AMT System User’s Manual

 Radio Management

Radio Management
All Proteus AMT radios include an out-of-band radio management chan-
nel for terminal-to-terminal communication of alarm, control, and status
information. This channel makes all operational data from both ends of a
link available at either terminal. A second overhead channel is a 64-kbps
Ethernet channel for SNMP radio management.

Each device controller accesses all alarms and controls in the IDU and
ODU. The controller also manages auxiliary output relays and external
TTL alarm inputs. Access the controller in several ways:

• Element Manager—A Windows™ graphical interface provided with

each Proteus AMT radio that connects to the controller from the
serial COMPUTER port, the NMS port, or through an external modem at
the MODEM port on the front panel. Radios ship with the EM
installation disk.
• CTI/CLI—Craft-terminal interface and command line interface.
Character-mode menu system for VT100-compatible terminals or
applications. Access the command line by exiting the menu system.
Connection to the COMPUTER port, through Telnet to the NMS port, or
through an external modem at the MODEM port on the front panel.
• SNMP—IP-based open-system interface that connects to the NMS
port or through the MODEM port. Radios ship with the Proteus AMT
management information base (MIB) file for use with any SNMP
application.

Multiple radio controllers may be cascade coupled to a central manager.

Each controller has its own address, so the manager can access coupled
radios individually.

Element Manager

Element Manager (EM) is the Proteus AMT radio and radio network
maintenance and control system. EM gives radio installers, maintenance
personnel, and operators a tool for complete management and control of
their radios–on site or from remote locations–using the familiar Win-
dows environment.

EM has full function from any of three connections: serial, Ethernet, or

dial-in. Software controls all radio configuration. You never open the
IDU to change jumpers or switches.

EM interfaces radios locally on the serial or Ethernet ports. EM inter-

faces remotely through an IP network or modem to provide all the same
functions as the local serial interface.

Proteus AMT System User’s Manual Page 1-23

Radio Description

EM Connections

EM operates in a personal computer running the Windows operating sys-

tem attached to the Proteus AMT radio. As a network element the radio
acts is a multi-homed device. That is, the radio has two IP interfaces: an
external 10/100-Mbps Ethernet interface, called LAN in EM, and an in-
tegral 64-kbps IP-based overhead channel, called WAN. The WAN trans-
ports radio-specific data across each microwave link or a radio network.

EM queries the radio that you connect to, or address, for configuration,
events, and alarms, and then updates dynamic data every five seconds.
EM displays radio information, alarms, status, configuration, logs, and
reports. You can open any or all screens on the EM main window.

SNMP

SNMP provides device management using Ethernet. Since SNMP is an

open-standard protocol, any SNMP-capable application can manage Pro-
teus AMT radios.

SMNP is a network management standard for LANs that defines a cli-

ent/server relationship. The client program or network manager makes
virtual connections to a server program, called an SNMP agent, that op-
erates on a remote network device and serves information about device
status to the manager. SNMP uses a management information base
(MIB) to define these virtual connections. Any SNMP manager, with
proper access, can query the status and modify the configuration of each
managed device.

A MIB is a standard set of structure and format definitions for exchang-

ing information about network devices. Microwave Networks' MIB is a
private MIB for its radio. The MIB contains the common name of each
object (which must be unique), the value of the object IDs (which are hi-
erarchical and must be unique), and the textual description of the syntax
and semantics of the radio.

SNMP Connection

Ethernet routing options include static routing – where you manually en-
ter up to 32 IP path addresses – or dynamic routing – where IP routing is
self-learning. Routing Information Protocol version 2 (RIP2) provides
dynamic routing of up to 15 radios in a subnet. Spans of these 15-radio
subnets are unlimited.

Page 1-24 Proteus AMT System User’s Manual

 Radio Management

RIP is primarily for networks of moderate size and has these limitations:

• Limited to sub-networks whose longest path is 7 hops (15 radios).

• Uses fixed metrics to compare alternative routes; it is unsuited to
situations where routes need to be chosen based on real-time
parameters such a measured delay, reliability, or load.

After setting the IP address of the first-accessed radio locally, and then
configuring it as an intermediate gateway, routing tables of radios net-
work exchange and incorporate route information as the radio network
changes.

The management station, or SNMP manager, sends get and set requests
to the SNMP agents–the radios. The radio answers get and set requests
from the manager as specified by the MIB.

Each radio has two IP addresses: the Ethernet interface at the front panel
(LAN), and the IP-over-air interface (WAN). The over-air interface
transports radio support data, including get and set requests from the
SNMP manager, over the microwave link and to other addressed radios
as routing tables define (see Appendix D for LAN and WAN routing).

Text-Based Menu Interface

A text-based or craft-terminal interface (CTI) is available on all Proteus

AMT radios as an alternative to EM and SNMP for radio operation, ad-
ministration, and maintenance. The Proteus AMT radio text-based menu
system gives radio installers and maintenance personnel a simple and ef-
ficient way to monitor and control radios from a VT100 compatible ter-
minal or from a portable PC that uses a terminal emulation application.

The text-based interface does not have the hardware and software re-
quirements of the graphical interface, and is small enough to be integral
to each radio – all you need is a terminal.

Radio information presented by the text-based interface is static and does

not provide the extended help information that a novice user may need.
Text-based BER and performance statics update once every five seconds.

Text-Based Interface Connection

Proteus AMT text interface operates on any VT100-compatible terminal

or application attached to the COMPUTER connection or through a Telnet
session as the next section describes.

Proteus AMT System User’s Manual Page 1-25

Radio Description

Telnet

Use Telnet to connect to the Proteus AMT radio via IP without using an
SNMP manager. Telnet is a terminal emulation program for TCP/IP net-
works. Telnet typically comes with Windows. Connecting to the radio
through Telnet enables the text-based interface – CTI/CLI.
The Telnet option enables commercially available TCP/IP network man-
agement facilities a method of monitoring Microwave Networks' Proteus
AMT radios.
To start a Telnet session, connect to the IP address of a radio on your net-
work, and then log in to the radio by entering a valid user name and pass-
word.

Telnet Connection

Connect Telnet to a radio through the RJ-45 NMS connections or serial

modem connection of the front panel. The PPP interface of the MODEM
connection is a 64-kbps serial interface to the radio IP interface. This al-
lows remote management using an external telephony modem. The IDU
negotiates the telephone signaling to establish the dial-in serial link. The
radio does not provide dial-out service.
Connect and power a Because dial-in access uses normal telephone lines, the quality of the
modem for PPP before connection is not always good and your data rate may be limited.
powering the IDU.

Engineering Orderwire (EOW)

The Proteus AMT radio has a voice overhead channel. Voice overhead is
a 64-kbps out-of-band overhead channel for the optional handset. These
optional handsets have a DTMF encoder for signaling any terminal in a
contiguous network.
The optional handset connects to the RJ11 modular jack on the IDU front
panel. Two RJ-45 jacks (OW1\OW2) provide a bridge connection for the
EOW of co-located terminals in voice mode.
Dial the station code plus # The three-digit orderwire site ID that you set using the management soft-
to ring the site; * rings all ware, becomes the site station code. To ring a site, dial the station code
sites. plus #. The site rings for one minute or until PTT on the handset is
pressed; * rings all stations.
If you do not use EOW, you can place the channel in data mode. In data
mode signals at OW1 convert from serial to parallel data at RS422 levels
for an 'across-the-link' 64-kbps clear channel. OW2 and the handset in-
terface become inactive. Use the EM and CTI Configuration menus to
change orderwire mode from voice to data on the local radio.

Page 1-26 Proteus AMT System User’s Manual

 Specifications

Specifications
Proteus AMT is a mixed Plesiochronous Digital Hierarchy (PDH) and
packet data radio. The radios service PDH lines that use international
digital (E-carrier) standards defined by the ITU-T, and that use North
American (T-carrier) digital transmission standards defined by ANSI.
The first few tables cover general radio specifications. Subsections that
follow list specifications for international and North American standards.
The index below lists the individual specification tables in this section.

Note: The last section of this chapter lists specifications for radios that
can service both T- & E-carrier signals.

Table 1-M General Radio Specification.................................... 1-28

Table 1-N Environmental Specification ................................... 1-29
Table 1-O Mechanical Specification ........................................ 1-29
Table 1-P Power Specification................................................. 1-29
Table 1-Q Hot-Standby Branching Loss & Switch Time......... 1-29
Table 1-R RF Transmit Power.................................................. 1-30
Table 1-S 2E1 to 1E3 System Specification ............................ 1-30
Table 1-T 20E1 to 32E1\2E3 System Specification................. 1-31
Table 1-U 100BaseT – International Bandwidth...................... 1-31
Table 1-V 2 x 100BaseT – International Bandwidth ................ 1-31
Table 1-W 2E1+100BaseT System Specification ..................... 1-31
Table 1-X 4E1+100BaseT System Specification ..................... 1-32
Table 1-Y 16E1+100BaseT System Specification ................... 1-32
Table 1-Z RF Transmit Power.................................................. 1-33
Table 1-AA 4DS1 to 24DS1 System Specification ..................... 1-33
Table 1-AB 28DS1\DS3 & 32DS1 System Specification........... 1-34
Table 1-AC 2DS1+DS3 to 8DS1+DS3 System Specification .... 1-34
Table 1-AD 12DS1+DS3 to 2DS3 System Specification............ 1-34
Table 1-AE 100BaseT System – North American Bandwidths.. 1-34
Table 1-AF 2 x 100BaseT – North American Bandwidths......... 1-35
Table 1-AG 2DS1+100BaseT System Specification................... 1-35
Table 1-AH 4DS1+100BaseT System Specification................... 1-35
Table 1-AI 8DS1+100BaseT System Specification.................. 1-36
Table 1-AJ 12DS1+100BaseT System Specifications ............... 1-36
Table 1-AK 16DS1+100BaseT System Specifications ............... 1-36
Table 1-AL DS3+100BaseT System Specifications ................... 1-36
Table 1-AM 2E1+2DS1 to 16E1+16DS1 Specifications............. 1-37
Table 1-AN 2E1+DS3 to E3+DS3 Specifications....................... 1-37

Proteus AMT System User’s Manual Page 1-27

Radio Description

Table 1-M General Radio Specification

Parameter Specification
Operating Frequencies 7.125—8.50 GHz 10.00—10.68 GHz 10.70—11.70 GHz
12.75—13.25 GHz 14.40—15.35 GHz 17.70—19.70 GHz
21.20—23.60 GHz 24.25—26.50 GHz 37.00—40.00 GHz
Transmit Frequency Stability ±10 ppm
Output Power Control Manual or Automatic:
4 QPSK 0–30 dB
8 QPSK 0–28 dB
16 QAM 0–25 dB
32 QAM 0–22 dB
Receiver Frequency Stability ±10 ppm
Receiver Coding Reed Solomon FEC
Residual BER < 10-11
IDU to ODU Interface
Connector Type Coaxial, N-Type Female
Cable Times Microwave LMR400 or equivalent RG-8A/U
Max. Distance 22 dB cable loss at 270-MHz, or 22 dB cable loss at 350-MHz
Engineering Orderwire Optional DTMF handset, RJ-11 jack and two RJ-45 bridge ports
Auxiliary Data Channels Two RS232 channels up to 19.2 kbps with configured parity, stop bits, and
polarity. One RS422 channel at 64 kbps (not available with EOW).
Relay Alarm Outputs 4 Form-C relays; NO/NC contacts. Alarms mapped to relays with software.

External Inputs Six TTL floating inputs

Radio Management
SNMP NMS (10/100BaseT), RJ-45
Element Manager NMS (10/100BaseT), RJ-45; MODEM (RS-232), DB9 for PPP
Craft Terminal COMPUTER (RS-232), DB9 connector for 9600 bps VT100 terminal
External Modem MODEM (RS-232), DB9 for dial-up access with EM or CTI.
Standards
Safety EN 60950
EMI/EMC EN 301 489; EN 300 385, FCC Part 15
Radio Approval FCC Part 101
7/8 GHz EN 301 216; ITU-R F.385.7
10 GHz EN 301 216; ITU-R F.747
11 GHz EN 301 216; ITU-R F.387.7
13 GHz EN 301 128; ITU-R F.497.5
15 GHz EN 301 128; ITU-R F.636-3
18 GHz EN 301 128; ITU-R F.595.5
23 GHz EN 300 198; ITU-R F.637-2
26 GHz EN 300 431; ITU-R F.748-2
38 GHz EN 300 197; ITU-R F.749-1

Page 1-28 Proteus AMT System User’s Manual

 Specifications

Table 1-N Environmental Specification

IDU
Temperature -5 to +50°C ETSI 300-019-1-3 Class 3.2
Humidity up 95%, non-condensing
Altitude 4,500 meters
ODU Full Performance Operational*
Temperature -33 to +55°C -55 to +55°C ETSI 300-019-1-4 Class 4.1E
Humidity up to 100% (with extended temperature requirement)
Altitude 4,500 meters
*. System gain variance is within 2 dB.

Table 1-O Mechanical Specification

IDU
Dimensions (H x W x D) 45 x 482 x 340 millimeter (1.75 x 19 x 13.4 inches)
Weight 4.4 kg
RSU
Dimensions (H x W x D) 45 x 482 x 137 millimeter (1.75 x 19 x 5.4 inches)
Weight 0.36 kg
ODU
Dimensions 26 cm OD x 15 cm deep
Weight 4.4 kg

Table 1-P Power Specification

Parameter Specification
Standard Voltage -40 Vdc to -60 Vdc EN 300 132-2
Optional Voltage +19 to +30 Vdc (Power Supply Inter-
50 watts non-protected radio face at the Input to
Power Consumption* Telecommunications
100 watts protected radio
Equipment)
Power Protection 48V – 5A fuse
24V – 7A fuse
If used, circuit breakers must be ≥6A with
a trip characteristic of 'C' or slower.
*. Inrush current: ≥8A for up to 3 ms. When using an AC-to-DC supply consider inrush current. MNI
recommends its AC converter, P/N 8708263-00.

Table 1-Q Hot-Standby Branching Loss & Switch Time

ODU Primary Standby
Transmitter 1.9 dB 6.5 dB
Receiver 1.9 dB 6.5 dB
Hot Standby Switch Time
Typical 237 ms, max 300 ms

Proteus AMT System User’s Manual Page 1-29

Radio Description

International Data Rates

The following tables list specifications for non-protected radios that use
the International (CEPT; E-carrier) digital transmission format. For a
hot-standby radio the branching loss is 1.9 dB on the main transmitter
and receiver and 6.5 dB on the standby transmitter and receiver.

Table 1-R lists transmit power for all data rates and bandwidths. Table 1-S
and Table 1-T list PDH specifications for 2E1 to 32E1\2E3. Table 1-U
through Table 1-Y lists 100BaseT specifications of valid 100BaseT con-
figurations at time of publication.

The last section in this chapter lists specifications for radios that service
both digital signal formats (T- & E-carrier).

NOTE: Worst case 100BaseT throughput is based on 1518-byte packets.

Smaller packets result in higher throughput. Combining
100BaseT with E1/DS1 lines reduces throughput by the
equivalent PDH data rate.

Table 1-R RF Transmit Power

TX Power (dBm)*
RF Unit
QPSK 8PSK 16QAM 32QAM
7/8 GHz 25 21 21 21
11, 13, 15, 18 GHz 24 20 20 20
23 GHz 22 19 19 19
26 GHz 22 18 18 18
38 GHz 20 16 16 16
* Maximum TX power setting. Actual output power will be ±1dB at the
antenna flange.
Minimum TX power setting must be no less than -4 dBm.

Table 1-S 2E1 to 1E3 System Specification

Data Rate 2E1 4E1 8E1 12E1 16E1/E3
Modulation QPSK 8PSK QPSK 16QAM QPSK 32QAM 16QAM QPSK
Bandwidth (MHz) 3.5 3.5 7 7 14 7 14 28
RX Thresholds (dBm; 1E-6)
7/8, 13, 38 GHz -91 -83 -88.5 -81.5 -85.5 -77 -78.5 -82.5
11 GHz -90 -82 -87.5 -80.5 -84.5 -76 -77.5 -81.5
*
15, 18, 23, 26 GHz -92 -84 -89.5 -82.5 -86.5 -78 -79.5 -83.5
* Radio management applications read up to -90 dBm. RSL for radios operating
beyond -90 dBm does not display accurately.

Page 1-30 Proteus AMT System User’s Manual

 Specifications

Table 1-T 20E1 to 32E1\2E3 System Specification

Data Rate 20E1 4E1+E3 24E1/E3+8E1 32E1/2E3
Modulation 16QAM QPSK 32QAM QPSK 32QAM 8PSK 16QAM
Bandwidth (MHz) 14 28 14 28 14 28 28
RX Thresholds (dBm; 1E-6)
7/8, 13, 38 GHz -76.5 -81 -75.5 -81 -74 -78 -75
11 GHz -75.5 -80 -74.5 -80 -73 -77 -74
15, 18, 23, 26 GHz -77.5 -82 -76.5 -82 -75 -79 -76

Table 1-U 100BaseT System Specification – International Bandwidth

Data Rate 100BT
Modulation* QPSK 8PSK QPSK 32QAM QPSK 32QAM QPSK 32QAM
Bandwidth (MHz) 3.5 3.5 7 7 14 14 28 28
Data Throughput (Mb/s)* 4.960 7.884 10.216 25.456 20.644 50.944 41.536 100.800
RX Thresholds (dBm; 1E-6)
7/8, 13, 38 GHz -90.5 -85 -87.5 -77 -84.5 -74 -81.5 -71
11 GHz -89.5 -84 -86.5 -76 -83.5 -73 -80.5 -70
15, 18, 23, 26 GHz -91.5 -86 -88.5 -78 -85.5 -75 -82.5 -72
* High gain or high throughput versions are available for 100BT configurations
depending on modulation setup. Other modulations available by request.

Table 1-V 2 x 100BaseT* System – International Bandwidth

Data Rate 100BT+100BT
Modulation** QPSK 8PSK QPSK 32QAM QPSK 32QAM QPSK 32QAM
Bandwidth (MHz) 3.5 3.5 7 7 14 14 28 28
Data Throughput Mb/s** 4.960 7.884 10.216 25.456 20.644 50.944 41.536 100.800
RX Thresholds (dBm; 1E-6)
7/8, 13, 38 GHz -90.5 -85 -87.5 -77 -84.5 -74 -81.5 -71
11 GHz -89.5 -84 -86.5 -76 -83.5 -73 -80.5 -70
15, 18, 23, 26 GHz -91.5 -86 -88.5 -78 -85.5 -75 -82.5 -72
* Use the radio maintenance application to divide the aggregate bit rate between
the two 100BaseT LIMs up to the available rate for each bandwidth.
** High gain or high throughput versions are available for 100BT configurations
depending on modulation setup. Other modulations available by request.

Table 1-W 2E1+100BaseT System Specification

Data Rate 2E1+100BT
Modulation* QPSK 8PSK QPSK 32QAM QPSK 32QAM QPSK 32QAM
Bandwidth (MHz) 3.5 3.5 7 7 14 14 28 28
Data Throughput Mb/s* 0.816 3.272 6.056 21.752 16.520 46.656 37.344 100.800
RX Thresholds (dBm; 1E-6)
7/8, 13, 38 GHz -90.5 -85.5 -87.5 -77 -84.5 -74 -81.5 -70.5
11 GHz -89.5 -84.5 -86.5 -76 -83.5 -73 -80.5 -69.5
15, 18, 23, 26 GHz -91.5 -86.5 -88.5 -78 -85.5 -75 -82.5 -71.5
* High gain or high throughput versions are available for 100BT configurations
depending on modulation setup. Other modulations available by request.

Proteus AMT System User’s Manual Page 1-31

Radio Description

Table 1-X 4E1+100BaseT System Specification

Data Rate 4E1+100BT 8E1+100BT
Modulation* QPSK 32QAM QPSK 32QAM QPSK 32QAM 16QAM 32QAM QPSK 32QAM QPSK 32QAM
Bandwidth (MHz) 7 7 14 14 28 28 7 7 14 14 28 28
Data Throughput Mb/s* 1.912 17.608 12.376 42.368 33.152 98.784 4.088 9.320 4.088 34.080 24.768 90.272
RX Thresholds (dBm; 1E-6)
7/8, 13, 38 GHz -87.5 -77 -84.5 -74 -81.5 -70.5 -80 -77 -84.5 -74 -81.5 -70.5
11 GHz -86.5 -76 -83.5 -73 -80.5 -69.5 -79 -76 -83.5 -73 -80.5 -69.5
15, 18, 23, 26 GHz -88.5 -78 -85.5 -75 -82.5 -71.5 -81 -78 -85.5 -75 -82.5 -71.5
* High gain or high throughput versions are available for 100BT configurations
depending on modulation setup. Other modulations available by request.

Table 1-Y 16E1+100BaseT System Specification

Data Rate 16E1+100BT
Modulation* 16QAM 32QAM QPSK 32QAM
Bandwidth (MHz) 14 14 28 28
Data Throughput Mb/s* 8.536 16.640 8 73.12
RX Thresholds (dBm; 1E-6)
7/8, 13, 38 GHz -77 -74 -81.5 -70.5
11 GHz -76 -73 -80.5 -69.5
15, 18, 23, 26 GHz -78 -75 -82.5 -71.5
* High gain or high throughput versions are available for 100BT configurations
depending on modulation setup. Other modulations available by request.

Page 1-32 Proteus AMT System User’s Manual

 Specifications

North American Data Rates

The following tables list power and threshold measurements for non-pro-
tected radios using the North American (T-carrier) digital transmission
format. For a hot-standby radio the branching loss is 1.9-dB on the main
transmitter and receiver and 6.5-dB on the standby transmitter and re-
ceiver.

Table 1-Z lists transmit power for all data rates and bandwidths.Table 1-AA
to Table 1-AD list PDH specifications for 4DS1 to 2DS3. Table 1-AE
through Table 1-AL lists 100BaseT specifications of valid 100BaseT
configurations at time of publication. The section following lists specifi-
cations for radios that service both digital signal formats (T- & E-car-
rier).

NOTE: Worst case 100BaseT throughput is based on 1518-byte packets.

Smaller packets result in higher throughput. Combining
100BaseT with E1/DS1 lines reduces throughput by the
equivalent PDH data rate.

Table 1-Z RF Transmit Power

TX Power (dBm)*
RF Unit
QPSK 8PSK 16QAM 32QAM
7/8 GHz 25 21 21 21
11, 13, 15, 18 GHz 24 20 20 20
23 GHz 22 19 19 19
26 GHz 22 18 18 18
38 GHz 20 16 16 16
* Maximum TX power setting. Actual output power will be ±1dB at the
antenna flange.
Minimum TX power setting must be no less than -4dBm.

Table 1-AA 4DS1 to 24DS1 System Specification

Data Rate 4DS1 8DS1 12DS1 16DS1 24DS1
Modulation QPSK 16QAM QPSK 8PSK 16QAM QPSK 32QAM 8PSK QPSK QPSK
Bandwidth (MHz) 5 5 10 10 10 20 10 20 25 30*
RX Thresholds (dBm; 1E-6)
7/8, 13, 38 GHz -89.5 -82 -86.5 -82 -79 -84 -75 -79 -81.5 -82
11 GHz -88.5 -81 -85.5 -81 -78 -83 -74 -78 -80.5 -81
15, 18, 23, 26 GHz -90.5 -83 -87.5 -83 -80 -85 -76 -80 -82.5 -83
* Occupied bandwidth is 28 MHz

Proteus AMT System User’s Manual Page 1-33

 Radio Description

Table 1-AB 28DS1\DS3 & 32DS1 System Specification

Data Rate 28DS1/DS3 32DS1
Modulation 8PSK 8PSK 8PSK 16QAM 8PSK 8PSK
Bandwidth (MHz) 20 25 30* 20 25 30*
RX Thresholds (dBm; 1E-6)
7/8, 13, 38 GHz -78 -78.5 -78 -76.5 -78 -78
11 GHz -77 -77.5 -77 -75.5 -77 -77
15, 18, 23, 26 GHz -79 -79.5 -79 -77.5 -79 -79
*Occupied bandwidth is 28 MHz

Table 1-AC 2DS1+DS3 to 8DS1+DS3 System Specification

Data Rate 2DS1+DS3 4DS1+DS3 8DS1+DS3
Modulation 16QAM 8PSK 8PSK 16QAM 8PSK 8PSK 16QAM 8PSK 8PSK
* *
Bandwidth (MHz) 20 25 30 20 25 30 20 25 30*
RX Thresholds (dBm; 1E-6)
7/8, 13, 38 GHz -76.5 -78 -78 -76.5 -77.5 -78 -75.5 -76.5 -77
10, 11 GHz -75.5 -77 -77 -75.5 -76.5 -77 -74.5 -75.5 -76
15, 18, 23, 26 GHz -77.5 -79 -79 -77.5 -78.5 -79 -76.5 -77.5 -78
* Occupied bandwidth is 28 MHz

Table 1-AD 12DS1+DS3 to 2DS3 System Specification

Data Rate 12DS1+DS3 16DS1+DS3 2DS3
Modulation 32QAM 16QAM 8PSK 32QAM 16QAM 16QAM 32QAM 32QAM
Bandwidth (MHz) 20 25 30* 20 25 30* 25 30*
RX Thresholds (dBm; 1E-6)
7/8, 13, 38 GHz -73.5 -75.5 -76 -73 -75 -75 -71.5 -71.5
10, 11 GHz -72.5 -74.5 -75 -72 -74 -74 -70.5 -70.5
15, 18, 23, 26 GHz -74.5 -76.5 -77 -74 -76 -76 -72.5 -72.5
* Occupied bandwidth is 28 MHz

Table 1-AE 100BaseT System Specification – North American Bandwidths

Data Rate 100BT
Modulation* QPSK 16QAM QPSK 32QAM QPSK 32QAM QPSK 32QAM QPSK 32QAM
**
Bandwidth (MHz) 5 5 10 10 20 20 25 25 30 30**
Data Throughput* 7.144 14.536 14.584 36.816 29.168 73.760 36.992 93.088 41.536 100.800
RX Thresholds (dBm; 1E-6)
7/8, 13, 38 GHz -89 -81.5 -86 -75.5 -83 -72.5 -82 -71.5 -81.5 -71
11 GHz -88 -80.5 -85 -74.5 -82 -71.5 -81 -70.5 -80.5 -70
15, 18, 23, 26 GHz -90 -82.5 -87 -76.5 -84 -73.5 -83 -72.5 -82.5 -72
* High gain or high throughput versions are available for 100BT configurations
depending on modulation setup. Other modulations available by request.
** Occupied bandwidth is 28 MHz

Page 1-34 Proteus AMT System User’s Manual

 Specifications

Table 1-AF 2 x 100BaseT* System – North American Bandwidths

Data Rate 100BT+100BT
Modulation** QPSK 16QAM QPSK 32QAM QPSK 32QAM QPSK 32QAM QPSK 32QAM
Bandwidth (MHz) 5 5 10 10 20 20 25 25 30† 30†
Data Throughput Mb/s** 7.144 14.536 14.584 36.816 29.168 73.760 36.992 93.088 41.536 100.800
RX Thresholds (dBm; 1E-6)
7/8, 13, 38 GHz -89 -81.5 -86 -75.5 -83 -72.5 -82 -71.5 -81.5 -71
11 GHz -88 -80.5 -85 -74.5 -82 -71.5 -81 -70.5 -80.5 -70
15, 18, 23, 26 GHz -90 -82.5 -87 -76.5 -84 -73.5 -83 -72.5 -82.5 -72
* Use the radio maintenance application to divide the aggregate bit rate between
the two 100BaseT LIMs up to the available rate for each bandwidth.
** High gain or high throughput versions are available for 100BT configurations
depending on modulation setup. Other modulations available by request.
† Occupied bandwidth is 28 MHz

Table 1-AG 2DS1+100BaseT System Specification

Data Rate 2DS1+100BT
Modulation* QPSK 16QAM QPSK 32QAM QPSK 32QAM QPSK 32QAM QPSK 32QAM
Bandwidth (MHz) 5 5 10 10 20 20 25 25 30* 30**
Data Throughput Mb/s* 4.008 11.296 11.448 33.648 26.000 70.496 33.824 89.824 38.368 100.800
RX Thresholds (dBm; 1E-6)
7/8, 13, 38 GHz -89 -81.5 -86 -75.5 -83 -72.5 -82 -71.5 -81.5 -71
11 GHz -88 -80.5 -85 -74.5 -82 -71.5 -81 -70.5 -80.5 -70
15, 18, 23, 26 GHz -90 -82.5 -87 -76.5 -84 -73.5 -83 -72.5 -82.5 -72
* High gain or high throughput versions are available for 100BT configurations
depending on modulation setup.
** Occupied bandwidth is 28 MHz

Table 1-AH 4DS1+100BaseT System Specification

Data Rate 4DS1+100BT
Modulation* 8PSK 16QAM QPSK 32QAM QPSK 32QAM QPSK 32QAM QPSK 32QAM
Bandwidth (MHz) 5 5 10 10 20 20 25 25 30** 30**
Data Throughput Mb/s* 4.368 8.128 8.312 30.480 22.832 67.232 30.656 86.560 35.200 97.600
RX Thresholds (dBm; 1E-6)
7/8, 13, 38 GHz -84 -81.5 -86 -75.5 -83 -72.5 -82 -71.5 -81.5 -71
11 GHz -83 -80.5 -85 -74.5 -82 -71.5 -81 -70.5 -80.5 -70
15, 18, 23, 26 GHz -85 -82.5 -87 -76.5 -84 -73.5 -83 -72.5 -82.5 -72
* High gain or high throughput versions are available for 100BT configurations
depending on modulation setup.
** Occupied bandwidth is 28 MHz

Proteus AMT System User’s Manual Page 1-35

 Radio Description

Table 1-AI 8DS1+100BaseT System Specification

Data Rate 8DS1+100BT
Modulation* 16QAM QPSK 32QAM QPSK 32QAM QPSK 32QAM QPSK 32QAM
Bandwidth (MHz) 5 10 10 20 20 25 25 30** 30**
Data Throughput Mb/s* 1.792 2.040 24.144 16.496 60.704 24.320 80.032 28.864 91.072
RX Thresholds (dBm; 1E-6)
7/8, 13, 38 GHz -81.5 -86 -75.5 -83 -72.5 -82 -71.5 -81.5 -71
10, 11 GHz -80.5 -85 -74.5 -82 -71.5 -81 -70.5 -80.5 -70
15, 18, 23, 26 GHz -82.5 -87 -76.5 -84 -73.5 -83 -72.5 -82.5 -72
* High gain or high throughput versions for 100BT configurations depend on
modulation.
** Occupied bandwidth is 28 MHz
Table 1-AJ 12DS1+100BaseT System Specifications
Data Rate 12DS1+100BT
Modulation* 8PSK 32QAM QPSK 32QAM QPSK 32QAM QPSK 32QAM
Bandwidth (MHz) 10 10 20 20 25 25 30** 30**
Data Throughput Mb/s* 3.088 17.808 10.160 54.176 17.984 73.504 22.528 84.544
RX Thresholds (dBm; 1E-6)
7/8, 13, 38 GHz -81 -75.5 -83 -72.5 -82 -71.5 -81.5 -71
10, 11 GHz -80 -74.5 -82 -71.5 -81 -70.5 -80.5 -70
15, 18, 23, 26 GHz -82 -76.5 -84 -73.5 -83 -72.5 -82.5 -72
* High gain or high throughput versions for 100BT configurations depend on
modulation.
** Occupied bandwidth is 28 MHz
Table 1-AK 16DS1+100BaseT System Specifications
Data Rate 16DS1+100BT
Modulation* 16QAM 32QAM QPSK 32QAM QPSK 32QAM QPSK 32QAM
Bandwidth (MHz) 10 10 20 20 25 25 30** 30**
Data Throughput Mb/s* 10.856 11.472 3.824 47.648 11.648 66.976 16.192 78.016
RX Thresholds (dBm; 1E-6)
7/8, 13, 38 GHz -78.5 -75.5 -83 -72.5 -82 -71.5 -81.5 -71
11 GHz -77.5 -74.5 -82 -71.5 -81 -70.5 -80.5 -70
15, 18, 23, 26 GHz -79.5 -76.5 -84 -73.5 -83 -72.5 -82.5 -72
* High gain or high throughput versions for 100BT configurations depend on
modulation.
** Occupied bandwidth is 28 MHz
Table 1-AL DS3+100BaseT System Specifications
Data Rate DS3+100BT
Modulation* 16QAM 32QAM 8PSK 32QAM 8PSK 32QAM
Bandwidth (MHz) 20 20 25 25 30** 30**
Data Throughput Mb/s* 14.560 25.952 10.960 48.256 17.680 59.296
RX Thresholds (dBm; 1E-6)
7/8, 13, 38 GHz -75.5 -72.5 -77 -71.5 -76.5 -71
11 GHz -74.5 -71.5 -76 -70.5 -75.5 -70
15, 18, 23, 26 GHz -76.5 -73.5 -78 -72.5 -77.5 -72
* High gain or high throughput for 100BT configurations depend on modulation.
** Occupied bandwidth is 28 MHz

Page 1-36 Proteus AMT System User’s Manual

 Specifications

Mixed Data Rates

An optional configuration of the Proteus AMT radio provides simulta-
neous use of LIMs with different telecommunication carrier systems: one
for the North American T-carrier system that corresponds to the digital
signal (DS) level hierarchy, and one for the European (CEPT) E-carrier
system. Table 1-R or Table 1-Z detail RF transmit power for all data
rates and bandwidths. Table 1-AM and Table 1-AN list thresholds of the
mixed data-type configurations.

Table 1-AM 2E1+2DS1 to 16E1+16DS1 System Specifications

Data Rate 2E1 + 2DS1 4E1 + 4DS1 8E1 + 8DS1 16E1 + 16DS1
Modulation 16QAM QPSK 8PSK QPSK 8PSK QPSK 8PSK
Bandwidth (MHz) 3.5 7 7 14 14 28 28
RX Thresholds (dBm; 1E-6)
7/8, 13, 38 GHz -83.5 -88 -82.5 -85 -79.5 -81.5 -76.5
11 GHz -82.5 -87 -81.5 -84 -78.5 -80.5 -75.5
15, 18, 23, 26 GHz -84.5 -89 -83.5 -86 -80.5 -82.5 -77.5

Table 1-AN 2E1+DS3 to E3+DS3 System Specifications

Data Rate 2E1 + DS3 4E1 + DS3 8E1 + DS3 16E1 + DS3 E3 + DS3
Modulation 32QAM 8PSK 8PSK 8PSK 16QAM 16QAM
Bandwidth (MHz) 14 28 28 28 28 28
RX Thresholds (dBm; 1E-6)
7/8, 13, 38 GHz -74 -76.5 -77 -76.5 -74 -74
11 GHz -73 -75.5 -76 -75.5 -73 -73
15, 18, 23, 26 GHz -75 -77.5 -78 -77.5 -75 -75

Proteus AMT System User’s Manual Page 1-37

Radio Description

Page 1-38 Proteus AMT System User’s Manual

 Chapter 2
Installation

Overview
This material covers This chapter outlines physical installation of the Proteus AMT radio. See
physical installation. Chapter 3, Commissioning, to setup the radio and start traffic.
See Chapter 3 to setup
and initialize. Proper installation planning includes: selecting a site, verifying ground-
ing, and arranging power. Follow procedures in this section for trou-
ble-free operation. Procedures typically progress in the following order:
• preparing the site
• unpacking equipment
• running the coaxial cable
• installing the IDU
• installing the RSU
• installing the ODU
Location
When selecting a site look for:
• Climate-controlled environment with adequate air flow for the IDU
• Ample power. When using an AC-to-DC supply consider that inrush
current can be ≥8A for up to 3 ms. MNI recommends its AC
converter, P/N 8708263-00. If used, rate circuit breakers to handle
initial in-rush current: ≥6A with trip characteristic 'C' or slower.
• Site ground that meets ITU-T Rec. K.27 and local standards
• Proper floor loading, space, and overhead support
• Enough clearance in front of the equipment for maintenance
• Enough lighting for installation and maintenance
Environment

Mount the IDU away from heat sources and in a weather–protected area.
The IDU chassis relies on convection to cool the boards. Keep heat sinks
on the back of the chassis clear of obstruction.
The ODU is exposed to severe weather. Ensure all RF Unit cover screws
are tight. Seal and weatherproof any external connector. Deterioration of
connectors from moisture can cause serious problems.

Proteus AMT System User’s Manual Page 2-1

Installation

Grounding

The IDU chassis must be grounded to the facility grounding system to

minimize the possibility of damage from lightning strikes and the impact
of electromagnetic- and radio frequency-interference (EMI/RFI). The
ODU must also be grounded to systems for towers and shelters that fol-
low published guidelines, such as ITU-T Recommendation K.27, that
provide the ground reference necessary for reliable radio operation

Ideally, a grounding system provides the shortest possible path and the
lowest possible impedance to the ground reference point. The ground
reference is established by buried grids for telecommunication site-spe-
cific situations (tower and shelter) or the water pipe and/or buried ground
rods (usually at the power entry point) for a building.

The recommended resistance of the building primary ground to earth

shall be as low as possible and should not exceed five ohms.

Cable and Connector Considerations

Use RG-8A/U coaxial cable with a double shield (Times Microwave

LMR400 or equivalent) with male N-connectors at each end of the cable
to connect the IDU to the ODU. When cutting the cable add extra length
for service loops. Seal and weatherproof any external connection.

RG48 cables connect T1/E1 lines using 8-position modular connectors

on shielded twisted pair (STP). See "Connect E1/T1 Line Signals to the
IDU," on page 2-11.

The RSU has a RG48 line interface and a high density DB78 interface.
Pins of the DB78 connect the signal pair of each T1/E1 line. A DB78
mating connector, PN 3070037-0, comes with the RSU, but pre-fabri-
cated cables are available on request: DB78p-DB78p, PN 8108721-xx;
DB78p-16xRJ48, PN 8108722-xx; and DB78p-wire wrap, PN
8108723-xx (page 2-14).

RJ45 cables connect 100-Mbps Ethernet data using 8-position modular

connectors on CAT5 unshielded twisted pair (UTP) cable. See "Connect
Network Management," on page 2-16.

The 8-position modular connections are commonly and incorrectly re-

ferred to as RJ45. But, RJ designations refer to a specific wiring configu-
ration. On the Proteus AMT radio, RJ48 and RJ45 wiring uses the same
8-position modular outlets and jacks.

Use RJ45 cross-over cables when the two connecting devices have the
same interface type, i.e., both data terminating equipment (DTE) or data
communications equipment (DCE). Use a straight-through cable when
connecting a DTE device to a DCE device. For example, a PC to a hub.
The cable between the computer and the hub must be less than 100
meters long.

Page 2-2 Proteus AMT System User’s Manual

 Tools and Material

Tools and Material

Gather the following tools to install the radio:

• 1/4" open end wrench

• 3/8" open end wrench or hollow nut driver for 3/8-16 nut
• Phillips screwdriver (large)
• Straight blade screwdriver (medium)
• Various wire cutters (for cable preparation)
• Crimping tool for Type-N connector
• Hand-held voltmeter, including adapter for BNC connector
• 5/32 in. (or 4 mm) Allen wrench
• Optical aid or compass (optional)
• Communications devices such as two-way radios
Also, prepare the following materials:
• 2 standard (sealed) N-type connectors
• Tie wraps (or similar) for fastening cable
• Lightening protectors (if necessary)
• Amalgamating tape for weatherproofing
• Coax cables: up to 22-dB of cable loss at 270- or 350-MHz (for
270-MHz about 300 meters/1000 feet of cable)

Preparing the Site

Mount the Rack

A typical floor-mounting procedure includes drilling holes in the floor to

match the mounting holes. Rack hardware is available for both floor and
overhead supports.

Install any overhead support structure above the rack. The rack attaches
to the support with J-hooks. If support is a channel ladder that spans the
ceiling, one J-hook on each side of the ladder provides enough support.
If the channel ladder is a short piece attached to an overhead structure,
use additional J-hooks.

After drilling the mounting holes, place the rack on top of the holes and
install appropriate anchor bolts through the mounting holes in the rack. If
the area for the rack does not have rear access, connect DC power as de-
scribed in the following text prior to securing the rack.
A radio rack should have a ground bar that runs down the front. This as-
sembly accepts up to 6-AWG stranded grounding wire. Attach this to the
office/building ground.

Proteus AMT System User’s Manual Page 2-3

Installation

Tighten the anchor bolts to secure the rack. On an overhead-supported

rack, tighten the support hardware at the top as well as the bolts at the
base.
Run two wires for the DC power connection at the front of the radio to
primary and secondary DC source (typically batteries).

Unpack Equipment

Each product is completely assembled, tested, and then shipped in pack-

aging that minimizes the effects of shock in shipping. On receipt, check
the crate for damage.

Carefully remove equipment from the containers to prevent damage to

the units. Ensure that all parts and accessories are removed from the con-
tainer and packing material before they are discarded. Check equipment
for physical damage.
File claims for shipping damage immediately with the transportation
company, and report the issue with MNI Customer Service at U.S.
281.263.6501; or toll free within the U.S. at 1.888.225.6429.
If more than one radio gets delivered to a single site, identify the radio by
the packing list. Verify that you received all components listed on the
shipping order. Each radio terminal is shipped as either the 'LB' or 'HB'
radio – which refers to 'go' and 'return' frequencies of its channel plan.

• An 'LB' terminal transmits in the lower portion, and receives in the

upper portion, of the assigned frequency band.
• An 'HB' terminal transmits in the upper (high) portion, and receives
in the lower portion, of the assigned frequency band.

While unpacking the units, compare the serial number of the ODU with
the factory supplied test data. Labels on each unit list serial numbers and
frequencies.

ODU tuning is fixed to the The RF unit is set as a transmit low- or high-band unit. RF units use a di-
range of its diplexer. Spares plexer instead of band-pass filters. Sub-band and transmit/receive spac-
come in sets that include the ing (low/high band) are fixed and must be specified at time of order. If
high- and low-band units purchasing and storing spares, store LB/HB sets for each frequency. RF
(go and return frequencies
unit synthesizers tune through the entire half-band of its frequency plan,
of each channel plan).
but tuning range is fixed to the bandwidth of the diplexer.

NOTE: To tune an RF unit past its tuning range you need a new unit with
a different diplexer. Diplexer replacement is a factory-level
procedure. Contact Customer Service for more detail.

The IDU is labeled at the factory to match the ODU. MNI recommends
that you keep IDU and ODU pairs together, but IDUs work with any
ODU.

Page 2-4 Proteus AMT System User’s Manual

 Installing the Coaxial Cable

Installing the Coaxial Cable

Find, as far in advance as possible, the best route to get the IDU-to-ODU
coaxial cable from the ODU installation point to the IDU. Use a ple-
num-rated cable as local code requires.

Protect the exposed cable as much as possible until installation is com-

plete.

Start at the ODU installation point and run the un-terminated cable end
along the selected route. Leave enough cable at the site to reach the ODU
and create a service loop. Do a preliminary installation of the ODU if
you are not sure.

If the cable must cross a commercial built-up roof, put insulation be-
tween the cable and roof. Plenum cable is recommended for such an in-
stallation. Use the following guidelines for proper cable installation:

• When cutting the cable to length, add extra for drip and service
loops. Limit cable length to 22-dB of cable loss at 270- or 350-MHz
(for 270-MHz about 300 meters/1000 feet of cable).
• Add strain relief to cable connections.
• Seal and weatherproof any external connector. Deterioration of
connectors from moisture is a serious problem. Weatherproof
connectors using one of the following methods:
– Cover the exposed connector and portion of the cable with plastic
electrical insulating adhesive tape. Seal with a coat of sealing
compound.
– Cover the exposed connector and a portion of the cable with
heat-shrinkable sleeve. Shrink the sleeve with a heat source, let
cool, and cover with a coat of sealing compound.

Follow manufacturer's procedures for applying tape and shrinkable

sleeve to obtain the best weatherproofing seal.

• When running the cable between the IDU and ODU, follow standard
installation practices. Avoid sharp corners. Time Microwave
LMR400 cable has a 2.5 cm (1-inch) minimum bend radius. Check
manufacturer’s specification if you use another cable type. Secure
the cable to the tower members or cable runways using hangers or
tie-wraps at one-meter (three-foot) intervals.

Assemble the Cable

A single coaxial cable connects the IDU to the ODU. Use RG-8A/U
50-ohm coaxial cable (Time Microwave LMR400 or equivalent) with
male N-connectors at each end of the cable. The crimp tool and die that
Table 2-A lists supports N-type connectors.

Proteus AMT System User’s Manual Page 2-5

Installation

Table 2-A IDU-to-ODU Cable Components

Description Part Number
RG-8 A/U cable - per meter (LMR-400) 9900641-00
N-Type connector - 2 per cable 9900642-00
RG8 A/U plenum cable - per meter (LMR400LLPL) 9900646-00
N-type connector for 9900646 - 2 per cable 9900647-00
Ground kit for RG-8 cable 9900648-00
Crimp tool for 9900642-00 9900645-00
Cable-prep tool 9900643-00
Cable center-conductor deburring tool 9900644-00

Table 2-B IDU-to-ODU Cable Assembly

Step Procedure
1 Cut the cable, allowing for service loops at the IDU and ODU.
2 Slide a crimp ring on the un-stripped cable with its gasket facing
away from the connector body. A dot of silicon can help work
the gasket over the cable jacket.
3 Expose 7/32" (5.6mm) of the center conductor. Do not score the
conductor.

4 Remove 5/8" (15.9mm) of the cable jacket. Do not cut through

the braid.

5 Flare the braid slightly and trim it to 7/16" (11.1mm). Push the
pin over the center conductor and crimp it with a 0.108-inch
(2.7mm) hexagonal crimp tool.

6 Guide the pin and cable through the insulator into the back of
the connector, until the pin is home. Slide a crimp ring over the
braid and into the recess at the back of the connector. Crimp the
connector with a 0.475" (12.1mm) hexagonal crimp tool.
7 If the crimp ring will not pass over the braid, comb the braid and
re-trim it to 7/16" (11.1mm). Repeat Step 6.

Page 2-6 Proteus AMT System User’s Manual

 Installing the Coaxial Cable

Install the Cable

To install the IDU to ODU coaxial cable:

1. If the IDU is installed, remove DC power from the front of the unit.
2. Connect the coaxial cable to the ODU port of the IDU.
3. At the ODU – connect a 6-AWG copper wire (not supplied) from the
ODU grounding post to a ground point on the tower. This ground cable
places the ODU at the same electrical potential as the IDU.
See “Grounding” on page 2-2.
4. At the ODU – connect the coaxial cable to the ODU N-type connector
on the bottom of the RF unit.

WARNING Ensure DC power is off at the IDU prior to connecting the

cable at the ODU. If you cannot avoid connecting a 'hot'
cable, remember that the cable carries DC power; do not
short the center contact of the cable connector to the ODU
connector body!
5. Weatherproof as previously described on page 2-5.
6. Install the cable grounding kit, P/N 9900648-00, per the manufacturer
instruction.

Proteus AMT System User’s Manual Page 2-7

Installation

Installing the Indoor Unit

Mount the IDU

Mount the IDU shelf in the standard 19-inch equipment rack or equip-
ment cabinet. The chassis occupies one rack space and does not require
forced convection cooling. When mounting:

• Avoid direct heat. If unavoidable, use deflector plates.

• Locate equipment near sufficient power outlets to provide power to
test equipment.
• Eliminate conditions that could cause water to drip onto equipment.

A non-protected units takes one rack unit (1RU; 1.75 inch) of space, and
the protected radio units take from 3- to 4 RUs depending on capacity;
two RUs for the IDUs and 1 or 2 RUs for a redundancy switch unit
(RSU).

NOTE: The non-protected 16E1/DS1 IDU requires 2 RUs; the additional

RU for an RSU provides 16 individual line connections on RJ-48
connectors. A 32E1/DS1 requires two RSUs.

Ground the IDU to facility The IDU chassis must be grounded to the facility grounding system to
ground to prevent damage minimize the likelihood of damage from lightning strikes and the impact
to equipment and ensure of electromagnetic- and radio frequency-interference (EMI/RFI).
reliable operation. Grounding systems for towers and shelters that follow published guide-
lines, such as ITU-T Recommendation K.27, provide the ground refer-
ence necessary for reliable radio operation.
The IDU chassis has points for grounding to an appropriate ground.

Connect Power
Plan power circuits for The connector to the front panel is a 3-pin Phoenix, P/N 3024078-03.
in-rush current ≥8A up The mating plug, P/N 3024080-03, ships with the IDU. To connect
to 3 ms. power:

1. Connect the facility ground to pin 3 of the power plug.

NOTE: The radio does not work without proper ground connections.

If used, rate circuit Both the -48V and +24V power supplies require a ground reference in
breakers to handle the order for them to turn on. Mounting screws ground a unit that you mount
in-rush current: ≥6A in a grounded EIA rack or enclosed cabinet. Otherwise, you must con-
with trip characteristic nect "ground" (pin 3) to the facility ground.
'C' or slower.

Page 2-8 Proteus AMT System User’s Manual

 Installing the Indoor Unit

Ground '+' of the 48V supply to 2. Turn your power supply on and check the polarity of the supply leads,
set ground reference. and then turn your power supply off.

Ground '-' of the 24V supply 3. Connect positive supply lead to the positive pin of the mating plug as
to set ground reference. Figure 2-1 and Figure 2-2 show.
4. Connect negative supply lead to the negative pin of the mating plug as
Figure 2-1 and Figure 2-2 show.
5. Plug the mating plug into the power connector.

Figure 2-1. IDU Power Connection for -48V Input

DC input to the 48V power supply will be between -40 to -60 Vdc (nom-
inally -48V). The power supply tolerates up to 1Vpp input ripple, DC to
50 MHz, such that the peak voltages stay within the -40 to -60V limit.

NOTE: While the -48V power supply accepts from -40 to -60V, there
will be up to 100 mV drop between the IDU input connector and
the ODU connector. Under worse case conditions, voltage to the
ODU varies from -39.9V to -60V

Figure 2-2. IDU Power Connection for +24V Input

DC input to the 24V power supply will be between +19 to +30 Vdc
(nominally +24V). The power supply tolerates up to 1Vpp input ripple,
DC to 50 MHz, such that the peak voltages stay within the +19V to
+30V limit.

Proteus AMT System User’s Manual Page 2-9

Installation

For a single battery source on a protected radio, jumper positive (+) of

the main IDU to positive (+) of the standby IDU, and negative (-) of the
main IDU to negative (–) of the standby IDU with 12- or 14-AWG
stranded wire.

IDU Power Protection

Proteus AMT power supplies include unique protections, in addition to
fuses, to provide reliable operation.
• Reverse polarity protection: wiring inputs in reverse will not cause
damage.
• Positive/negative input protection: connecting +48V or -24V will not
cause damage.
• Over-voltage input protection: connecting 48V instead of 24V (24V
units) will not cause damage.
• Lightning protection: power leads can sustain a one-time standard
impulse current of 8/20 µS at 5A.

NOTE: A lighting induced surge on the cable to the ODU is likely to turn
on, "fire", the spark-gap protection device on the IF board. The
device then conducts until power is removed when it resets. This
causes the fuse to blow on -48V units.

Use a source that can Plan power protection devices, such as fuse panels, breakers, and un-in-
handle an in-rush current terruptible power supplies (UPS), to account for the IDU power protec-
≥8A up to 3 ms. tion and to handle an in-rush current ≥8A up to 3 ms. If used, use circuit
breakers ≥6A with category C, or slower, over-current ratings (EN
60947-2 1992). Figure 2-3 shows where you would install power protec-
tion devices.

DC Pow er Connection Optionally

Power Supply
place fuse or
fuse: 5A / 7A
breaker here.
FAST-BLO
CHARGER

6A SLO-BLO

Battery IDU
Pack
48V/24V If using a breaker,
use ≥6A trip rating 'C'
or slower.
AC Pow er Connection Must handle
8708263-00
Converter is internally limited; inrush current;
no fuse or breaker needed. ≥8A for 3ms.
AC PWR

48V
UPS AC/DC IDU

Optionally place a Fuse or breaker not Power Supply

fuse or breaker needed; UPS fuse: 5A
here. includes protection FAST-BLO for 48V

Figure 2-3. Connecting Power Protection Devices

Page 2-10 Proteus AMT System User’s Manual

 Installing the Indoor Unit

Connect E1/T1 Line Signals to the IDU

Line input and output connect to LIM ports on the non-protected radio.
Transmit (TX) signals flow Data signals (Table 2-C) connect via RJ48 wiring using twisted pair ca-
to the IDU (to the RF ble to connectors on the LIM; DS1 signals use 100-Ω connectors.
transmitter). E3/DS3 signals (Table 2-D) connect to 75-Ω unbalanced BNCs.
10/100BaseT signals (Table 2-E) connect via RJ45 wiring on UTP
Receive (RX) signals flow CAT5 cable to 100-Ω balanced connectors. 16E1/DS1 signals connect
from the IDU (from the RF through a 100-pin high density connector to a jumper cable that carries
receiver). signals to a redundancy switch unit (RSU) for customer access. The RSU
acts as the line signal cabling point. A 32E1/DS1 needs two RSUs.

NOTE: Non-protected configurations that use 16E1/DS1 LIMs require

an RSU as the line cabling point. A 32E1/DS1 needs two RSUs.

Use the twisted pair sets of

your cable for each ring/tip Table 2-C E1/DS1 Wiring (RJ48*)
signal of E1/DS1 lines. Pin Signal I/O
8 1
1 Rx Ring I
Do not untwist any pair
more than 12.7 mm (1/2 2 Rx Tip I
inch). 3 GND
4 Tx Ring O
5 Tx Tip O
6 GND
1 8
7 NC
8 NC
*. RJ48 is a wiring configuration. Cable uses modular 8-position con-
nectors. See “Cable and Connector Considerations” on page 2-2.

Table 2-D E3/DS3 Wiring (BNC, 75-Ω)

Pin Signal
Center pin Line In/Out
Jacket GND
-
Table 2-E 100-BaseT Wiring (RJ45*)
RJ48 and RJ45 use the 4-port bridge
same 8-pin modular
connectors. Pin Signal I/O
1 Rx + I
2 Rx – I
3 Tx + O 8 1
4 GND
5 GND
6 TX – O
7 GND
8 GND
*. RJ45 is a wiring configuration. Cables use modular connectors. See
“Cable and Connector Considerations” on page 2-2.

Proteus AMT System User’s Manual Page 2-11

Installation

The RSU of the hot-standby protected radio splits line inputs and sends
them to both IDUs on the transmit side of the radio. The RSU switches
line output from the online IDU to the output connector(s) on the receive
side of the radio. Line input and output connects to the line connectors on
the RSU. The RSU provides either 120-Ω balanced RJ48 line connectors
or a DB78 high-density line connector (Table 2-F) for E1 line signals;
100-Ω for DS1 signals.

The 16E1/HSBY LIM has a 100-pin high density connector that brings
data signals to the front panel. Data from a 16E1/DS1 LIMs are typically
bridged to an RSU that acts as the distribution box. LIM and connector
size prohibits direct connection. Table 2-H lists the cable pinning for the
16E1/DS1 LIM high-density connector for customers who prefer to use
their own distribution method.

16–32E1/DS1 Data Wiring on the Redundancy Switch

Line signals connect to 8-position modular connectors on the RJ48 ver-

sion of the RSU. Table 2-C lists the RJ48 wiring. Line signals connect to
a 78-pin high-density connector on the DB48 version of the RSU.
Table 2-F lists the DB78 connector wiring.

Figure 2-4 shows a non-protected 32E1–DS1 system with the DB78 ver-
sion of the RSU. A DB78 mating connector, PN 3070037-05, comes
with the RSU. Pre-fabricated cables are available on customer request;
see "Cable and Connector Considerations," on page 2-2.

16E1 LIM 16E1 LIM

IDU

RSU
CH1-16

RSU
CH17-32

3700050-00
DATA I/O ribbon cable set
Figure 2-4. 32E1/DS1 NP Configuration; Line Signal on DB78

Page 2-12 Proteus AMT System User’s Manual

 Installing the Indoor Unit

Use the twisted pair sets of Table 2-F DB78 Line Signal Connector Wiring
your cable for each ring/tip Female front
signal of E1/DS1 lines. panel connector
shown; mating
Do not untwist any pair connector pins
more than 12.7 mm (1/2 are the mirror
inch). image

Pin Signal Pin Signal Pin Signal

1 TXT 15 27 RXR 11 53 TXR 6
2 RXT 15 28 TXT 9 54 RXR 6
3 GND 29 RXT 9 55 TXT 4
4 TXR 13 30 GND 56 RXT 4
5 RXR 13 31 TXR 7 57 GND
6 TXT 11 32 RXR 7 58 TXR 2
7 RXT 11 33 TXT 5 59 RXR 2
8 GND 34 RXT 5 60 TXR 16
9 TXR 9 35 GND 61 RXR 16
10 RXR 9 36 TXR 3 62 TXT 14
11 TXT 7 37 RXR 3 63 RXT 14
12 RXT 7 38 TXT 1 64 GND
13 GND 39 RXT 1 65 TXR 12
14 TXR 5 40 TXT 16 66 RXR 12
15 RXR 5 41 RXT 16 67 TXT 10
16 TXT 3 42 GND 68 RXT 10
17 RXT 3 43 TXR 14 69 GND
18 GND 44 RXR 14 70 TXR 8
19 TXR 1 45 TXT 12 71 RXR 8
20 RXR 1 46 RXT 12 72 TXT 6
21 TXR 15 47 GND 73 RXT 6
22 RXR 15 48 TXR 10 74 GND
23 TXT 13 49 RXR 10 75 TXR 4
24 RXT 13 50 TXT 8 76 RXR 4
25 GND 51 RXT 8 77 TXT 2
26 TXR 11 52 GND 78 RXT 2
MNI sells a pre-fabricated DB78 cable, Figure 2-5, that uses solid
AWG-24 wire; suitable for wire wrap. The cable is shielded 100-ohm ca-
ble, Essex 55-A99-21 or equivalent, with a metal shell connector – AMP
748368-1 or equivalent. No wires attach to ground pins at the connector,
and drain wires attach to the metal strain relief.

Proteus AMT System User’s Manual Page 2-13

Installation

Figure 2-5. Prefabricated DB78P Cable

Table 2-G Prefabricated DB78P Cable Wire List

Pin Color Signal Pin Color Signal Pin Color Signal
1 BLU/WHT TXT 15 33 BLK/BLU TXT 5 66 VIO/ORG RXR 12
21 WHT/BLU TXR 15 15 ORG/BLK RXR 5 47 NONE GND
3 NONE GND 34 BLK/ORG RXT 5 48 GRN/VIO TXR 10
2 ORG/WHT RXT 15 35 NONE GND 67 VIO/GRN TXT 10
22 WHT/ORG RXR 15 16 GRN/BLK TXT 3 49 BRN/VIO RXR 10
4 GRN/WHT TXR 13 36 BLK/GRN TXR 3 68 VIO/BRN RXT 10
23 WHT/GRN TXT 13 17 BRN/BLK RXT 3 69 NONE GND
5 BRN/WHT RXR 13 37 BLK/BRN RXR 3 50 GRY/VIO TXT 8
24 WHT/BRN RXT 13 18 NONE GND 70 VIO/GRY TXR 8
25 NONE GND 19 GRY/BLK TXR 1 51 BLU/WHT RXT 8
6 GRY/WHT TXT 11 38 BLK/GRY TXT 1 71 WHT/BLU RXR 8
26 WHT/GRY TXR 11 20 BLU/YEL RXR 1 52 NONE GND
7 BLU/RED RXT 11 39 YEL/BLU RXT 1 53 ORG/WHT TXR 6
27 RED/BLU RXR 11 40 ORG/YEL TXT 16 72 WHT/ORG TXT 6
8 NONE GND 60 YEL/ORG TXR 16 54 GRN/WHT RXR 6
9 ORG/RED TXR 9 41 GRN/YEL RXT 16 73 WHT/GRN RXT 6
28 RED/ORG TXT 9 61 YEL/GRN RXR 16 74 NONE GND
10 GRN/RED RXR 9 42 NONE GND 55 BRN/WHT TXT 4
29 RED/GRN RXT 9 43 BRN/YEL TXR 14 75 WHT/BRN TXR 4
30 NONE GND 62 YEL/BRN TXT 14 56 GRY/WHT RXT 4
11 BRN/RED TXT 7 44 GRY/YEL RXR 14 76 WHT/GRY RXR 4
31 RED/BRN TXR 7 63 YEL/GRY RXT 14 57 NONE GND
12 GRY/RED RXT 7 64 NONE GND 58 BLU/RED TXR 2
32 RED/GRY RXR 7 45 BLU/VIO TXT 12 77 RED/BLU TXT 2
13 NONE GND 65 VIO/BLU TXR 12 59 ORG/RED RXR 2
14 BLU/BLK TXR 5 46 ORG/VIO RXT 12 78 RED/ORG RXT 2
Shaded pins – wires in inner wht/org binder

Use the RJ48 wire list in Table 2-C to build individual RJ48 line cables.
Figure 2-6 shows a non-protected 32E1/DS1 system with the RJ48 ver-
sion of the RSU.

Table 2-H provides a wire list of the 100-pin high density connector and
cabling from the 16E1 LIMs for troubleshooting and maintenance. The
cables come with the hot-standby system.

Page 2-14 Proteus AMT System User’s Manual

 Installing the Indoor Unit

Figure 2-6. 32E1/DS1 NP Configuration; Line Signal on RJ48

Table 2-H 16E1/DS1 Hot-Standby Wiring (HD, 100-pin)

Signal I/O Pin Signal I/O Pin Signal Pin

Rx Tip 1 I 1 Rx Ring 1 I 51 GND 2

Tx Tip 1 O 52 Tx Ring 2 O 3 GND 53
Rx Tip 2 I 4 Rx Ring 2 I 54 GND 5
Tx Tip 2 O 55 Tx Ring 2 O 6 GND 56
Rx Tip 3 I 7 Rx Ring 3 I 57 GND 8
Tx Tip 3 O 58 Tx Ring 3 O 9 GND 59
Rx Tip 4 I 10 Rx Ring 4 I 60 GND 11
Tx Tip 4 O 61 Tx Ring 4 O 12 GND 62
Rx Tip 5 I 13 Rx Ring 5 I 63 GND 14
Tx Tip 5 O 64 Tx Ring 5 O 15 GND 65
Rx Tip 6 I 16 Rx Ring 6 I 66 GND 17
Tx Tip 6 O 67 Tx Ring 6 O 18 GND 68
Rx Tip 7 I 19 Rx Ring 7 I 69 GND 20
Tx Tip 7 O 70 Tx Ring 7 O 21 GND 71
Rx Tip 8 I 22 Rx Ring 8 I 72 GND 23
Tx Tip 8 O 73 Tx Ring 8 O 24 GND 74
Rx Tip 9 I 25 Rx Ring 9 I 75 GND 26
Tx Tip 9 O 76 Tx Ring 9 O 27 GND 77
Rx Tip 10 I 28 Rx Ring 10 I 78 GND 29
Tx Tip 10 O 79 Tx Ring 10 O 30 GND 80
Rx Tip 11 I 31 Rx Ring 11 I 81 GND 32
Tx Tip 11 O 82 Tx Ring 11 O 33 GND 83
Rx Tip 12 I 34 Rx Ring 12 I 84 GND 35
Tx Tip 12 O 85 Tx Ring 12 O 36 GND 86
Rx Tip 13 I 37 Rx Ring 13 I 87 GND 38
Tx Tip 13 O 88 Tx Ring 13 O 39 GND 89
Rx Tip 14 I 40 Rx Ring 14 I 90 GND 41
Tx Tip 14 O 91 Tx Ring 14 O 42 GND 92

Proteus AMT System User’s Manual Page 2-15

Installation

Table 2-H 16E1/DS1 Hot-Standby Wiring (HD, 100-pin)

Signal I/O Pin Signal I/O Pin Signal Pin
Rx Tip 15 I 43 Rx Ring 15 I 93 GND 44
Tx Tip 15 O 94 Tx Ring 15 O 45 GND 95
Rx Tip 16 I 46 Rx Ring 16 I 96 GND 47
Tx Tip 16 O 97 Tx Ring 16 O 48 GND 98
GND 49 GND 99 GND 50
GND 100

Connect Network Management

Radio service channels provide the path for radio performance data and
alarm messages, and for issuing configuration and control statements to
individual radios, radio hops, and multiple radios of a radio network.
This overhead channel includes the network management channel for ra-
dio management communications and the auxiliary channels that the
next section covers.
A management controller accesses all alarms and controls in the IDU and
ODU. The following interfaces provide access to radio management con-
troller data in two modes–Ethernet IP and serial:
• MODEM: 9-pin D-type connector for RS-232 serial interface to an
external modem. A 'dialer/monitor' feature negotiates the telephone
signaling to establish the dial-up serial link. Access the connection
using a communication application such as HyperTerminal.
• COMPUTER: 9-pin sub-D connector. RS-232 serial interface to
computer using VT100 emulation at 9600 bps.
• NMS: two RJ-45 ports for Ethernet access to radio management data.
Ports are bridged networks. Access the radio using SNMP or an
Ethernet application such as Telnet.
The following tables detail these connections.
A modem connects as a Table 2-I Modem Connection (IP Interface; Sub-D 9-Pin Male)
terminal (DTE) device. The Pin Signal Direction
connection between IDU
1 CD Modem-->PC
and modem is a straight
through RS-232 cable. 2 RXD Modem-->PC
3 TXD PC-->Modem
4 DTR PC-->Modem A cable connecting a DTE
5 GND Modem-->PC to DCE wires straight
6 DSR Modem-->PC through.
7 RTS PC-->Modem
8 CTS Modem-->PC
9 RI Modem-->PC

Page 2-16 Proteus AMT System User’s Manual

 Installing the Indoor Unit

Wire the COMPUTER port Table 2-J Computer Port* (Serial; Sub-D 9-Pin Female)
serial cable straight Pin Signal I/O
through. 1 NC
2 TXD O
3 RXD I
4 NC
5 GND
6 NC
7 NC
8 NC
9 NC
* Wire the serial cable straight-through.

Top NMS port is primary; Table 2-K NMS Connection* (IP Interface)
bottom the repeater. Pin Signal I/O IP NMS CROSSOVER CABLE
1 Tx + O
2 TX – O
8 1
3 RX + I
4 NC
5 NC
6 RX – I 1 8
7 NC
8 NC
*. Use a shielded RJ45 crossover cable when connecting a computer to
either NMS port, or when cabling from one IDU to another. Jumper
cables, P/N 8109726-00, are available for NMS bridging.

Connect Auxiliary Interfaces

The radio overhead channel includes auxiliary channels for:

• Optional engineering orderwire using a DTMF handset (voice mode)
• Data channels–two RS232 at up to 19.2 kbps and one RS422 for
64 kbps orderwire in data mode and the EOW is not used
• Four mappable relay alarm outputs
• Six TTL inputs

The orderwire channel is 64 kbps for service messages between facing

and bridged radios. With the channel in voice mode a DTMF (dual tone
multi-frequency) engineering orderwire (EOW) works using an optional
handset. The handset operates on 3-volt line power with signaling for a
built-in 12-key DTMF dial pad. A standard handset will not work.
Figure 2-7. Handset
In voice mode the orderwire interface on RJ45 connectors, OW1/OW2,
bridge the EOW with co-located radios. In data mode, OW1 is converted
To ring a site dial the site from serial to parallel data (RS422), and goes over the link as a 64 kbps
station code plus #. Dial clear channel. OW2 and HANDSET become inactive in data mode. Use the
* to ring all stations.

Proteus AMT System User’s Manual Page 2-17

Installation

EM and CTI Configuration menus to change orderwire mode on the lo-

cal radio.

Bridge co-located radios using an RJ45 cross-over cable (Table 2-O).

Use a jumper cable, P/N 8108726-01, from the installation accessory kit
to bridge the OW channel between co-located IDUs.

NOTE: The offline IDUs in protected systems mute the OW port to

prevent echo problems on ancillary equipment.

Table 2-L OW1/2 (RJ45, 8-pin modular connection)*

Pin OW1 Signal I/O OW2 Signal I/O
1 TX + O TX + O
2 TX – O TX – O 8 1
3 RX + I RX + I
4 TX Clk+ NC†
5 TX Clk- NC† 1 8
6 RX – I RX – I
7 RX Clk+ NC†
8 RX Clk- NC†
*. Bridge OW signals using an RJ45 cross-over cable.
†. Clock lines are inactive in voice mode.

Standard handsets will not

work. 3-volt line power and Table 2-M DTMF HANDSET (RJ-11, 4-pin)
signaling for a 12-key dial Pin Signal I/O
pad is required. 1 SPKR RING I
2 SPKR TIP I
3 MIC RING/GND
4 MIC TIP O

Management controllers also handle auxiliary output relays and external

TTL input alarms through the AUX Alarm port. The radio accepts six
TTL floating inputs, provides four relay outputs, and has two RS-232
service channels (up to 19.2 kbps) through the AUX Alarm port.

Configure RS232 AUX Configure the two RS232 channel baud rate, parity, stop bits, and polar-
channels and map alarms ity using the radio management applications–CTI or EM.
to relays using the radio
management applications– Relay alarm outputs are available on four Form-C relays. Four alarms are
CTI or EM. mapped to the output relays. Alarm relay default settings are: 1-NE MA-
JOR SUMMARY, 2-NE MINOR SUMMARY, 3-FE TERMINAL FAIL-MINOR,
4-TERMINAL-TO-TERMINAL CHANNEL FAIL-MINOR. Edit the alarm map
table using CTI or EM.

Page 2-18 Proteus AMT System User’s Manual

 Installing the Indoor Unit

Table 2-N AUX (26-pin Sub-D; High Density)

Pin Signal I/O Pin Signal I/O
1 AUX1 TXD O 14 RELAY 3 COM I
2 AUX1 RXD I 15 RELAY 3 NC I
3 AUX1 GND 16 RELAY 4 NO I
4 AUX2 TXD O 17 RELAY 4 COM I
5 AUX2 RXD I 18 RELAY 4 NC I
6 AUX2 GND 19 ALM IN 1 I
7 RELAY 1 NO I 20 ALM IN 2 I
8 RELAY 1 COM I 21 ALM IN 3 I
9 RELAY 1 NC I 22 ALM IN 4 I
10 RELAY 2 NO I 23 ALM IN 5 I
11 RELAY 2 COM I 24 ALM IN 6 I
12 RELAY 2 NC I 25 +5V OUT O
13 RELAY 3 NO I 26 GND
NC-normally closed; NO-normally open; COM-common

Proteus AMT System User’s Manual Page 2-19

Installation

Installing the Redundancy Switch Unit

Mount the RSU
Mount the RSU shelf in the standard 19-inch equipment rack or equip-
ment cabinet between the main and standby IDU. The RSU takes one or
two RUs of space depending on capacity. 32E1/DS1 requires two
switches.

Connect IDU and RSU

Hot-standby cables connect user data and radio management data from
the Redundancy Switch Unit (RSU) to both main and standby IDUs. Call
outs in Figure 2-8 refer to the cables in Table 2-O.
Set RSU jump-
RSU to 100BaseT LIM
ers (Chapter 3)
to match IDU
configuration.
T XA

I N

IDU A
AUTO

IDU B

4 5 1 2 3
RSU to 100BaseT LIM

Figure 2-8. IDU to RSU Connections

Table 2-O RSU Interconnect Cables

Item Description
1 2 x DB26-pin 8108658-00 Cable between HSBY connections
of IDU and RSU.

2 2 x MDR100 3700050-00 Ribbon cable assembly interfaces

line signals between IDU and RSU.
For 4 to 32E1/DS1 radios.

Page 2-20 Proteus AMT System User’s Manual

 Installing the Redundancy Switch Unit

Table 2-O RSU Interconnect Cables (continued)

Item Description
3 2 x BNC 8108021-17 6-inch BNC cable assembly to inter-
face E3/DS3 data between IDU and
RSU. One for transmit and one for
receive data

4 2 x RJ45,13" 8108726-00 Cable assembly* to interface

10/100BaseT data between IDU and
RSU.
5 2 x RJ45, 8" 8108726-01 EOW and NMS jumper cables*

*. 8-position modular jacks (RJ45) on twisted pair.

The RSU currently provides All versions of the RSU have LAN connections for 100BaseT applica-
switch protection for one tions. The RSU has three RJ45 connectors: one for customer input (LAN),
100BaseT port. one for connection to the main radio LIM (LAN A), and one for connec-
tion to the standby radio LIM (LAN B). Although a 100BaseT LIM has
four ports, the current RSU provides one switch-protected path. Connect
a 100BaseT LIM port to the RSU using either a straight-through or a
twisted pair cable. Table 2-P list straight-through wiring, and Table 2-O
lists the cross-over cable and wiring.
Table 2-P 100-BaseT Cabling Between IDU and RSU
IDU RSU
Pin Signal Pin Signal
LAN A LAN
1 Rx + 1 Tx +
2 Rx – 2 TX –
3 Tx + 3 Rx +
4 GND 8 1 4 GND
5 GND 5 GND
6 TX – 6 Rx –
7 GND 7 GND LAN B PROG
8 GND 8 GND

Connect E1/T1 Line Signals to the RSU

If unused, disable E1/T1 Line input and output connect to the RSU in the same way they connect
line sense (Chapter 3). to the IDU LIMs. To wire each I/O, follow cable pin-outs in Table 2-C
on page 2-11 or in Table 2-F on page 2-13. Figure 2-9 shows each RSU

Proteus AMT System User’s Manual Page 2-21

Installation

type and the customer and system line connections for RJ48 and DB78
versions.

After physically installing the RSU and IDU see Chapter 3 for commis-
sioning the radio.

Figure 2-9. RSU E1/DS1 Line Connections

Page 2-22 Proteus AMT System User’s Manual

 Installing the ODU

Installing the ODU

Fundamentals

The non-protected ODU consists of an RF unit, a 0.3, 0.6, 0.9, or

1.2-meter antenna, and a pole-mounting assembly. The protected ODU
adds a standby RF unit and a unequal-split coupler:
7/8 GHz HSB Coupler 7200067-02
13 GHz HSB Coupler 7200058-00
15 GHz HSB Coupler 7200059-02
18 GHz HSB Coupler 7200060-00
23 GHz HSB Coupler 7200066-00
All antennas include hardware for mounting to vertical pole.

NOTE: Antenna manufacturers include hardware, instructions, and tools

specific to their antenna. Antenna mounting instructions included
here are generic. Use manufacturer’s instructions first.

Installing the ODU requires:

• unpacking equipment
• attaching the mounting hardware to the pole
• attaching the antenna to the mounting hardware
• attaching the RF unit to the antenna
• connecting the IDU-to-ODU coaxial cable

The ODU leaves the factory configured and designated as a low-band or

high-band unit depending on the assigned transmit frequency sub-band.
Ensure system components match before continuing this installation.

WARNING Read instructions before assembling or installing the

antenna. Installation can be dangerous and requires
qualified personnel familiar with antenna installation.

Microwave Networks is not responsible or liable for damage or

injury resulting from incorrect or unsafe installation procedures.

Torque Specifications

Table 2-Q lists recommended torques for tightening nuts and bolts pro-
vided with the hardware kits. Prior to installing RF Unit hardware, place
a small amount of anti-seize lubricant on bolt threads.

Proteus AMT System User’s Manual Page 2-23

Installation

Table 2-Q Fastener Torque Specifications

US Recommended Bolt Torque*
Grade 5 Grade 8 18-8 S/S
Size
Coarse Fine Coarse Fine Coarse Fine
#4 - - - - 5.2 -
#6 - - - - 9.6 -
#8 - - - - 19.8 -
#10 - - - - 22.8 31.7
1/4 8 10 12 14 6.3 7.8
5/16 17 19 24 27 11 11.8
3/8 31 35 44 49 20 22
7/16 49 55 70 78 31 33
1/2 75 85 105 120 43 45
9/16 110 120 155 170 57 63
Metric Recommended Bolt Torque (Nm)
Diameter Class 8.8 Class 10.9
5 7 9
6 12 16
8 30 40
10 55 75
12 100 135
14 160 215
16 245 335
20 480 650
* Sizes from 4 to 10 are in inch-pounds.
Sizes from 1/4 up are in foot-pounds.

Unpack Hardware

Carefully unpack the antenna assembly and mount from its shipping car-
ton. The standard 0.3- and 0.6-meter (1- and 2-ft.) antennas ship partially
assembled and include the following components:
• reflector and radome assemblies
• feed assembly
• offset tower mount
• various bolts, nuts, flat washers, lock washers, allen keys
• tube of Loctite

Attach the Standard Mounting Assembly

The following covers Mounting hardware attaches the antenna to a vertical pole with a diame-
standard direct-fit ter of 48 to 115 mm (1.9 to 4.5 inches). The assembly adjusts to ±25
mounting. Appendix G fine elevation and ±180 (±10 fine) azimuth. Approximate mounting di-
describes offset and rack mensions for a non-protected and a protected unit listed Figure 2-10 and
mounting options.
Figure 2-11 below can help you determine installation requirements.

Page 2-24 Proteus AMT System User’s Manual

 Installing the ODU

Figure 2-10. Non-Protected ODU Mounting Dimensions

Proteus AMT System User’s Manual Page 2-25

Installation

Dim G

Dim B

Dim C
ODU

ODU

NOTES: 1. ANT POLE MOUNTING DETAILS VARY.

2. ODU CAN MOUNT ON EITHER SIDE
OF POLE.
3. DIMENSIONS ARE APPROXIMATE.

ODU

HSB ODU DIMENSIONS (mm)

DIM A DIM B DIM C DIM D DIM E DIM F DIM G
1 FT / .3M ANT 398 289 278 110 220 42 300
2 FT / .6M ANT 651 410 292 110 220 42 224
2.5 FT / .8M ANT 889 622 301 153 338 NA 135
4 FT / 1.2 ANT 1248 904 414 538 1074 NA 70

Figure 2-11. Protected ODU Mounting Dimensions

Page 2-26 Proteus AMT System User’s Manual

 Installing the ODU

Use the following steps to attach the mounting assembly to the pipe (or
pole).
Step 1: Attach the mounting bracket around the pipe for left or right
offset (left offset shown below).
Step 2: Secure the mounting assembly with included flat washers, lock
washers, and bolts.

Step 3: Move the hardware around the pipe so the antenna faces the final
azimuth direction. Tighten after antenna alignment is complete.

Proteus AMT System User’s Manual Page 2-27

Installation

Attach the Antenna to the Mounting Assembly

Step 1: Remove the lower drain plug(s) from the reflector, and then
attach the radome to the reflector using the included pan-head
screws, lockwashers, and flat washers. Position the radome
drain hole at the bottom.

Step 2: Coat the threads of the socket-head screws on the antenna

mounting plate with the included anti-seize compound (Loctite).
Step 3: Align and secure the antenna to the mounting assembly with the
socket-head screws. The hardware kit includes an allen key that
fits the mounting screws.
Step 4: Apply the silicone grease to the included antenna feed o-ring.
Install the o-ring on the antenna feed assembly.

Page 2-28 Proteus AMT System User’s Manual

 Installing the ODU

Attach the RF Unit to the Antenna

Non-Protected Units

The early-model RF The antenna has a feed assembly that couples the non-protected RF unit
interface on 7/8-GHz units directly to the antenna. Install the RF unit after properly installing the an-
was Type-N connectors and tenna feed o-ring.
a short cable assembly.
Current units are press-fit. You change the orientation of the RF unit assembly relative to the fixed
mounting position of the antenna for horizontal polarization.
Step 1: Observe the V label on the RF unit
housing. The V label must point up
for vertical polarization.

Step 2: For non-protected units: remove the

polyester tape covering the antenna
feed assembly and carefully fit the RF
unit to the antenna. Gently press into
place.

Step 3: Secure the RF unit to the mounting

assembly using the four snap fasteners.

Hot-Standby Protected Units

See the next subsection A hot-standby ODU has two RF units mounted on a coupler / mounting
installation of early-model assembly. The coupler connects to the antenna like the non-protected RF
for 7/8-GHz ODUs. unit. Snap fasteners hold the assembly in place and four socket-head
screws secure it to the back of the antenna
Hot-standby couplers have antenna interface adapters that set polariza-
tion. The coupler ships with polarization set as you order, and the alter-
nate polarization adapter ships in the same package as the hot-standby
RF unit assembly.

On early-model hot-standby couplers you changed to horizontal polar-

ization by changing the orientation of the complete RF unit assembly
(RFUs and coupler) relative to the fixed mounting position of the an-
tenna, and, on ODUs at 15-GHz and below, also turn the transition on the
antenna.

Proteus AMT System User’s Manual Page 2-29

Installation

Step 1: For hot-standby protected units: Coat

the threads of the socket-head screws
on the coupler with the included
anti-seize compound (Loctite).

Step 2: Carefully place the feed hub of the

coupler over the antenna feed assembly.
Gently press coupler in place. Lock the
assembly to the antenna using the four
snap fasteners. Screw the socket-head
screws to the antenna and tighten using
the allen key from the hardware kit.

Step 3: Remove the plastic covers from the

coupler feed assemblies and apply
silicone grease from the hardware kit to
the o-rings

Step 4: Remove the polyester tape covering the

the feed and carefully fit the RF unit on
the coupler.

Step 5: Secure the RF unit to the coupler

assembly using the four snap fasteners.

NOTE: The hot-standby coupler ships with polarization set as ordered.

Change polarization by replacing the adapter. An alternate
polarization adapter ships in the package with the ODU. Use the
included tool to remove and replace the two M3 screws. Once
replaced, tighten these screws to 56 Ncm.

Original hot-standby couplers have an antenna interface with

fixed vertical polarization. Rotate the complete assembly for
horizontal polarization.

Page 2-30 Proteus AMT System User’s Manual

 Installing the ODU

Attach the Early-Model 7/8-GHz RF Unit to the Antenna

Since the RF connector on early-model 7/8-GHz RF units is an N-type

female, Figure 2-12, use pole mounting hardware, P/N 8708245-07
(non-protected) and P/N 8708265-07 (protected). Complete the follow-
ing steps to install this unit.
Step 1: Secure the mounting plate to the pole using the included
hardware as Figure 2-12 shows.
Step 2: Secure the RF unit(s) to the mounting assembly using the four
snap fasteners.
Step 3: On protected units, connect coaxial cable(s) between RF units and
the coupler.
Step 4: Connect a coaxial cable between the antenna and the coupler.

Figure 2-12. Early-Model 7-GHz ODU Pole Mount Hardware

Proteus AMT System User’s Manual Page 2-31

Installation

Connect the Coaxial Cable to the ODU

WARNING DO NOT WORK IN FRONT OF AN ENERGIZED ODU!

The power-density level at the open end of any RF-Unit output
when transmitting exceeds the level recommended by
ANSI/IEEE C95.1-1992.

Step 1: Attach the coaxial cable(s) to the ODU(s).

Step 2: Weatherproof all connections using amalgamating tape for
weatherproofing as described on page 2-5.
Step 3: Connect a 6-AWG copper wire (not supplied) from the ODU
grounding post to a ground point on the tower. This grounding
cable places the ODU at the same electrical potential as the
mounting pipe.
Step 4: Before leaving the site, check that all hardware on the mount,
shroud, radome and ODU are secure. Visually inspect the
antenna and ODU once a year.

Page 2-32 Proteus AMT System User’s Manual

 Chapter 3
Commissioning

Overview
This chapter outlines procedures to align and setup the Proteus AMT ra-
dio for operation after physical installation; see Chapter 2 Installation.
Use this material to configure your radio and start traffic as soon as pos-
sible.

The radio link normally ships with the ability to pass traffic between ter-
minals once installed, powered, and properly aligned. If not tailored to
your specific requirements, configure the radio as the sections following
ODU alignment (page 3-3) detail.

After installing hardware as described in Chapter 2, commission the ra-

dio by:
• applying power
• checking configuration
• aligning the link
• making configuration changes (if necessary)
• verifying operation

Powering the Radio

After installation and prior to applying power, verify that:
• no shorts exist between ground and the DC pins using an ohm-meter
• all connectors are secure
• DC connections including ground are wired as Chapter 2 describes

Turn on power to the IDU. If nothing happens, verify the supply voltage
at the connector with a voltmeter.

Under normal conditions the green power LED lights, the IDU boots,
and as the radio attempts to synchronize the alarm indicators turn on and
off. If the course antenna alignment completed during ODU installation
is good enough, the radio will pass customer traffic.

After verifying radio settings, complete the antenna alignment.

Proteus AMT System User’s Manual Page 3-1

Commissioning

Verifying Radio Configuration

Connect a computer to the local access port using a serial cable and start
with Element Manager (EM) or CTI. The following are factory default
settings:

Radio Name: NewRadio

Admin Password: mni (case sensitive)
Guest Password: None (press Enter / return)
Orderwire Mode: Voice
Orderwire Code: 000
LAN Address: 172.10.111.121
LAN Mask: 255.255.0.0
LAN Routing Config: None
WAN Address: 172.111.127.1
WAN Mask: 255.255.255.252
WAN Routing Config: None
PPP Address: 172.9.111.121
PPP Mask: 255.255.0.0
PPP Routing Config: None
Modem Init. String: AT&F0
Chap User Name: chap
Chap Secret: chap
TFTP Address: 172.10.111.111
TFTP File Name: ram.hex
TX Power: 15 dBm
ODU Mute: ON
ODU Mute Time: 0
APC Mode: OFF
RSL Setpoint: -60 dBm
Protection Mode: No protection
Aux Channel Rate: 19200
Static Routes: No routes
Trap Mode: Terse
Perf. History Upload File Name :phist.csv
Perf. History Mode: OFF
Perf. History Collected Variables: ALL ON
Collection Interval: 15 Minutes
Upload Interval: 1 Day

To display or change radio settings select Configuration, and then one of

the following:

System – shows and lets you set date and times, radio name, location,
and contact information.

Page 3-2 Proteus AMT System User’s Manual

 Aligning the ODU

ODU – shows and lets you set the transmit frequency and output power,
ATPC and the RSL set points, and has an ODU Mute control.

IDU – displays and lets you configure orderwire and auxiliary channels.

LIM – shows the installed LIM and lists valid types. Lets you configure
a LIM to a valid type other than the installed type.

LIMn Tributaries – shows and lets you 'equip' (enable) channels.

Equipped lines are monitored for loss of signal. Data still flows on un-
equipped lines.

IP Address – view or set IP addresses and network masks of: LAN (ra-
dio), WAN (IPO-Air), or TFTP server for code download. Also, set trap
mode to silent–off, verbose–all data, or terse–summary. Default gateway
lets you define where the radio sends IP packets destined for other IP
subnets.

NOTE: Set radio IP addresses properly for the terminal-to-terminal

management channel and MNI protection routing to work. See
Appendix D for routing.

The factory configures the ODU based on customer specification. If not,

set using EM as follows:
• Open Configuration and select ODU
• Enter the transmit frequency in megahertz (MHz) for the addressed
radio. The radio automatically sets receive frequency.
• Set maximum transmit power and automatic transmit power control
(ATPC)
• Click Apply to set changes and continue working or OK to set
changes and exit

Aligning the ODU

Proper antenna alignment is required for reliable operation of a terrestrial
microwave system. Since RF units mount on the antennas, the entire out-
door unit (ODU) moves during alignment.

A terrestrial microwave radio needs clear line-of-sight to its correspond-

ing far-end terminal to operate. Correct alignment ensures highest possi-
ble performance—maximum power and minimum interference—of the
microwave signal.

Proteus AMT System User’s Manual Page 3-3

Commissioning

Course ODU Alignment

This procedure should have been done after ODU installation, however
this section repeats the steps for convenience.

WARNING DO NOT WORK IN FRONT OF AN ENERGIZED ODU!

The power-density level at the open end of any RF-Unit output
when transmitting exceeds the level recommended by American
National Standards Institute (ANSI) publication C95.1-1-1991.

Pre-align ODU azimuth, horizontal reference, by pointing the unit to-

ward the far-end unit as closely as possible.
1. Loosen the U-bolts that secure the unit to allow deliberate movement of
the ODU around the mast.
2. Rotate the ODU to the estimated bearing using a compass and
binoculars.
3. Tighten the U-bolts.

To pre-align elevation, vertical reference, by pointing the unit either up

or down to the approximate position.
1. Loosen the clamping bolts and center bolt.
2. Move the antenna to the estimated vertical angle.
3. Tighten the clamping and center bolts.

The antenna is now coarsely adjusted in both elevation and azimuth.

With the radio powered, you may now notice that you can pass traffic
across the link. Complete the antenna alignment by doing the fine align-
ment.

Fine ODU Alignment

The RSL display only reads This adjustment is best done by first establishing the path with ODUs
up to -90 dBm, and does not coarsely adjusted in both elevation and azimuth. Have a co-worker ob-
accurately measure RSL for serving RSL at the IDU at the far-end radio with communication be-
radios operating beyond tween each location. If the link is synchronized, you can use the engi-
-90 dBm.
neering orderwire handset, if included.

Set Final ODU Alignment

1. At the transmit ODU, connect a digital multimeter to the test

connection using test leads that have a BNC connector at one end.
On a protected system, use the test connector on the the standby
ODU.

Page 3-4 Proteus AMT System User’s Manual

 Aligning the ODU

2. Pan the ODU in azimuth using the fine azimuth adjustment to locate the
main lobe of the microwave signal. Watching the AGC voltage at the
receive site for peak signal. The main lobe will have the highest
AGC voltage. RSL at the IDU should be close to the figure
determined in your path calculation.

As Figure 3-1 shows the signal side lobes are typically 15-20 dB
down. If the signal peaks below the expected level, you most likely
are on a side lobe or have cross polarized the antenna. There are
sharp drops in power response between the lobes and broad response
at the peaks.

Figure 3-1. Typical Antenna Side Lobes

3. After locating the main lobe stop panning at the point of maximum
signal strength (highest AGC voltage).
4. Tighten azimuth adjustment nuts just enough to prevent the ODU from
moving.
5. Pan the ODU in elevation and stop at the point of maximum signal
strength (highest AGC voltage).
6. Tighten the fine elevation adjustment just enough to prevent the ODU
from moving.
7. As the radio nears the maximum signal strength, use both adjustments to
play one against the other. Align both antennas in two planes, elevation
and azimuth, to get the optimum signal strength.
8. Once the azimuth and elevation adjustment is optimal, tighten the
U-bolts on the pole to secure the entire assembly. Tighten each of the
nuts equally in repetitive steps until all are secure to help prevent the
antenna from moving its position during tightening. Monitor AGC
during the process to ensure that the ODU does not move.

At the completion of this adjustment, the RSL voltage level should be as

predicted by the path budget calculation.

The RSL display only reads If the level is lower than predicted, identify and fix the discrepancy.
up to -90 dBm, and does not These include: checking the path for line-of-sight and proper fresnel
accurately measure RSL for clearances, recalculating the path parameters and checking transmit
radios operating beyond power. Also, verify antenna polarization and alignment.
-90 dBm.

Proteus AMT System User’s Manual Page 3-5

Commissioning

Making Configuration Changes

Configuring the ODU

Normally, each radio ships fully configured. Outdoor units are set and
tested at the frequencies that each customer orders. If a link requires
changes to ODU operating frequency use element manager, or craft ter-
minal interface, from the local access port to change settings. Configura-
tion changes require administrative-level access.

Note: RF unit synthesizers tune to frequencies within the half band

(low/high) of the channel plan, but unit tuning is limited to the
bandwidth of its diplexer. Changing the diplexer is a
factory-level procedure. Contact Customer Service for details.

Set Transmit and Receive Frequency

Set specific radio transmit frequency at the local site only as follows:
1. Open Configuration from the main menu
2. Select ODU
3. Enter the transmit frequency in megahertz for the NE radio. The IDU
establishes and sets receive frequency for you.

Note: Frequency accuracy is guaranteed when you set transmit

frequency in 250-kHz steps, or in 529.464-kHz steps for 8-GHz
units with 311.32 T/R, per the ITU F.386 channel plan.
Deviating from this can cause transmit-frequency accuracy
errors beyond stated accuracy and stability specifications.

4. Click Apply to set changes and continue working.

The new operating transmit and receive frequencies display on the ODU
Configuration screen.
5. Click OK to set changes and exit

Set Transmit Power Output

Change the ODU output power when necessary as follows:
1. Open Configuration from the main menu
2. Select ODU
3. Enter the transmit power in dBm for the addressed radio
4. Click Apply to set changes and continue working
5. Click OK to set changes and exit

Page 3-6 Proteus AMT System User’s Manual

 Making Configuration Changes

Configuring the IDU

Any configuration change Factory test verify IDUs at the capacities dictated by the customer sales
requires Admin-level access order. Use CTI or Element Manager (EM) to make configuration
changes.

Set Capacity
The radio auto-senses capacity based on the line interface modules
(LIMs) you plug in to the indoor unit (IDU).
The IDU has combinations of LIMs that allows the system capacity to
operate within set bandwidths. See Chapter 1, Table 1-D and Table 1-E
for valid configurations.
The IF board matches radio bandwidth to radio capacity: 3.5, 7, 14, and
28-MHz bandwidth for ITU channel plans, and 5, 10, 20, 25 MHz for
FCC channel plans. Change the IF board to increase capacity beyond
bandwidth limits.

Set Tributaries
To set LIM line types in EM or CTI:
1. Open Configuration from the main menu
2. Select LIMA/B
3. Configure your proposed LIM type for both near- and far-end LIMs, and
primary and secondary LIMs on hot-standby radios.
For example, the IDU reads that an 8E1 LIM is the 'installed type', but
you may want to temporarily use the LIM as a 4E1; your 'proposed type.
4. In EM click Apply to set changes and continue working
Use can also vary the data 5. Select Equipped to allow the IDU to monitor the channel for loss of
rate of 100BaseT LIMs in signal. Unequipped channels pass traffic unmonitored
the 'A' slot on a 2 x 100BT
radio. The data rate of LIM 6. In EM click Apply to set changes and continue working, or click OK to
'B' adjusts accordingly. set changes and exit

Set Orderwire and RS232 Auxiliary Channels

Use EM or CTI to set AUX channel 1 or channel 2 as follows:
1. Open Configuration
2. Select Service Channels
3. Select the radio to configure
4. In Orderwire channel set station number, and select voice or data mode
5. In AUX1/2 channel set baud rate, parity, stop bits, and polarity
6. In EM click Apply set changes and continue, or OK to set and exit

Proteus AMT System User’s Manual Page 3-7

Commissioning

Configuring the RSU

Set Configuration Jumpers
The redundancy switch unit has configuration jumpers on the unit main
board that you may need to reconfigure when upgrading capacity or line
type.
Table 3-A Redundancy Switch Unit Configuration Jumpers
Jumper ON OFF
E1 – Slave Mode for 32E1 Enable slave For all other modes
E2 – E1/DS1sense line Disable sense Enable line sense
E3 – Master mode for 32E1 Enable master For all other modes
E4 – Slave Mode for 32E1 Enable slave For all other modes
E5 – Ethernet sense line Disable sense Enable line sense
Default Configurations* E1 E2 E3 E4 E5
1 x 16E1/DS1 with Ethernet
1 x 16E1/DS1 without Ethernet X
16E1/DS1 & E3/DS3 X
E3/DS3 with Ethernet X
E3/DS3 without Ethernet X X
2 x E3/DS3 X X
32 E1 Master X X
32 E1 Slave X X X
Ethernet only w/ 16E1 Shelf X
Ethernet only w/ E3 Shelf† X
Ethernet only w/ 16E1 & E3 Shelf† X
*. X means the jumper is ON
†. Disconnect the ribbon cable between the E3 board and the RSU main-board.

Set Protection Mode

Other than setting configuration jumpers set the redundancy switch unit
protection scheme by setting protection on the IDU as follows.
1. Open Configuration from the main menu
2. Select Protection Mode
3. Click Hot-Standby to put the radio in HSB configuration
If you attempt to place a non-protected radio in hot-standby mode, the
system returns a configuration failure.
4. Click OLR (on-line request) to manually switch the addressed or
connected radio on-line.
EM and your IDU indicators show the online status.
Set IP Data Routing
Finally, configure IP data routing for Ethernet channels as Appendix D
details.

Page 3-8 Proteus AMT System User’s Manual

 Verifying Radio Operation

Verifying Radio Operation

Verifying operation involves checking alarm conditions and radio per-
formance. Alarm conditions show alarms on individual radios and traffic
affecting conditions.

To get a quick summary of alarm conditions check the status-bar alarm

indications.

• Green indicators show normal operation.

• Red indicators show alarm or degraded condition.
To monitor individual alarm indications:
1. Open Status from the main menu
2. Select NE Alarms to view the local radio alarm indications.
3. Select FE Alarms to review alarm indications of radio across the link.
• Green indicators show normal operation.
• Red indicators show alarm or degraded condition.

Measuring performance in a digital communications system can be done

by transmitting pseudorandom data sequences through a channel and rec-
ognizing errors at the receiving end. To start the BERT and monitor per-
formance use EM as follows:
1. Open Test
2. Select BERT (Near- and/or Far-End)
3. Select a channel under LIM A or LIM B to activate a bit-error rate test
of the channel. Un-selected tributaries operate normally during channel
tests. Or, click the BERT button at TX Aggregate to activate a bit-error
rate test on the near-end aggregate channel. Tributary testing is disabled
in aggregate mode.
4. Click Apply to set changes and continue working.

To read the actual bit error rate

1. Open Performance
2. Select G.826
3. The performance window displays the near end bit-error rate.

Proteus AMT System User’s Manual Page 3-9

Commissioning

Page 3-10 Proteus AMT System User’s Manual

 Chapter 4
Operation

Overview
This chapter focuses on operation in the transmit direction since receive
functions are reverse. The chapter also covers protection switching and
network management.

Basic Operation
The Proteus AMT radio connects distant points in a communication net-
work by converting input data to a radio frequency (RF) signal that can
be carried at microwave frequencies. As Figure 4-1 shows, the radio
transmits its signal from one radio (near end) to a matched radio at an-
other location within line of sight (far end). The connection between two
radios is called a microwave link or hop. The far-end radio converts the
RF signal back to its original form.

Data Data
IDU ODU ODU IDU
Lines Lines

Figure 4-1. Simplified Radio Link Diagram

The IDU converts line data and radio overhead channels to and from an
intermediate frequency (IF) for conversion by the ODU. This transport
function is bi-directional; that is, it separates into transmit and receive
functions.
A single coaxial cable provides the path for IF signals between the IDU
and ODU. The cable also transfers radio telemetry signals and power to
the ODU.
As Figure 4-2 shows, signal flow in the transmit direction includes signal
conditioning, multiplexing, modulation and correction coding, and then
conversion to an 270- or 350-MHz intermediate frequency. The ODU
then converts the IF to a radio frequency (RF) signal for transmission

Proteus AMT System User’s Manual Page 4-1

Operation

across the microwave link. Operation is full-duplex; that is, the radio
transmits data in two directions simultaneously.

IDU

LIM-A ODU

Multiplex Coding
IF RF
and and
Processing Processing
Frame Modem

LIM-B

Figure 4-2. Major Functions of the Proteus AMT Radio

For receive processing, the steps are reversed: from RF down-conversion

to a 60- or 140-MHz IF, demodulation, decoding, and de-multiplexing to
the original line data and radio overhead channels.

Line Interface

On the LIM (Figure 4-3), each line communicates to the mainboard

through FIFOs that provide asynchronous operation. The mainboard
controls read data from the TX FIFO.
Remote loopback of Tributary loopback occurs at the line interface for Ethernet and PDH ap-
Ethernet data only works plications. Because IP is a routing protocol, remote Ethernet loopback
with broadcast packets. only supports broadcast packets.

LIM Front Panel Tx FIFO-n

Line
Transformers Interface
n

Rx FIFO-n
Tx Bus To Mainboard
Line Connectors

Rx Bus

Tx FIFO-0

Line
Transformers Interface
0

Rx FIFO-0

Figure 4-3. LIM Functions

Figure 4-4 shows the multiplexing and modulation functions of the IDU
detailed in the following sections
.

Page 4-2 Proteus AMT System User’s Manual

 Basic Operation

Modulate
RS Trellis Preamble
MUX Scramble Interleave & Pulse DAC
Encode Encode Insert
Shape

De- RS Trellis De- IQ

DEMUX Deinterleave ADC
scramble Decode Decode modulate Recovery

Figure 4-4. IDU Signal Processing

Signal Multiplexing

The multiplexer, Figure 4-5, addresses the line interface FIFOs through
transmit and receive buses using transaction-start pulses. All reads or
writes for the respective bus go through an addressed FIFO until the
mainboard asserts a new address.
Transmit and receive buses operate independently. When a Tx FIFO
empties before the allocated frame slot fills, the LIM breaks the
valid-data signal and the multiplexer inserts stuff-data. For the Rx direc-
tion, the multiplexer discards stuff-data and parity words from the
far-end are not written to the Rx FIFO.

Transport
Channels

LIM-A

LIM-B Rx Bus

Service Multiplex
Channels

Aux1 Tx Bus
Overhead Channel Interface

Aux2

HS
OW1 Orderwire
OW2
Management
Channels
Term-term

IPOA

Figure 4-5. Multiplexing Data I/O Lines

Data from the overhead channels (service and management channels) get
multiplexed into the radio link in the same fashion by the mainboard via
the overhead channel interface as Figure 4-6 shows.
Service channels are provided for the network provider and can be turned
on or off. The radio management channels provides the terminal-to-ter-
minal communications, such as commands and status, and are always on.

Proteus AMT System User’s Manual Page 4-3

Operation

To the modem, overhead channels work the same as tributaries on the

LIMs. Data is pulled or pushed by the multiplexer function from individ-
ual channel interfaces.
Transport
Channels

LIM-A

LIM-B Rx Bus

Service Multiplex
Channels

Aux1 Tx Bus

Overhead Channel Interface

Aux2

HS
OW 1 Orderwire
OW 2
Management
Channels
Term-term

IPOA

Figure 4-6. Multiplexing Overhead Channels

Service Channels
The IDU carries auxiliary data and orderwire channels. Two auxiliary in-
terfaces correspond to the two RS232 auxiliary radio channels. Three or-
derwire interfaces – handset, OW1/OW2 – go to one orderwire channel.
The RS232 AUX1 and AUX2 data channels can be independently set for
9.6 or 19.2 kbps; odd, even, or no parity; one or two stop bits; and in-
verted or non-inverted polarity.
Orderwire provides three local interfaces: handset, OW1, and OW2, and
one radio-link interface for transporting an 8-bit, 8k-sample, mu-law
voice channel. The orderwire operates in either voice or data mode.
Offline IDUs on protected In voice mode, the radio transmits data from only one of the local inter-
systems mute the OW port faces at a time based on activity. The channel that is “loudest” seizes the
to prevent echo problems channel. Orderwire is carried over the radio link as a 64 kbps channel.
on ancillary equipment.
Each front-panel interface (Handset, OW1, and OW2) receives the
“loudest” of the three remaining interfaces (the two other front-panel in-
terfaces and the received over-the-air channel). OW1 and OW2 each
have data rates of 80 kbps that convert to 8 kilobytes per second.
Assign each IDU a unique station number using EM or the text-based in-
terface. An integral decoder recognizes the station number and activates
the IDU buzzer to indicate when the IDU is called.

Page 4-4 Proteus AMT System User’s Manual

 Basic Operation

In data mode, 64 kbps data of OW1 is converted from serial to parallel

and carried over the radio link at 64 kbps. OW2 and handset interfaces
are inactive in data mode.
VOICE MODE DATA MODE
IDU IDU
OW1 OW1
OW2 OW2
HS HS

IDU IDU
OW1 OW1
OW2 OW2
HS HS

IDU IDU
OW1 OW1
HS OW2 HS OW2

Figure 4-7. OW1/2 Operating Modes

Management Channels

The radio carries two management channels over the link: a 64 kbps
IP-over-the-air (IPO-Air); IP over TCP/IP channel and a non-IP termi-
nal-to-terminal channel at 9.6 kbps.
The terminal-to-terminal channel operates even if the TCP/IP stack or
other higher-layer services are unavailable.

Modulation and Coding

To accommodate a wide range of data rates efficiently, the modem func-

tion can be configured into many modulation and inner FEC coding con-
figurations that satisfy the most common combinations of capacities and
occupied bandwidths:
• QPSK
• 8-TCM
• 16-TCM
• 32-TCM
• 32-QAM
Forward error correction (FEC) provides further flexibility in transport
capacity and link margin. FEC reduces processing latency for lower
symbol rates.
Prior to encoding, the data is in a frame format that can be configured as
an integer number of code words. The frame includes a frame count for
scrambling and de-scrambling. Data and stuff slots for each transport and

Proteus AMT System User’s Manual Page 4-5

Operation

overhead channel get transported in the order read from the LIMs and
overhead channels.
Stuff slots let the radio link and line interfaces transmit asynchronously
–intermittently rather than in a steady stream. A data unit that represents
the stuff counts of each LIM or overhead channel as well as frame stuff
counts get inserted into the frame. Stuff counts and redundancy checks
are used to detect frame transmission errors.
Aggregate loopback is a digital loop of the modem. Input from the line
interface and multiplexer connect to the demultiplexer for output to the
LIM tributaries.

IF Conversion and Multiplexing

The IF board, Chapter 1, Table 1-F, connects to the mainboard to inter-

face signals between the IDU and ODU. IF bandwidth matches customer
data rate requirements (see Chapter 1).

The transmit IF function receives a 100-ohm differential signal that is the

40-MHz output from the modem DAC. This signal is up converted to
270- or 350 MHz, filtered, amplified and sent to the multiplexer/demulti-
plexer. The multiplexer isolates the five bands of signals passing be-
tween the ODU and IDU: DC, up- and down-link telemetry, and up and
down IF. The circuit also maintains a relatively-low insertion loss and
good return loss in all bands of interest.

-48 Vdc powers the ODU. The ASK telemetry path has a combined pass
band of 2- to 20 MHz. Uplink telemetry is 5.5 MHz and downlink telem-
etry is 10 MHz. Total insertion loss for the telemetry path is 10dB at
5.5 MHz and 7.5 dB at 10 MHz.

The IF path gets split between the 270- or 350 MHz transmit IF and 60-
or 140 MHz receive IF. Total insertion loss for the 60 MHz IF is 5 dB,
and for the 270 MHz IF path 97 dB.

The board gets the nominal 60 MHz IF at -10dBm output of the ODU.
The receive path has AGC to compensate for the ODU/IDU interconnect
cable length. The line loss of this cable at 60 MHz is between 0 and
15 dB. The IF circuit also aids in adjacent channel filtering.

The isolated IF signal from the ODU first gets amplified, filtered at the
appropriate bandwidth, slope and speed correction, and is then presented
as a differential 100-ohm signal to the modem ADC circuitry.

Page 4-6 Proteus AMT System User’s Manual

 Basic Operation

RF Conversion

DC, IF, and telemetry signals go to the RF unit at the ODU through the
IDU-to-ODU coax cable. The multiplexer separates signals from the
IDU and combines signals to the IDU. -48 Vdc from the IDU powers the
ODU. The unit double up-converts the transmit IF to the output RF and
double down-converts RF to the receive IF.

As Figure 4-8 shows, the main-board in the RF-unit performs IF/RF con-
version and local oscillator functions. The transmitter, receiver, and di-
plexer provide the proper operating frequencies.

TRANSMITTER PA

MAIN BOARD

LO2 DIPLEXER
MUX LO1 TX OSC. ANTENNA
IDU
TX/RX
OSC.
LO2
RX OSC.

RECEIVER

Figure 4-8. ODU Functions

Each RF unit is full-duplex, that is–it transmits on one frequency and re-
ceives on a second. Its match, at the far-end of a path, operates on oppo-
site transmit and receive frequencies. Consequently, RF units are referred
to as 'LB' or 'HB' heads. LB, low band, units transmit in the lower
half-band and receive in the upper half-band, and 'HB', high band, units
transmit high and receive low.
The RF unit tunes to any frequency in its half-band, but the diplexer has
RF channel filters with bandwidths that are not as wide the half-band
tuning range. So, the tuning range of any RF unit is the range of the di-
plexer. Replacing diplexers to tune an RFU past its diplexer range is a
factory-level procedure.
The ASK telemetry channel communicates commands to the RF unit and
alarm and radio identification data to the IDU.
Automatic transmit power control (ATPC) allows the radio to maintain a
constant RSL by amplifying or attenuating the far-end transmitter. You
configure RSL threshold and maximum TX power. Minimum power is
fix to 30 dB below the specified output of your radio. APC keeps RSL
within +3 dB of the set point by adjusting far-end transmit power in 1 dB
steps.

Proteus AMT System User’s Manual Page 4-7

Operation

Protection Switching
The Proteus AMT radio has a hot-standby (HSB) configuration for redun-
dancy protection. In this configuration the radio has two terminals (IDU
and ODU) connected to a Redundancy Switch Unit (RSU). The RSU
provides switching for the transmit and receive signal paths should one
of the radios develop a problem. The RSU selects the best path by moni-
toring the alarm status of both IDUs. Transmit and receive paths switch
together.

The redundant, or standby, equipment includes the IDU, cable, and

ODU. Both radios in the hot-standby configuration use the same antenna
and line interface modules as Figure 4-9 shows.

ID U
(M AIN )

CONTROL
D AT A
& S T AT U S
ODU
USER (M AIN )
D AT A HOT
S T AN D B Y CO UPLER
S W IT C H
ODU
(S T AN D B Y )

CONTROL
D AT A
& S T AT U S

ID U
(S T AN D B Y )

H S B _O P .V S D

Figure 4-9. Hot-Standby Configuration

Both radios operate at the same frequency. The main radio transmit path
connects via the through-arm of a coupler while the standby radio con-
nects via the coupled arm. Transmit power is 7-dB lower than a non-pro-
tected radio on the standby path and 1-dB lower on the main path.

When a near-end, or local radio, transmit path failure occurs, it takes

time for the radio controller to detect the alarm and for the off-line trans-
mitter to be brought on line. Once the secondary transmitter is on-line,
the far end receivers acquire the new signal and synchronize the data be-
fore sending signals to the customer ports. Table 4-A lists switch times.

On the receive side, the signal from the antenna goes through the same
coupler as the transmitter. At the receive side of the IDU, a relay

Page 4-8 Proteus AMT System User’s Manual

 Protection Switching

switches data from the online IDU to the customer output connector(s).
Switching logic controls the relay.

The receive splits in the RF coupler. Receive threshold on the standby re-
ceive path is about 7-dB worse than on a non-protected radio, and 1-dB
worse on the main path. But, a properly planned path it is adequate for all
but the worst conditions. Normally the system operates only on the pri-
mary receivers and switches to standby on hardware failure.
Table 4-A Typical Hot-Standby Switching Time
IF BW Manual Software Loss of Signal High IDU Power ODU Power
Switch (Online Request) (Data Input) BER Fail Fail
28 MHz 281.3 ms 289.1 ms 318.1 ms 432.2 ms 309.1 ms 221.3 ms
14 MHz 175.4 ms 161.2 ms 175.4 ms 281.9 ms 190.8 ms 159.2 ms
7 MHz 164.2 ms 170.3 ms 196.0 ms 190.6 ms 190.6 ms 181.7 ms
3.5 MHz 313.8 ms 374.4 ms 361.4 ms 162.2 ms 162.0 ms 186.7 ms

NOTE: Protection switching is non-reverting—the system does not

switch back to the main side after alarms clear.

Reverse Channel Switch

A hot-standby radio has redundant standby equipment. Reverse channel

switching lets a far-end terminal put the redundant transmitting terminal
in operation when a transmitter fails, Figure 4-10 [1].

The far-end receive terminal detects a transmit failure [2] that activates a
remote transmit alarm [3] that triggers a transmit switch request [4] to
the transmit site. The switch request causes the transmitting terminal to
put the redundant equipment in operation [5].

IDU IDU
(STANDBY) (STANDBY)

ODU ODU
(STANDBY) (STANDBY)
5

RSU
RSU

1 ODU ODU
(MAIN) (MAIN)

4 2
1
3

IDU 3 IDU
(MAIN) (MAIN)

Figure 4-10. Reverse Channel Switch Operation

Proteus AMT System User’s Manual Page 4-9

Operation

User Interfaces
Radio management includes both serial and IP-based text and graphic in-
terfaces for radio control and supervision by support personnel. Control
involves configuration and test while supervision involves monitoring
status and performance, radio identification, and inventory.

IP (Internet protocol) and non-IP interfaces are available for the Proteus
AMT radio as Figure 4-11 shows. Radio interfaces connect open-system
and proprietary management software to the radio. Software includes a
command line interface (CLI), a text-based menu system called the craft
terminal interface (CTI), and the graphical system called Element Man-
ager (EM).
FRONT PANEL
RADIO MANAGEMENT
NMS/SNMP-1 CHANNELS
ENET ENET
ENET
Repeater Driver
NMS/SNMP-2 IPOA Ch
HDLC SERIAL
Driver (64 kbps)
DIALER/
IP
MONITOR
SERIAL
MODEM/PPP UART PPP
Driver
TCP/UDP

RADIO API
SNMP
Near End Data

TELNET CLI
Term-Term SERIAL Term-Term Ch
COMPUTER Protocol Driver (9.6 kbps)
SERIAL
CLI/CTI UART Driver CLI
Far End Data

Figure 4-11. User Interface Functions

NMS / SNMP (Ethernet)

Two 10/100-BaseT Ethernet ports, labeled NMS, are available on the

IDU front panel for radio management via simple network management
protocol (SNMP). A second Ethernet port provides an interconnection
for co-located radios. IP messages addressed to the far-end, or other net-
work radios, travel through an IP-over-the-air (IPO-Air), or WAN, chan-
nel.

SNMP capability lets commercially-available TCP/IP network manage-

ment facilities monitor Proteus AMT radios in their network. A propri-
etary Management Information Base (MIB) defines the transmission be-
tween a third-party NMS application and the radio.

Page 4-10 Proteus AMT System User’s Manual

 User Interfaces

MODEM / PPP (Serial IP)

Connect and power a The MODEM port uses point-to-point protocol (PPP) that is a 64 kbps
modem for PPP before serial interface to the local TCP/IP stack. This allows remote manage-
powering the IDU. ment using an external telephony modem. A “dialer / monitor” function
within the IDU negotiates the telephone signaling protocol to establish a
dial-up serial link. The port does not provide dial-out or paging.

COMPUTER / CTI (Serial)

The craft terminal interface (CTI) is a serial craft interface for local radio
management at 9600 bps. The local COMPUTER port does not use the
SNMP agent or the TCP/IP stack, but supports a graphical user interface
(GUI) for the radio.

Management Software

Both CTI and EM follow a similar software template. Both use similar
selections and responses. The difference between the two is how the soft-
ware displays radio data. Figure 4-12 outlines the CTI/CLI management
software menus and choices and Figure 4-13 outline the EM menus and
selections.

Proteus AMT System User’s Manual Page 4-11

 Proteus AMT CTI/CLI Radio Management Software

Page 4-12
Operation

Alarms Performance Test Configuration Utilities

1. Current Alarms Radio Select 1. Aggregate Local Loopback 1. IDU 1. Download Files
Radio select 1. Last Second Radio select Radio select Radio select
2. Latched Alarms 2. Last Minute 1. Agg Local Loopback 1. Radio Name 1. Begin Download
Radio select 3. Last Hour 2. Agg Loopback Time 2. Inventory 2. Flash Destination
3. Alarm Log 4. Last Day 2. Aggregate BER Test 3. Admin Password 1. Bootloader Code
Radio select 6. Last Week Radio select 4. Guest Password 2. Application Code
1. Show Log Elapsed Sec. Clear All Agg BER Results 5. Set Clock 3. IDU TX Code
2. Reset Log Available Sec. 1. Agg BER Test Mode 2. ODU 4. IDU RX Code
4. Change Log Errored Sec. 2. Agg BER Test Results Radio select /w info 5. E1/DS1 LIM Code
Severely Errored Sec. 3. Clear Agg BER Results 1. ODU Info 6. E3/DS3 LIM Code
Radio select 2. TX Frequency
1. Show Log Bit Error Rate 3. Tributary Loopback 7. Ethernet LIM Code
(Ctrl-C to Exit) 3. RX Frequency
2. Reset Log Radio select 3. TFTP File Name
6. All Statistics 1. Trib Local Loopback 4. TX Power
Clear all latched alarms 5. APC Mode 4. TFTP Server Address
Elapsed Sec. 2. Trib Remote Loopback 2. Copy Image (Secondary to
Available Sec. 6. RSL Setpoint
4. Tributary BER Test 7. ODU Mute State Primary)
Unavailable Sec. Radio select 3. Copy Image (Primary to
Errored Sec.: 3. LIMs / Modulation
1. Trib BER Test Mode Radio select /w info Secondary)
Severely Errored Sec. 2. Trib BER Test Results 1. Current State 4. Copy Near-End Sec Image to Far-
Errored Sec. Ratio 3. Clear Trib Results End
Sev Errored Sec. Ratio 2. Proposed LIM A Type
Total Codewords 5. ODU Mute 3. Proposed LIM B Type 5. Copy Far-End Sec Image to Near-
Bit Error Rate Radio select 4. Equipped Tributaries End
Back Bit Error Rate 1. Odu Mute State 5. LIM A Line Encoding 6. Reboot To Primary Image
Current RSL 2. Odu Mute Time 6. VLAN Set-up Radio select
Fade Margin 4. Service Channels 7. Reboot To Secondary Image
Transmit Power Radio select /w info Radio select
(Ctrl-C to exit) 1. Aux Chan1
7. History 2. Aux Chan 2
1. Data Collection 1. Baud Rate
Enable 2. Parity
2. Data Collection 3. Polarity
Interval 4. Stop Bits
3. Collected Variables 3. Orderwire
4. Upload Filename 1. OW Mode
5. Upload Interval 2. OW Station Code
6. Storage Info 5. Hot Standby
7. Show History Radio select /w info
8. Request Manual 1. Protection Mode
Upload 2. Online Request
9. Clear History 3. Twin IDU Address
8. Reset Stats 4. Status
6. IP
Radio select /w info
1. LAN Intf (address)
1. LAN IP Address
2. LAN IP Mask
3. LAN Routing Config
2. WAN Interface
3. PPP Interface
1. IP Address

Figure 4-12. Craft Terminal Interface Radio Management Software Outline

2. IP Mask
3. Routing Config
4. Modem BaudRate
5. Modem Init String
6. Authentication[CHAP]
Radio selection in NP is: Radio selection in HSB is: Exit is always selection #0 7. CHAP Username
1. Near End (Local) 1. Near End Primary 8. CHAP Secret
2. Far End 2. Far End Primary 7. Alarms
0. Exit 3. Near End Secondary (Local) Radio select /w info
4. Far End Secondary 1. Radio Name
0. Exit 2. Inventory
3. Admin Password
4. Guest Password
'w/ info' means menu selections also show current settings 5. Set Clock
6. Craft Port Rate
8. Reset to Factory Settings

Proteus AMT System User’s Manual

 Proteus AMT Graphical Radio Management Software

File Status Performance Radio Info Test Configuration Utilities

Connect NE/FE Alarms RF Statistics Inventory ODU Mute IDU Copy Image Files
NE/FE Tx Power Image Booted TX control and timer Radio name & location primary to secondary
Disconnect NE/FE Test display of min/max/avg. NE/FEODU Contacts secondary to primary

Proteus AMT System User’s Manual

tests in progress NE/FERSL NE/FEIDU Loopback Date/Time
Backup min/max/avg. NE/FE IF Board Digital aggregate Set Admin/Guest Pswd Download Firmware
Configuration Event Log Fade Margin NE/FELIM Line (LIM) ODU
Alarm & Events Full Table TX Frequency Reboot NE Radio
Rest o r e w/ save to file feature G.826 Statistics BERT TX Power primary image
Configuration NE/FE Performance LinkView BER test for ATPC mode secondary image
(based on G.826) On screen graphic aggregate data path RSL set point
Exit that displays performance and LIM tributaries ODU mute & timer Reboot FE Radio
History and inventory LIMs primary image
Configure, present, Configuration secondary image
and save performance Installed
history tables Proposed Restore factory defaults
Configured
Capacity
LIM A Tributaries
Equipped/Unequipped
LIM B Tributaries
Equipped/Unequipped
Service Channels
OW Station Code
OW mode (voice\data)
Auxiliary channels
Baud
Parity
Inversion
Stop Bits
Hot Standby
Protection Mode
Twin IDU Address
Online Request
Protection State
Protection Side
Manual/Auto
Other Radio Alarm
IP Addresses
LAN, WAN, PPP,

Figure 4-13. Element Manager Radio Management Software Outline

TFTP, Routing,
Routing table, Trap
desitnations
Alarms
Edit/Map
Restore Defaults
VLANS
LIM n Device Configuration
LIM n Port Configuration
LIM n VLAN Table

Page 4-13
User Interfaces
Operation

Page 4-14 Proteus AMT System User’s Manual

 Chapter 5
Maintenance

Overview
Proteus AMT radios require minimal preventive and corrective mainte-
nance. Checking terminal and link performance periodically and analyz-
ing the performance logs uncover problems that may need attention.

Customer Service Options

Telephone Support

For repair service or technical assistance call 1-888-225-4762 (U.S.) or

1-281-263-6501 (international), or fax 1-281-263-6730.

Repair and Exchange Services

Standard repair turn around is typically 14 calendar days from receipt of

module to shipment from Microwave Networks. Emergency exchange is
typically one day from receipt of request to shipment. Standard repair
and emergency exchange time frames do not necessarily apply to discon-
tinued products or frequency-specific modules, assemblies, and radios.

For repair services:

1. Call our Customer Care Center – 1-888-225-4762 (U.S.) or

1-281-263-6501 (international)– for a Return Authorization Number
(RA#) prior to shipment of any equipment for repair. The customer
care representative can explain charges, if any.
2. Return modules in static-safe material. Pack securely for shipment.
3. Provide the following information to facilitate repair or exchange:
• Company name, Ship To, and Bill To address.

Proteus AMT System User’s Manual Page 5-1

Maintenance

• Contact name, phone number, and FAX number.

• Radio model and serial/frame number.
• Module number/description.
• Description of the problem or damage.
• Module configuration
• Operating frequency of module, when applicable.

Include the RA number both inside and on the outside of the package.
For out of warranty repairs, include a purchase order.

Send your package to:

Microwave Networks, Inc.
4000 Greenbriar #100A,
Stafford, Texas, 77477
ATTN: Repair/Returns

Technical Support Services

Around-the-clock telephone support is available on all Microwave Net-

works products. For telephone support contact 1-888-225-4762 (U.S.) or
1-281-263-6501 (international).

Normal hours are 8:00 a.m. to 5:00 p.m., Monday through Friday, U.S.
Central Time. After-hour telephone support is available through our dis-
patch operators.

Technical Support is guaranteed for current products or products on Ad-

ditions and Maintenance (AM) status.

Support for Manufacturing Discontinued (MD) products vary by product

age, available material, available spares, etc. Telephone technical sup-
port on discontinued products may be subject to a charge depending
upon duration and nature of assistance.

Page 5-2 Proteus AMT System User’s Manual

 Maintenance

Maintenance

Replacing IDU Components

IDU hardware is designed with no user-configuration jumpers and with

few components to change in the field. Besides changing LIMs you can
replace the power supplies fuses or the main-board backup battery.

Replacing LIMs

Each IDU accepts up to two line interface modules (LIMs). The two
LIMs can be installed in any combination up to the maximum data rate
compatible with the system bandwidth as “Line Interface Modules” on
Page 1-6 describes.

You can hot-swap LIMs, that is, remove of replace a LIM while the sys-
tem is powered without interrupting traffic on the other. After installing a
LIM, the IDU determines the LIM type but does not automatically
change tributary configuration. The active and enabled tributaries would
operate until you make changes.

The IDU automatically determines the installed channel bandwidth and

LIMs in use to select the modulation that provides the best system gain.
By installing different LIMs or LIM combinations the data rate and mod-
ulation within the installed channel automatically adjusts.

Of course, system gain decreases at the higher data rates, but if the path
was planned for eventual capacity upgrade, the reduced gain will be suf-
ficient for a reliable hop.

To replace the LIM:

1. Divert traffic from the LIM you are removing.
2. Disconnect all cabling.
3. Loosen the two retaining screws from the front panel
4. Pull the LIM toward you using the retaining screws. The fit may be
tight, be careful when pulling the LIM forward.

5. Install the new LIM. Seat and secure using the two retaining screws.

Proteus AMT System User’s Manual Page 5-3

Maintenance

Replacing the Power Supply Fuse

The cartridge fuses listed below are part of the power supply protection
from severe lightning strikes and against shorting. The fuse opens only in
the case of an excessive surge, a component failure, or a short on the ca-
ble to the ODU.

• 48V P/N 3110015-01 2AG-125V, FAST-BLO, 5 AMP

• 24V P/N 3110015-02 2AG-125V, FAST-BLO, 7 AMP
Power circuits must handle An in-line fuse in the DC path to the ODU prevents damage to the IF
initial in-rush current. If board if the IDU/ODU cable shorts.
used, rate circuit breakers IDU
for 6A with trip
characteristic 'C' or slower. 2A fuse
RFI/EMI
Ferrite Bead
To Cable IDU/
ODU

-48V
Surge
Protector

The power supply fuse mounts on a fuse clip in the front of the power
supply. To replace the fuse:

1. Turn the IDU off by disconnecting the power cable.

2. If you can reach all screws on the IDU top cover, remove the cover.
Otherwise, pull the unit from the rack to remove the top cover.
3. Pull the fuse from its clip on the front of the
power supply board using a fuse puller like the
one show here.
4. Replace the fuse, restore the unit in the rack,
and apply power.

Replacing the Backup Battery

CAUTION Danger of explosion if battery is incorrectly replaced.

Replace only with the same or equivalent type
recommended by the manufacturer. Dispose of used
batteries according to the manufacturer's instructions.

Each IDU stores operational configuration parameters and critical con-

figuration performance data in non-volatile memory. A lithium coin-type
backup battery, P/N 3900388-00, allows the IDU to keep the memory
alive when power to the unit is shut off. The battery is 3V, 220 mAH bat-
tery; model CR2032.

To replace the battery:

Page 5-4 Proteus AMT System User’s Manual

 Maintenance

1. Turn the radio off by disconnecting the power cable.

2. If you can reach all screws on the IDU top cover, remove the cover.
Otherwise, pull the unit from the rack to remove the top cover.
3. Remove the old battery from the battery well on the main-board.
4. Clean the new battery surfaces to remove any dust.
5. Insert the new battery into the empty well.
6. Replace the cover, restore the unit in the rack, and apply power.

Replacing the Power Supply Board

CAUTION Don an antistatic strap prior to handling. Electrostatic

discharge (ESD) can damage the equipment.

The power supply mounts on the left side of the chassis. To replace the
power supply:

1. Turn the IDU off by

disconnecting the power
cable.
2. If you can reach all
screws on the IDU top
cover, remove the cover.
Otherwise, pull the unit
from the rack to remove
the top cover.
3. Disconnect the power
cable assembly from the
board. Some cables have
an in-line fuse. Be
careful not to break wires
going to the in-line fuse
assembly.
4. Remove the 6 to 9 screws
holding the power supply
board to the chassis.
5. Replace the board,
restore the unit in the
rack, and apply power.

Proteus AMT System User’s Manual Page 5-5

Maintenance

Replacing IF Boards

CAUTION Don an antistatic strap prior to handling. Electrostatic

discharge (ESD) can damage the equipment.

IF boards have an EMI/RFI The radio ships with a fixed occupied bandwidth of: 3.5, 5, 7, 10, 14, 20,
cover. Some figures here 25, 28, or 30 MHz. Changing occupied bandwidth requires replacing the
show the cover removed. IDU IF board. Figure 5-1 shows the location of the board in the IDU
chassis.

Figure 5-1. IF Board in the IDU

IF boards only work with To replace the IF board:
corresponding
motherboards (Chapter 1, 1. Turn the radio off and disconnect
Table 1-F). cables.
2. Move the IDU to a bench.
3. Remove the IDU top cover.
4. Disconnect two cables connected to
the IF board.
5. Remove the six Phillips-head screws
that secure the board.
6. The board connects to a multi-pin
header on the mainboard–framed top
right in the illustration. Carefully lift
the board straight up to remove.
7. Reverse these steps to replace the board.
8. Power and boot the radio.
9. Using the radio management software, check the IF board ID and
bandwidth. If you switched bandwidth, check that you have a valid
LIM configuration.

Page 5-6 Proteus AMT System User’s Manual

 Maintenance

Replacing ODU RF Units

RF units mount directly to the back of the antenna. The housing is circu-
lar and made of cast aluminum. It attaches to the antenna with a di-
rect-mount fitting and four snap latches. So, any RF unit can be removed
from the antenna without changing antenna alignment.

Other than the antenna fitting, the head has three external connections:
an N-type connector for the IDU/ODU cable, a BNC connector to the
AGC test voltage for alignment, and a grounding lug.

RF units are also data rate independent, so the same head works with any
IDU data rate or modulation scheme.

Each RF unit has full-duplex transceiver that transmits on one frequency

and receives on a second. Its match, at the far-end of a path, operates on
opposite transmit and receive frequencies. Consequently, RF units are re-
ferred to as 'LB' or 'HB' heads. LB, low band, units transmit in the lower
half-band and receive in the upper half-band, and 'HB', high band, units
transmit high and receive low.

The RF unit oscillator tunes to any frequency in its half-band, but the di-
plexer has RF channel filters with bandwidths that are not as wide the
half-band tuning range. Thus, the tuning range of any RF unit is the
range of the diplexer. Replacement heads, if not being used to change to
different bands, must match the original configuration.

To replace the RF unit:

1. Remove power from the IDU by disconnecting the power cable. Tag the
plug and unit to prevent someone from applying power to the unit while
you work at the ODU.
2. At the ODU remove the IDU/ODU cable and ground.
Polarization of the hot- 3. Hold the RF unit against the antenna with one hand while opening
standby ODU coupler ships the snap fasteners that secure the unit to the antenna.
as ordered. A polarization
adapter ships in the ODU 4. Slide the unit away from the antenna and place the unit to the side.
packaging for the alternate
5. Slide the replacement into place on the antenna. Use the vertical
polarization.
label on the housing to orient the head for proper polarization. If you
On early-model units rotate need to change polarization, the adapter for the alternate polarization,
the complete RF unit typically horizontal polarization, ships in the box with the units.
assembly 90° for horizontal
polarization. At 15-GHz 6. Close the four latches that secure the unit to the antenna.
and below, also turn the
7. Connect ground and the IDU/ODU cable.
transition on the antenna.
8. Apply power to the IDU by connecting the power cable.

Proteus AMT System User’s Manual Page 5-7

Maintenance

Updating Firmware

Using EM to Update Firmware

Updating the firmware General

requires that you reboot the
IDU. Schedule the update Updating the radio 'operating code',
during low- or no traffic for bootloader (startup), applica-
periods.
tion, IDU TX, IDU RX, or LIM
code is like updating BIOS in a PC.
Application code downloads to a
secondary image location in the
IDU. LIM other IDU code down-
loads to programmable logic of that section. After downloading the ap-
plication code, reboot from the secondary image to check that the code
works, and then copy the image from the secondary to the primary, de-
fault boot, location. Maintain the secondary image as a backup.

Get a free trial version of a Download firmware from through the front panel Ethernet NMS port us-
TFTP server at ing any networked PC running TFTP server software. Configure the
http://www.solarwinds.net TFTP according to the product instructions.

NOTE: Firmware files are available on the CD that ships with your
system. You can also download updates from our web site at
www.microwavenetworks.com.

Download Files and Reboot Radio

1. Open Utility
2. Select Download Firmware
3. Type the TFTP IP address in the appropriate field
4. Select Flash (file type) from the pull-down menu
5. Enter the TFTP file name for the file you want to load
6. Click Begin Download to start the download
7. Continue Step 4 and 5 to download multiple files in no chosen order.
8. Reboot the radio. If you updated application code, reboot from the
secondary image.
9. Check the revision numbers under Radio Info, Inventory. If correct,
copy the code from the secondary to the primary (default boot) image
location, and then reboot from the primary.

Page 5-8 Proteus AMT System User’s Manual

 Maintenance

Using CTI to Update Firmware

Updating the firmware General

requires that you reboot the Application code downloads to a secondary image location on the IDU.
IDU. Schedule the update
LIM and other IDU code downloads to specific programmable logic. Af-
during low- or no traffic
periods. ter downloading application code, reboot from the secondary image to
check that the code works, and then copy the image from the secondary
to the primary, default boot, location.

Get a free trial version of a Download firmware from the Ethernet NMS port using any networked
TFTP server at PC running TFTP server software.
http://www.solarwinds.net
Download Files and Reboot Radio
1. Log in to IDU
2. From main menu, select 5-Utilities
3. Select 1-Download Files
4. Select a radio to update – NE/FE primary or secondary (protected)
5. Select 2-Flash Destination
6. Select code type – bootloader, application, IDU Tx\Rx, or LIM
7. Select 3-TFTP File Name
8. Enter the download file name
9. Select 5-TFTP Server Address
10. Enter the IP address of your TFTP server
11. Select 1-Begin Download

Near End Primary Download Menu

1. Begin Download
2. Flash Destination [Bootloader Code]
3. TFTP File Name [ram.hex]
4. TFTP Server Address [172.16.99.2]
0. Exit
NewRadio-99, Major Alarm, Link Down >

Progress shows on the screen, but stops at 2% if you do not connect to

the server. The radio IP address must be on the same subnet as the TFTP
server, and you must have a good network connection. The radio IP ad-
dress shows on the Configuration menu, IP selection.
Once you download the code successfully, select Configuration, chose
the updated radio, and use Inventory to check the file revisions.
If you update application code, reboot the radio from the secondary im-
age to verify operation. Once verified, copy the image into the primary
location, so you don’t maintain two software versions on the IDU.
From Utility, select Copy Image (Secondary to Primary), and select the
radio. When copy completes, re-boot the IDU. You may have to recon-
figure LIMs if your radio used a very early-version code.

Proteus AMT System User’s Manual Page 5-9

Maintenance

Maintenance Checks

Periodic Maintenance

The Proteus AMT Radio requires only periodic inspections to isolate po-
tential problems and ensure trouble-free operation.

Monthly Checks

Use one of the user interfaces to check performance and event logs. Con-
tinued analysis of the logs over time give a good general indication of ra-
dio performance.

The RSL display only reads Verify RSL (receive signal strength). Low RSL, or AGC voltage, that
up to -90 dBm, and does not stays low can mean antenna misalignment, RF path obstruction, decrease
accurately measure RSL for in transmitter power, or a reduction in receiver sensitivity. Ignore minor
radios operating beyond
-90 dBm. random variations caused by weather and temperature changes since they
can cause day-to-day variation.

On hot-standby radios, manually select each data path and transmit/re-

ceive pair during low traffic periods to check for hidden problems.

Semi-Annual Checks

Visually inspect the ODU. Pay particular attention to the IDU/ODU ca-
ble. Look for signs of rubbing, chafing, or cracks. Check weatherproof-
ing for deterioration. Remove any old weatherproofing and check con-
nectors for damage. Clean and re-seal ODU connectors.

Annual Checks

Check transmitter parameters at least annually (or more often if required

by your regulatory agency). Follow regulatory agency guidelines to
check the transmitter. Typical parameters to be measured are carrier fre-
quency, output power, and modulation characteristics.

Page 5-10 Proteus AMT System User’s Manual

 Appendix A
RF Unit Frequencies

Overview
This appendix lists the frequency range and channel plan for each RF
unit. RF units are full-duplex, that is–they transmit on one frequency and
receive on a second. Complement units, at opposite-ends of links, oper-
ate at counterpart transmit and receive frequencies. Consequently, RF
units are referred to as 'LB' or 'HB' units. LB, low band, units transmit in
the lower half-band and receive in the upper half-band, and 'HB', high
band, units transmit high and receive low.

Early model RF unit synthesizers had tuning ranges that were less than
the half-band of its frequency plan. Current RF units include wideband
synthesizers that cover the entire half-band of the frequency plan. How-
ever, the tuning range of any RF unit is the range of its diplexer. Tuning
past the diplexer range requires replacing the diplexer. Diplexer replace-
ment is a factory-level procedure; contact Customer Service for more in-
formation.

Frequency and Channel Plans

The first sections have channel-plan tables for RF units that operate on
60-MHz IF input and 240-MHz IF output. The latter sections have tables
for RF units that operate on 140-MHz IF input and 350-MHz IF output.

This section includes the following frequencies and channel plans that
Table A-A, on page A-2, lists.

Proteus AMT System User’s Manual Page A-1

RF Unit Frequencies

Table A-A RF Frequencies and Channel Plans

Frequency Range T/R Spacing Table Number
(GHz) (MHz) 60/270-MHz IF 140/350-MHz IF
7 GHz 7.12 - 7.9 154 A-K A-N
160 A-L A-O
161 A-M A-P
196 A-Q
8 GHz 7.9 - 8.5 119 A-R
208 A-S
266 A-T
311.32 A-U
11-GHz 10.7 - 11.7 490 A-V
530 A-W
13 GHz 12.75 - 13.25 226 A-J A-X
15 GHz 14.4 - 15.35 315 A-D A-Y
420 A-E A-Z
475 A-F A-AB
490 A-G A-AA
640 A-AC
644 A-H A-AD
728 A-I A-AE
18 GHz 17.7 - 19.7 1010 A-B A-AF
1560 A-C A-AG
23 GHz 21.3 - 23.6 1008 A-AH
1200 A-AI
1232 A-AJ
26 GHz 24.25 - 26.5 800 A-AK
1008 A-AL
38 GHz 37 - 40 700 A-AM
1260 A-AN

18GHz, 60/270-MHz IF

Table A-B 18GHz, 1010-MHz T/R Spacing; 60/270-MHz IF

Sub- TX Center TX Lower TX Upper RX Center RX Lower RX Upper
ODU P/N**
Band* Freq., GHz Limit, GHz Limit, GHz Freq., GHz Limit, GHz Limit, GHz
LB1 6300W18-00 17.835 17.685 17985 18.845 18.695 18.995
LB2 6300W18-01 18.080 17.930 18230 19.090 18.940 19.240
LB3 6300W18-02 18.330 18.180 18480 19.337 19.186 19.490
LB4 6300W18-03 18.555 18.410 18700 19.565 19.420 19.710
HB1 6300W18-04 18.845 18.695 18995 17.835 17.685 17.985
HB2 6300W18-05 19.090 18.940 19240 18.080 17.930 18.230
HB3 6300W18-06 19.330 19.190 19490 18.327 18.180 18.480
HB4 6300W18-07 19.565 19.420 19710 18.555 18.410 18.700
*LB-LOW BAND; HB-HIGH BAND
** Early model ODU part numbers were 6300018-xx

Table A-C 18GHz, 1560-MHz T/R Spacing; 60/270-MHz IF

Sub- TX Center TX Lower TX Upper RX Center RX Lower RX Upper
ODU P/N
Band* Freq., GHz Limit, GHz Limit, GHz Freq., GHz Limit, GHz Limit, GHz
LB1 6300W18-10 17.850 17.700 18.000 19.410 19.260 19.560
LB2 6300W18-11 17.990 17.840 18.140 19.550 19.400 19.700

Page A-2 Proteus AMT System User’s Manual

 Frequency and Channel Plans

Table A-C 18GHz, 1560-MHz T/R Spacing; 60/270-MHz IF

HB1 6300W18-12 19.410 19.260 19.560 17.850 17.700 18.000
HB2 6300W18-13 19.550 19.400 19.700 17.990 17.840 18.140

15GHz, 60/270-MHz IF

Table A-D 15GHz, 315-MHz T/R Spacing; 60/270-MHz IF

Sub- TX Center TX Lower TX Upper RX Center RX Lower RX Upper
ODU P/N
Band* Freq., GHz Limit, GHz Limit, GHz Freq., GHz Limit, GHz Limit, GHz
LB1 6300W15-60 14679.5 14627.0 14732.0 14994.5 14942.0 15047.0
LB2 6300W15-62 14777.5 14725.0 14830.0 15092.5 15040.0 15145.0
LB3 6300W15-64 14875.5 14823.0 14928.0 15190.5 15138.0 15243.0
LB4 6300W15-66 14819.5 14767.0 14872.0 15134.5 15082.0 15187.0

HB1 6300W15-61 14994.5 14942.0 15047.0 14679.5 14627.0 14732.0

HB2 6300W15-63 15092.5 15040.0 15145.0 14777.5 14725.0 14830.0
HB3 6300W15-65 15190.5 15138.0 15243.0 14875.5 14823.0 14928.0
HB4 6300W15-67 15160.8 15134.5 15187.0 14819.5 14767.0 14872.0
*LB-LOW BAND; HB-HIGH BAND

Table A-E 15GHz, 420-MHz T/R Spacing; 60/270-MHz IF

Sub- TX Center TX Lower TX Upper RX Center RX Lower RX Upper
ODU P/N**
Band* Freq., GHz Limit, GHz Limit, GHz Freq., GHz Limit, GHz Limit, GHz
LB1 6300W15-40 14.574 14.500 14.648 14.994 14.920 15.068
LB2 6300W15-42 14.714 14.640 14.788 15.134 15.060 15.208
LB3 6300W15-44 14.854 14.780 14.928 15.274 15.200 15.348
HB1 6300W15-41 14.994 14.920 15.068 14.574 14.500 14.648
HB2 6300W15-43 15.134 15.060 15.208 14.714 14.640 14.788
HB3 6300W15-45 15.274 15.200 15.348 14.854 14.780 14.928
*LB-LOW BAND; HB-HIGH BAND
** Early model ODU part numbers were 6300015-xx

Table A-F 15GHz, 475-MHz T/R Spacing; 60/270-MHz IF

Sub- TX Center TX Lower TX Upper RX Center RX Lower RX Upper
ODU P/N
Band* Freq., GHz Limit, GHz Limit, GHz Freq., GHz Limit, GHz Limit, GHz
LB1 6300W15-50 14584.0 14500.0 14668.0 15059.0 14975.0 15143.0
LB2 6300W15-52 14744.0 14660.0 14828.0 15219.0 15135.0 15303.0
LB3 6300W15-54 14799.0 14715.0 14883.0 15242.5 15190.0 15295.0
HB1 6300W15-51 15059.0 14975.0 15143.0 14584.0 14500.0 14668.0
HB2 6300W15-53 15219.0 15135.0 15303.0 14744.0 14660.0 14828.0
HB3 6300W15-55 15242.5 15190.0 15295.0 14799.0 14715.0 14883.0
*LB-LOW BAND; HB-HIGH BAND

Proteus AMT System User’s Manual Page A-3

RF Unit Frequencies

Table A-G 15GHz, 490-MHz T/R Spacing; 60/270-MHz IF

Sub- TX Center TX Lower TX Upper RX Center RX Lower RX Upper
ODU P/N**
Band* Freq., GHz Limit, GHz Limit, GHz Freq., GHz Limit, GHz Limit, GHz
LB1 6300W15-10 14.484 14.400 14.568 14.974 14.890 15.058
LB2 6300W15-12 14.627 14.543 14.711 15.117 15.033 15.201
LB3 6300W15-14 14.776 14.692 14.860 15.266 15.182 15.350
HB1 6300W15-11 14.974 14.890 15.058 14.484 14.400 14.568
HB2 6300W15-13 15.117 15.033 15.201 14.627 14.543 14.711
HB3 6300W15-15 15.266 15.182 15.350 14.776 14.692 14.860
*LB-LOW BAND; HB-HIGH BAND
** Early model ODU part numbers were 6300015-xx

Table A-H 15GHz, 644-MHz T/R Spacing; 60/270-MHz IF

Sub- TX Center TX Lower TX Upper RX Center RX Lower RX Upper
ODU P/N**
Band* Freq., GHz Limit, GHz Limit, GHz Freq., GHz Limit, GHz Limit, GHz
LB1 6300W15-30 14.484 14.400 14.568 15.128 15.044 15.212
LB3 6300W15-33 14.622 14.538 14.706 15.266 15.182 15.350
HB1 6300W15-31 15.128 15.044 15.212 14.484 14.400 14.568
HB3 6300W15-34 15.266 15.182 15.350 14.622 14.538 14.706
*LB-LOW BAND; HB-HIGH BAND
** Early model ODU part numbers were 6300015-xx

Table A-I 15GHz, 728-MHz T/R Spacing; 60/270-MHz IF

Sub- TX Center TX Lower TX Upper RX Center RX Lower RX Upper
ODU P/N**
Band* Freq., GHz Limit, GHz Limit, GHz Freq., GHz Limit, GHz Limit, GHz
LB2 6300W15-20 14.5635 14.500 14.615 15.2915 15.228 15.343
HB2 6300W15-21 15.2915 15.228 15.343 14.5635 14.500 14.615
*LB-LOW BAND; HB-HIGH BAND
** Early model ODU part numbers were 6300015-xx

13GHz, 60/270-MHz IF

Table A-J 13GHz, 266-MHz T/R Spacing; 60/270-MHz IF

Sub- TX Center TX Lower TX Upper RX Center RX Lower RX Upper
ODU P/N
Band* Freq., GHz Limit, GHz Limit, GHz Freq., GHz Limit, GHz Limit, GHz
LB1 6300W13-00 12.7825 12.751 12.814 13.0485 13.017 13.080
LB2 6300W13-01 12.8385 12.807 12.870 13.1045 13.073 13.136
LB3 6300W13-02 12.8945 12.863 12.926 13.1605 13.129 13.192
LB4 6300W13-03 12.9505 12.919 12.982 13.2165 13.185 13.248
HB1 6300W13-04 13.0485 13.017 13.080 12.7825 12.751 12.814
HB2 6300W13-05 13.1045 13.073 13.136 12.8385 12.807 12.870
HB3 6300W13-06 13.1605 13.129 13.192 12.8945 12.863 12.926
HB4 6300W13-07 13.2165 13.185 13.248 12.9505 12.919 12.982
*LB-LOW BAND; HB-HIGH BAND
** Early model ODU part numbers were 6300013-xx

Page A-4 Proteus AMT System User’s Manual

 Frequency and Channel Plans

7GHz, 60/270-MHz IF

Table A-K 7GHz, 154-MHz T/R Spacing; 60/270-MHz IF

Sub- TX Center TX Lower TX Upper RX Center RX Lower RX Upper
ODU P/N
Band* Freq., GHz Limit, GHz Limit, GHz Freq., GHz Limit, GHz Limit, GHz
LBA 6300007-60 7456 7428 7484 7610 7582 7638
LBB 6300007-62 7498 7470 7526 7652 7624 7680
LBC 6300007-64 7512 7484 7540 7666 7638 7694
LBD 6300007-66 7554 7526 7582 7708 7680 7736
HBA 6300007-61 7610 7582 7638 7764 7736 7792
HBB 6300007-63 7652 7624 7680 7806 7778 7834
HBC 6300007-65 7666 7638 7694 7820 7792 7848
HBD 6300007-67 7708 7680 7736 7862 7834 7890
*LB-LOW BAND; HB-HIGH BAND

Table A-L 7GHz, 160-MHz T/R Spacing; 60/270-MHz IF

Sub- TX Center TX Lower TX Upper RX Center RX Lower RX Upper
ODU P/N
Band* Freq., GHz Limit, GHz Limit, GHz Freq., GHz Limit, GHz Limit, GHz
LBG 6300007-12 7.4650 7.4335 7.4965 7.625 7.5935 7.6565
LBJ 6300007-16 7.5100 7.4785 7.5415 7.670 7.6385 7.7015
LBL 6300007-20 7.5575 7.5260 7.5890 7.718 7.6860 7.7490
HBG 6300007-13 7.6250 7.5935 7.6565 7.465 7.4335 7.4965
HBJ 6300007-17 7.6700 7.6385 7.7015 7.510 7.4785 7.5415
HBL 6300007-21 7.7175 7.6860 7.7490 7.558 7.5260 7.5890
*LB-LOW BAND; HB-HIGH BAND

Table A-M 7GHz, 161-MHz T/R Spacing; 60/270-MHz IF

Sub- TX Center TX Lower TX Upper RX Center RX Lower RX Upper
ODU P/N
Band* Freq., GHz Limit, GHz Limit, GHz Freq., GHz Limit, GHz Limit, GHz
LBE 6300007-08 7.3800 7.3485 7.4115 7.541 7.5095 7.5725
LBF 6300007-10 7.4360 7.4045 7.4675 7.597 7.5655 7.6285
LBH 6300007-14 7.4920 7.4605 7.5235 7.653 7.6215 7.6845
LBK 6300007-18 7.5480 7.5165 7.5795 7.709 7.6775 7.7405
LBM 6300007-22 7.6040 7.5725 7.6355 7.765 7.7335 7.7965
LBN 6300007-24 7.6600 7.6285 7.6915 7.821 7.7895 7.8525
HBE 6300007-09 7.5410 7.5095 7.5725 7.380 7.3485 7.4115
HBF 6300007-11 7.5970 7.5655 7.6285 7.436 7.4045 7.4675
HBH 6300007-15 7.6530 7.6215 7.6845 7.492 7.4605 7.5235
HBK 6300007-19 7.7090 7.6775 7.7405 7.548 7.5165 7.5795
HBM 6300007-23 7.7650 7.7335 7.7965 7.604 7.5725 7.6355
HBN 6300007-25 7.8210 7.7895 7.8525 7.660 7.6285 7.6915
*LB-LOW BAND; HB-HIGH BAND

Proteus AMT System User’s Manual Page A-5

RF Unit Frequencies

7GHz, 140/350-MHz IF

Table A-N 7GHz, 154 MHz T/R Spacing; 140/350-MHz IF

TX Lower TX Upper RX Lower RX Upper
Sub-Band* ODU P/N
Limit, MHz Limit, MHz Limit, MHz Limit, MHz
LB1 63-070154-00111-6100 7428 7484 7582 7638
HB1 63-070154-10111-6100 7582 7638 7428 7484
LB2 63-070154-00211-6100 7470 7526 7624 7680
HB2 63-070154-10211-6100 7624 7680 7470 7526
LB3 63-070154-00311-6100 7512 7568 7666 7722
HB3 63-070154-10311-6100 7666 7722 7820 7876
*LB-LOW BAND; HB-HIGH BAND

Table A-O 7GHz, 160 MHz T/R Spacing; 140/350-MHz IF

TX Lower TX Upper RX Lower RX Upper
Sub-Band* ODU P/N
Limit, MHz Limit, MHz Limit, MHz Limit, MHz
LB1 63-070160-00111-6100 7433.5 7496.5 7593.5 7656.5
HB1 63-070160-10111-6100 7593.5 7656.5 7433.5 7496.5
LB2 63-070160-00211-6100 7478.5 7541.5 7638.5 7701.5
HB2 63-070160-10211-6100 7638.5 7701.5 7478.5 7541.5
LB3 63-070160-00311-6100 7526.0 7589.0 7686.0 7749.0
HB3 63-070160-10311-6100 7686.0 7749.0 7526.0 7589.0
*LB-LOW BAND; HB-HIGH BAND

Page A-6 Proteus AMT System User’s Manual

 Frequency and Channel Plans

Table A-P 7GHz 161 MHz T/R Spacing; 140/350-MHz IF

TX Lower TX Upper RX Lower RX Upper
Sub-Band* ODU P/N
Limit, MHz Limit, MHz Limit, MHz Limit, MHz
LB1 63-070161-00111-6100 7114 7177 7275 7338
HB1 63-070161-10111-6100 7275 7338 7114 7177
LB2 63-070161-00211-6100 7149 7212 7310 7373
HB2 63-070161-10211-6100 7310 7373 7149 7212
LB3 63-070161-00311-6100 7184 7247 7345 7408
HB3 63-070161-10311-6100 7345 7408 7184 7247
LB4 63-070161-00411-6100 7219 7282 7380 7443
HB4 63-070161-10411-6100 7380 7443 7219 7282
LB5 63-070161-00511-6100 7239 7302 7400 7463
HB5 63-070161-10511-6100 7400 7463 7239 7302
LB6 63-070161-00611-6100 7274 7337 7435 7498
HB6 63-070161-10611-6100 7435 7498 7274 7337
LB7 63-070161-00711-6100 7309 7372 7470 7533
HB7 63-070161-10711-6100 7470 7533 7309 7372
LB8 63-070161-00811-6100 7344 7407 7505 7568
HB8 63-070161-10811-6100 7505 7568 7344 7407
LB9 63-070161-00911-6100 7414 7477 7575 7638
HB9 63-070161-10911-6100 7575 7638 7414 7477
LB10 63-070161-01011-6100 7449 7512 7610 7673
HB10 63-070161-11011-6100 7610 7673 7449 7512
LB21 63-070161-02111-6100 7484 7547 7645 7708
HB21 63-070161-12111-6100 7645 7708 7484 7547
LB22 63-070161-02211-6100 7519 7582 7680 7743
HB22 63-070161-12211-6100 7680 7743 7519 7582
LB23 63-070161-02311-6100 7539 7602 7700 7763
HB23 63-070161-12311-6100 7700 7763 7539 7602
LB24 63-070161-02411-6100 7574 7637 7735 7798
HB24 63-070161-12411-6100 7735 7798 7574 7637
LB25 63-070161-02511-6100 7609 7672 7770 7833
HB25 63-070161-12511-6100 7770 7833 7609 7672
LB26 63-070161-02611-6100 7644 7707 7805 7868
HB26 63-070161-12611-6100 7805 7868 7644 7707
*LB-LOW BAND; HB-HIGH BAND

Table A-Q 7GHz 196 MHz T/R Spacing; 140/350-MHz IF

TX Lower TX Upper RX Lower RX Upper
Sub-Band* ODU P/N
Limit, MHz Limit MHz Limit, MHz Limit, MHz
LB1 63-070196-00111-6100 7093 7149 7289 7345
HB1 63-070196-10111-6100 7289 7345 7093 7149
LB2 63-070196-00211-6100 7121 7177 7317 7373
HB2 63-070196-10211-6100 7317 7373 7121 7177
LB3 63-070196-00311-6100 7149 7205 7345 7401
HB3 63-070196-10311-6100 7345 7401 7149 7205
LB4 63-070196-00411-6100 7177 7233 7373 7429
HB4 63-070196-10411-6100 7373 7429 7177 7233
LB5 63-070196-00511-6100 7205 7261 7401 7457
HB5 63-070196-10511-6100 7401 7457 7205 7261
*LB-LOW BAND; HB-HIGH BAND

Proteus AMT System User’s Manual Page A-7

RF Unit Frequencies

8GHz, 140/350-MHz IF

For reference; contact MNI about availability.

Table A-R 8GHz 119 MHz T/R Spacing; 140/350-MHz IF
TX Lower TX Upper RX Lower RX Upper
Sub-Band* ODU P/N
Limit, MHz Limit, MHz Limit, MHz Limit, MHz
LB1 63-080119-00111-6100 8279 8307 8398 8426
HB1 63-080119-10111-6100 8398 8426 8279 8307
LB2 63-080119-00211-6100 8293 8321 8412 8440
HB2 63-080119-10211-6100 8412 8440 8293 8321
LB3 63-080119-00311-6100 8307 8335 8426 8454
HB3 63-080119-10311-6100 8426 8454 8307 8335
LB4 63-080119-00411-6100 8321 8349 8440 8468
HB4 63-080119-10411-6100 8440 8468 8321 8349
LB5 63-080119-00511-6100 8335 8363 8454 8482
HB5 63-080119-10511-6100 8454 8482 8335 8363
LB6 63-080119-00611-6100 8349 8377 8468 8496
HB6 63-080119-10611-6100 8468 8496 8349 8377
*LB-LOW BAND; HB-HIGH BAND

Table A-S 8GHz 208 MHz T/R Spacing; 140/350-MHz IF

TX Lower TX Upper RX Lower RX Upper
Sub-Band* ODU P/N
Limit, GHz Limit, GHz Limit, GHz Limit, GHz
LB1 63-080208-00111-6100 8043 8113 8251 8321
HB1 63-080208-10111-6100 8251 8321 8043 8113
LB2 63-080208-00211-6100 8099 8169 8307 8377
HB2 63-080208-10211-6100 8307 8377 8099 8169
LB3 63-080208-00311-6100 8155 8225 8363 8433
HB3 63-080208-10311-6100 8363 8433 8155 8225
LB4 63-080208-00411-6100 8211 8281 8419 8489
HB4 63-080208-10411-6100 8419 8489 8211 8281
*LB-LOW BAND; HB-HIGH BAND

Table A-T 8GHz 266 MHz T/R Spacing; 140/350-MHz IF

TX Lower TX Upper RX Lower RX Upper
Sub-Band* ODU P/N
Limit, MHz Limit, MHz Limit, MHz Limit, MHz
LB1 63-080266-00111-6100 7905 8024 8171 8290
HB1 63-080266-10111-6100 8171 8290 7905 8024
LB2 63-080266-00211-6100 8017 8136 8283 8402
HB2 63-080266-10211-6100 8283 8402 8017 8136
*LB-LOW BAND; HB-HIGH BAND

Table A-U 8GHz 311.32 MHz T/R Spacing; 140/350-MHz IF

TX Lower TX Upper RX Lower RX Upper
Sub-Band* ODU P/N
Limit, MHz Limit, MHz Limit, MHz Limit, MHz
LB1 63-080311-00111-6100 7731 7867 8042 8178
HB1 63-080311-10111-6100 8042 8178 7731 7867
LB2 63-080311-00211-6100 7835 7971 8146 8282
HB2 63-080311-10211-6100 8146 8282 7835 7971
*LB-LOW BAND; HB-HIGH BAND

Page A-8 Proteus AMT System User’s Manual

 Frequency and Channel Plans

11 GHz, 140/350 MHz IF

For reference only: check with MNI for availability.

Table A-V 11GHz 490 MHz T/R Spacing; 140/350-MHz IF

TX Lower TX Upper RX Lower RX Upper
Sub-Band ODU P/N
Limit, MHz Limit, MHz Limit, MHz Limit, MHz
LB1 63-110490-00111-6100 10675 10855 11165 11345
HB1 63-110490-10111-6100 11165 11345 11655 11835
LB2 63-110490-00211-6100 10795 10975 11285 11465
HB2 63-110490-10211-6100 11285 11465 11775 11955
LB3 63-110490-00311-6100 10915 11095 11405 11585
HB3 63-110490-10311-6100 11405 11585 11895 12075
LB4 63-110490-00411-6100 11035 11215 11525 11705
HB4 63-110490-10411-6100 11525 11705 12015 12195
*LB-LOW BAND; HB-HIGH BAND

Table A-W 11GHz 530 MHz T/R Spacing; 140/350-MHz IF

TX Lower TX Upper RX Lower RX Upper
Sub-Band ODU P/N
Limit, MHz Limit, MHz Limit, MHz Limit, MHz
LB1 63-110530-00111-6100 10675 10855 11205 11385
HB1 63-110530-10111-6100 11205 11385 10675 10855
LB2 63-110530-00211-6100 10795 10975 11325 11505
HB2 63-110530-10211-6100 11325 11505 10795 10975
LB3 63-110530-00311-6100 10915 11135 11445 11665
HB3 63-110530-10311-6100 11445 11665 10915 11135
LB4 63-110530-00411-6100 11035 11215 11565 11745
HB4 63-110530-10411-6100 11565 11745 11035 11215
*LB-LOW BAND; HB-HIGH BAND

13GHz, 140/350-MHz IF
13-GHz ODUs at 140/350-MHz IF have either rectangular (standard) or
circular (optional) antenna interface. The antennas you purchase must
matched this interface.
Table A-X 13GHz 266 MHz T/R Spacing; 140/350-MHz IF
Sub- ODU P/N ODU P/N TX Lower TX Upper RX Lower RX Upper
Band Rect. Interface Circ. Interface Limit, MHz Limit, MHz Limit, MHz Limit, MHz
LB1 63-130266-00111-6100 63-130266-00111-6100 12751 12814 13017 13080
HB1 63-130266-10111-6100 63-130266-10111-6100 13017 13080 12751 12814
LB2 63-130266-00211-6100 63-130266-00211-6100 12807 12870 13073 13136
HB2 63-130266-10211-6100 63-130266-10211-6100 13073 13136 12807 12870
LB3 63-130266-00311-6100 63-130266-00311-6100 12863 12926 13129 13192
HB3 63-130266-10311-6100 63-130266-10311-6100 13129 13192 12863 12926
LB4 63-130266-00411-6100 63-130266-00411-6100 12919 12982 13185 13248
HB4 63-130266-10411-6100 63-130266-10411-6100 13185 13248 12919 12982
*LB-LOW BAND; HB-HIGH BAND

Proteus AMT System User’s Manual Page A-9

RF Unit Frequencies

15GHz, 140/350-MHz IF

15-GHz ODUs at 140/350-MHz IF have a standard rectangular antenna

interface or an optional circular antenna interface. Antennas that you
purchase must match this interface.

Table A-Y 15GHz, 315 MHz T/R Spacing; 140/350-MHz

Sub- ODU P/N ODU P/N TX Lower TX Upper RX Lower RX Upper
Band* Rect. Interface Circ. Interface Limit, MHz Limit, MHz Limit, MHz Limit, MHz
LB1 63-150315-00111-6000 63-150315-00111-6100 14627 14732 14942 15047
HB1 63-150315-10111-6000 63-150315-10111-6100 14942 15047 14627 14732
LB2 63-150315-00211-6000 63-150315-00211-6100 14725 14844 15040 15159
HB2 63-150315-10211-6000 63-150315-10211-6100 15040 15159 14725 14844
LB3 63-150315-00311-6000 63-150315-00311-6100 14823 14928 15138 15243
HB3 63-150315-10311-6000 63-150315-10311-6100 15138 15243 14823 14928
*LB-LOW BAND; HB-HIGH BAND

Table A-Z 15GHz, 420 MHz T/R Spacing; 140/350-MHz IF

Sub- ODU P/N, ODU P/N, TX Lower TX Upper RX Lower RX Upper
Band* Rect. Interface Circ. Interface Limit, MHz Limit, MHz Limit, MHz Limit, MHz
LB4 63-150420-00411-6000 63-150420-00411-6100 14501 14613 14921 15033
HB4 63-150420-10411-6000 63-150420-10411-6100 14921 15033 14501 14613
LB5 63-150420-00511-6000 63-150420-00511-6100 14606 14725 15026 15145
HB5 63-150420-10511-6000 63-150420-10511-6100 15026 15145 14606. 14725
LB6 63-150420-00611-6000 63-150420-00611-6100 14718 14837 15138 15257
HB6 63-150420-10611-6000 63-150420-10611-6100 15138 15257 14718. 14837
LB7 63-150420-00711-6000 63-150420-00711-6100 14816 14928 15236 15348
HB7 63-150420-10711-6000 63-150420-10711-6100 15236 15348 14816. 14928
*LB-LOW BAND; HB-HIGH BAND

Table A-AA 15GHz, 490 MHz T/R Spacing; 140/350-MHz IF

Sub- ODU P/N ODU P/N TX Lower TX Upper RX Lower RX Upper
Band* Rect. Interface Circ. Interface Limit, MHz Limit, MHz Limit, MHz Limit, MHz
LB4 63-150490-00411-6100 63-150490-00411-6100 14403 14522 14893 15012
HB4 63-150490-10411-6100 63-150490-10411-6100 14893 15012 14403 14522
LB5 63-150490-00511-6100 63-150490-00511-6100 14515 14634 15005 15124
HB5 63-150490-10511-6100 63-150490-10511-6100 15005 15124 14515 14634
LB6 63-150490-00611-6100 63-150490-00611-6100 14627 14746 15117 15236
HB6 63-150490-10611-6100 63-150490-10611-6100 15117 15236 14627 14746
LB7 63-150490-00711-6100 63-150490-00711-6100 14739 14858 15229 15348
HB7 63-150490-10711-6100 63-150490-10711-6100 15229 15348 14739 14858
*LB-LOW BAND; HB-HIGH BAND

Page A-10 Proteus AMT System User’s Manual

 Frequency and Channel Plans

Table A-AB 15GHz, 475 MHz T/R Spacing; 140/350-MHz

Sub- ODU P/N ODU P/N TX Lower TX Upper RX Lower RX Upper
Band* Rect. Interface Circ. Interface Limit, MHz Limit, MHz Limit, MHz Limit, MHz
LB1 63-150475-00111-6000 63-150475-00111-6100 14500 14668 14975 15143
HB1 63-150475-10111-6000 63-150475-10111-6100 14975 15143 14500 14668
LB2 63-150475-00211-6000 63-150475-00211-6100 14660 14828 15135 15303
HB2 63-150475-10211-6000 63-150475-10211-6100 15135 15303 14660 14828
LB3 63-150475-00311-6000 63-150475-00311-6100 14715 14883 15190 15358
HB3 63-150475-10311-6000 63-150475-10311-6100 15190 15358 14715 14883
*LB-LOW BAND; HB-HIGH BAND

Table A-AC 15GHz, 640 MHz T/R Spacing; 140/350-MHz

Sub- ODU P/N ODU P/N TX Lower TX Upper RX Lower RX Upper
Band* Rect. Interface Circ. Interface Limit, MHz Limit, MHz Limit, MHz Limit, MHz
LB1 63-150640-00111-6000 63-150640-00111-6100 14500 14610 15140 15250
HB1 63-150640-10111-6000 63-150640-10111-6100 15140 15250 14500 14610
LB2 63-150640-00211-6000 63-150640-00211-6100 14605 14715 15245 15355
HB2 63-150640-10211-6000 63-150640-10211-6100 15245 15355 14605 14715
*LB-LOW BAND; HB-HIGH BAND

Table A-AD 15GHz, 644 MHz T/R Spacing; 140/350-MHz

Sub- ODU P/N ODU P/N TX Lower TX Upper RX Lower RX Upper
Band* Rect. Interface Circ. Interface Limit, MHz Limit, MHz Limit, MHz Limit, MHz
LB1 63-150644-00111-6000 63-150644-00111-6100 14400 14512 15044 15156
HB1 63-150644-10111-6000 63-150644-10111-6100 15044 15156 14400 14512
LB2 63-150644-00211-6000 63-150644-00211-6100 14498 14610 15142 15254
HB2 63-150644-10211-6000 63-150644-10211-6100 15142 15254 14498 14610
LB3 63-150644-00311-6000 63-150644-00311-6100 14596 14708 15240 15352
HB3 63-150644-10311-6000 63-150644-10311-6100 15240 15352 14596 14708
*LB-LOW BAND; HB-HIGH BAND

Table A-AE 15GHz, 728 MHz T/R Spacing; 140/350-MHz

Sub- ODU P/N ODU P/N TX Lower TX Upper RX Lower RX Upper
Band Rect. Interface Circ. Interface Limit, MHz Limit, MHz Limit, MHz Limit, MHz
LB2 63-150728-00211-6000 63-150728-00211-6100 14500 14615 15228 15343
HB2 63-150728-10211-6000 63-150728-10211-6100 15228 15343 14500 14615
*LB-LOW BAND; HB-HIGH BAND

Proteus AMT System User’s Manual Page A-11

RF Unit Frequencies

18GHz, 140/350-MHz IF

Table A-AF 18GHz, 1010 MHz T/R Spacing; 140/350-MHz IF

TX Lower TX Upper RX Lower RX Upper
Sub-Band* ODU P/N
Limit, MHz Limit, MHz Limit, MHz Limit, MHz
LB1 63-181010-00111-6100 17685 17985 18695 18995
HB1 63-181010-10111-6100 18695 18995 17685 17985
LB2 63-181010-00211-6100 17930 18230 18940 19240
HB2 63-181010-10211-6100 18940 19240 17930 18230
LB3 63-181010-00311-6100 18180 18480 19190 19490
HB3 63-181010-10311-6100 19190 19490 18180 18480
LB4 63-181010-00411-6100 18400 18700 19,10 19710
HB4 63-181010-10411-6100 19410 19710 20420 20720
*LB-LOW BAND; HB-HIGH BAND

Table A-AG18GHz, 1560 MHz T/R Spacing; 140/350-MHz IF

TX Lower TX Upper RX Lower RX Upper
Sub-Band* ODU P/N
Limit, MHz Limit, MHz Limit, MHz Limit, MHz
LB1 63-181560-00111-6100 17700 18000 19260 19560
HB1 63-181560-10111-6100 19260 19560 17700 18000
LB2 63-181560-00211-6100 17840 18140 19400 19700
HB2 63-181560-10211-6100 19400 19700 17840 18140
*LB-LOW BAND; HB-HIGH BAND

23GHz, 140/350-MHz IF

Table A-AH 23GHz, 1008 MHz T/R Spacing; 140/350-MHz

TX Lower TX Upper RX Lower RX Upper
Sub-Band ODU P/N
Limit, MHz Limit, MHz Limit, MHz Limit, MHz
LB1 63-231008-00111-6100 22000 22314 23008 23322
HB1 63-231008-10111-6100 23008 23322 22000 22314
LB2 63-231008-00211-6100 22286 22600 23294 23608
HB2 63-231008-10211-6100 23294 23608 22286 22600
*LB-LOW BAND; HB-HIGH BAND

Table A-AI 23GHz, 1200 MHz T/R Spacing; 140/350-MHz

TX Lower TX Upper RX Lower RX Upper
Sub-Band ODU P/N
Limit, MHz Limit, MHz Limit, MHz Limit, MHz
LB1 63-231200-00111-6100 21200 21530 22400 22730
HB1 63-231200-10111-6100 22400 22730 21200 21530
LB2 63-231200-00211-6100 21490 21820 22690 23020
HB2 63-231200-10211-6100 22690 23020 21490 21820
LB3 63-231200-00311-6100 21780 22110 22980 23310
HB3 63-231200-10311-6100 22980 23310 21780 22110
LB4 63-231200-00411-6100 22070 22400 23270 23600
HB4 63-231200-10411-6100 23270 23600 22070 22400
*LB-LOW BAND; HB-HIGH BAND

Page A-12 Proteus AMT System User’s Manual

 Frequency and Channel Plans

Table A-AJ 23GHz, 1232 MHz T/R Spacing; 140/350-MHz

TX Lower TX Upper RX Lower RX Upper
Sub-Band ODU P/N
Limit, MHz Limit, MHz Limit, MHz Limit, MHz
LB1 63-231232-00111-6100 21200 21500 22432 22732
HB1 63-231232-10111-6100 22432 22732 21200 21500
LB2 63-231232-00211-6100 21472 21786 22704 23018
HB2 63-231232-10211-6100 22704 23018 21472 21786
LB3 63-231232-00311-6100 21779 22093 23011 23325
HB3 63-231232-10311-6100 23011 23325 21779 22093
LB4 63-231232-00411-6100 22086 22386 23318 23618
HB4 63-231232-10411-6100 23318 23618 22086 22386
*LB-LOW BAND; HB-HIGH BAND

26 GHz, 140/350 MHz IF

The 26 GHz ODU mounts directly to the back of its antenna using a cir-
cular waveguide interface. Use a two-unit coupler, PN 7200072-02, for
hot-standby systems.

Table A-AK 26 GHz, 800 MHz T/R Spacing; 140/350-MHz

TX Lower TX Upper RX Lower RX Upper
Sub-Band ODU P/N
Limit, MHz Limit, MHz Limit, MHz Limit, MHz
L01 63-260800-00111-6100 24250 24450 25050 25250
H01 63-260800-10111-6100 25050 25250 24250 24450

Table A-AL 26 GHz, 1008 MHz T/R Spacing; 140/350-MHz

TX Lower TX Upper RX Lower RX Upper
Sub-Band ODU P/N
Limit, MHz Limit, MHz Limit, MHz Limit, MHz
L01 63-261008-00111-6100 24549 24871 25557 25879
H01 63-261008-10111-6100 25557 25879 24549 24871
L02 63-261008-00211-6100 24843 25151 25851 26159
H02 63-261008-10211-6100 25851 26159 24843 25151
L03 63-261008-00311-6100 25123 25445 24843 25151
H03 63-261008-10311-6100 24843 25151 25123 25445

Proteus AMT System User’s Manual Page A-13

RF Unit Frequencies

38 GHz, 140/350 MHz IF

Table A-AM38GHz, 700 MHz T/R Spacing; 140/350-MHz IF

TX Lower TX Upper RX Lower RX Upper
Sub-Band ODU P/N
Limit, MHz Limit, MHz Limit, MHz Limit, MHz
LB1 63-380700-00111-6100 38595 38805 39295 39505
HB1 63-380700-10111-6100 39295 39505 38595 38805
LB2 63-380700-00211-6100 38795 39005 39495 39705
HB2 63-380700-10211-6100 39495 39705 38795 39005
LB3 63-380700-00311-6100 38995 39205 39695 39905
HB3 63-380700-10311-6100 39695 39905 38995 39205
LB4 63-380700-00411-6100 39195 39405 39895 40105
HB4 63-380700-10411-6100 39895 40105 39195 39405
*LB-LOW BAND; HB-HIGH BAND

Table A-AN 38GHz, 1260 MHz T/R Spacing; 140/350-MHz IF

TX Lower TX Upper RX Lower RX Upper
Sub-Band ODU P/N
Limit, MHz Limit, MHz Limit, MHz Limit, MHz
LB1 63-381260-00111-6100 37044 37632 38304 38892
HB1 63-381260-10111-6100 38304 38892 37044 37632
LB2 63-381260-00211-6100 37604 38192 38864 39452
HB2 63-381260-10211-6100 38864 39452 37604 38192
*LB-LOW BAND; HB-HIGH BAND

Page A-14 Proteus AMT System User’s Manual

 Appendix B
Alarm Definitions

Aggregate Local Loopback Aggregate local loopback is active (minor). A digital loopback between
MODEM and LIM.

Aggregate Transmit PN Pattern Modem is transmitting BER psuedo-random number pattern instead of
payload data.

AIS Inserted on Tributaries AIS (blue signal) generator active.

Alarm Log Reset Indicates that the alarm log was reset. Setting the reset as an alarm adds a
time-stamped entry to the alarm log for tracking.

APC at Max Power Automated Power Control is on and the far end is requesting more
power, but the power is at the maximum setting allowed by the user (mi-
nor).

Configuration Fail Modem did not configure properly due to LIM failure, equipment mis-
match, or modem failure (major).

Configuration Not Supported Current proposed LIM types indicate an invalid configuration (minor).

Custom BER Level Current BER is greater than the threshold specified by the alarm. The de-
fault value for the threshold is 10-9, but can be changed via alarm map-
ping (minor).

DTMF Buzzer The DTMF buzzer is currently ringing. This alarm can be mapped to a
relay, and the relay attached to an external buzzer or speaker for better
audio performance in high noise environments.

Equipment Mismatch Equipment does not match radio configuration (major).

Extern n (1–6) Indicated external alarm is active (low; minor).

Far End Terminal Failure Far end IDU has a current major alarm (minor at Near-End terminal).
Flash Fail Power-up tests indicated that the FLASH failed (minor).

HotStandby Hi Priority Alarm Signals that one of the alarms that is mapped as an HPA (high priority
alarm) is active. If one radio on a hot-standby system has a high priority
alarm and the other does not, then the RSU switches to the radio path
with no HPA and sets the radio with an HPA off-line.

Proteus AMT System User’s Manual Page B-1

Alarm Definitions

HotStandby Low Priority Alarm Signals that one of the alarms mapped as an LPA (low priority alarm) is
active. The Redundancy Switch Unit (RSU) takes no action on LPA.

HotStandby Online Status Also called the On-line Command. Signals from Redundancy Switch
unit (RSU) to primary and secondary IDUs. The online radio receives a
signal that indicates that it is online, while the offline radio gets an offline
signal. Element Manager shows PROTECTION STATE on the Configura-
tion, Hot Standby screen. CTI menus show ONLINE COMMAND on the
Configuration, Hot Standby, Status screen. This is a status signal that is
not treated as an alarm; it indicates radio operational state.

HotStandby Other Radio Alarm An alarm used on the hot-standby radio configuration. The alternate ra-
dio has a high priority alarm (minor).

I2C Failure I2C bus (to IF board, PS board, and LIMS) failed.

IF Board PLL Lock Synthesizer on the IF board will not lock. Data will likely not pass over
IF (major).

IP-Over-Air Channel Fail Loss of the 64-kbps IP overhead channel (minor).

LIM A/B Failure Aggregate receive traffic loss of signal.

LIM A/B Trib n Local Lpbk Indicated tributary is in local loopback (minor).

LIM A/B Trib n Remote Lpbk Indicated tributary is in remote loopback (minor).

LIM A/B Trib n TX PN Pattern Indicated tributary is transmitting a BER psuedo-random number pattern
(minor).

LIM A/B Trib. n (1–16) RX AIS AIS (blue signal) received on n (1–16) tributary.

LIM A/B Trib. n RX LOS Loss of signal on tributary n (1–16; minor).

Major Alarm Summary Any alarm thought to be potentially traffic-affecting

Minor Alarm Summary Any alarm condition that degrades radio performance or a radio in diag-
nostic mode.
Modem Receive Fail Modem is not currently acquired (includes error and unconfigured states;
major).

Modem Rx AGC Fail Adaptive gain control circuitry is out of range (major).

Modem Rx Carrier The receive radio is not detecting a carrier at the IDU.

Modem Rx Frame Loss The modem is trying, but cannot, acquire (major).

Modem Transmit Fail Modem transmitter is malfunctioning (major).

ODU Mute Alarm ODU output muted.

ODU RX/TX Alarm ODU indication of a TX or RX failure (major).

ODU Telemetry Alarm Cannot communicate with the ODU (minor).

Page B-2 Proteus AMT System User’s Manual

 Alarm Definitions

Other Radio Alarm Same as HotStandby Other Radio Alarm.

Primary Power Supply Fail Power supply of main unit is in alarm. Problem will likely kill the pro-
cessor before the alarm turns on (major).

RAM Fail Power-up DRAM test failed (minor).

Real Time Clock Fail Power-up test indicated that the Real Time Clock failed (minor).

Relay n (1–4) Indicated relay is energized (not-normal; minor).

Reverse Channel Switch Request Other side of a protected link requested a reverse channel switch (major).
RSL Threshold Fade margin is below the threshold specified by the alarm. Default value
for the threshold is 2 dB, but can be changed via alarm mapping (minor).

Rx AIS Signal AIS (all ones) inserted on the receive interface. LOS on the receive line
interface.

Rx BER >10^-3 Current bit error rate is greater than the threshold (major).

Rx BER >10^-6 Current bit error rate is greater than the threshold (minor).

Secondary Power Supply Fail Power supply of Redundancy Switch Unit is in alarm (major).

SRAM Fail Power-up test indicated that the SRAM failed (minor).

System Bootup System booted (used to mark alarm log; minor).

Term.-to-Term. Chan. Fail IDU cannot talk to far-end IDU (terminal) and cannot get or set far-end
parameters (minor).

Watchdog Timeout Last boot cycle was caused by the watchdog timer going off (unexpected
reset; major).

Proteus AMT System User’s Manual Page B-3

Alarm Definitions

Page B-4 Proteus AMT System User’s Manual

 Appendix C
Radio Management Interfaces

Overview
A controller in the IDU handles radio operation by accessing all alarms
and controls in the IDU and ODU. The controller also manages auxiliary
output relays and external TTL input alarms. Users have three manage-
ment interfaces to the controller through the front-panel management
ports that Figure C-1 shows: Element Manager – the Windows™ graph-
ical user interface, CTI – the text-based menu interface, and SNMP – an
industry standard IP interface. The front-panel management ports in-
clude:
• COMPUTER–local RS232 serial connection
• MODEM–serial connection using point-to-point protocol
• NMS–RJ45 Ethernet interface for SNMP

Figure C-1. Radio Management Ports

Multiple radio controllers can be cascade coupled to a central manager

(see Installation). Each controller has its own address, so the manager
can access coupled radios individually.
The controller also transmits and receives radio management data to and
from the radio at the opposite, or far end of its radio link. Accessing any
unit includes the near and far-end data for easy analysis.
The radio service channel provides service communication and
through-data capability. The channel for service messaging is
across-the-hop communication. Information such as the remote Ma-
jor/Minor alarms travel on this channel. Services include:

Proteus AMT System User’s Manual Page C-1

Radio Management Interfaces

• Radio service messages

• Orderwire (voice/DTMF) communications
• RS-232 data channel
• Radio management communications
Connections
Radio service channels provide the link for broadcasting radio perfor-
mance data and alarm messages, and issuing configuration and control
statements to individual radios, radio hops, and multiple radios in a con-
nected network. This overhead channel includes the network manage-
ment channel for radio management communications and the auxiliary
channels.

A management controller accesses all alarms and controls in the IDU and
ODU. The following interfaces provide access to radio management con-
troller data in two modes: IP and serial. The follows sub-sections detail
the connections.

• COMPUTER: 9-pin sub-D connector. 9600 bps RS-232 serial

interface to computer using VT100 emulation. Also works with EM
serial mode.
• NMS: two RJ-45 ports for 10/100BaseT IP management data. This
connection works using SNMP, Telnet, or EM.
• MODEM: 9-pin D-type connector for a 64 kbps RS-232 serial
interface to an external modem. Provides dial-in communication
with the IDU through a modem. Works with CTI, Telnet, or EM.

Computer

The computer port on the IDU front panel provides direct RS-232 serial
access to radio maintenance applications at 9600 bps. Connect a VT100
terminal or use any terminal emulation program, such as the HyperTer-
minal program that ships with Windows™, to access the text-based
maintenance application.
Use Element Manager (EM) from a computer serial connection to the
front-panel computer port. EM asks for connection type on opening.

Serial connections to terminals or computers use a straight-through serial

cable terminated with DB-9 connectors (not provided). See the Chapter
2, Installation, for the serial connection details.

Set terminal emulation programs to VT100 compatible with the port set
for 9600 bps, 8data bits, noparity, 1stop bit, and xon\xoff flowcontrol.

Page C-2 Proteus AMT System User’s Manual

 Connections

NMS-SNMP

Proteus AMT radios have two RJ45 ports for 10BaseT Ethernet to an
SNMP (Simple Network Management Protocol) agent.

Access any radio from an Ethernet LAN or WAN using the radio IP ad-
dress. Once connected, use EM, Telnet, or any SNMP management soft-
ware to access radio configuration, diagnostic, or performance data.

SNMP Basics
SNMP provides open-standard radio management via Ethernet. Since
SNMP is an open-standard protocol, any SNMP-capable management
application may be used to manage SNMP-based radios.

SMNP is a network management standard for LANs that defines a cli-

ent/server relationship. The client program (called the network manager)
makes virtual connections to a server program (called the SNMP agent)
that operates on a remote network device and serves information about
device status to the manager. SNMP uses a management information
base (MIB) to define these virtual connections. Any SNMP manager,
with proper access, can query the status and modify the configuration of
each managed device.

A MIB is a standard set of structure and format definitions for exchang-

ing information about network devices. Microwave Networks’ MIB is a
private MIB for its radio. The MIB contains the common name of each
object (which must be unique), the value of the object IDs (OID, which
are hierarchical and must be unique), and the textual description of the
syntax and semantics of the radio.

Ethernet routing in the Proteus AMT is self-learning, which makes set-

ting up a radio network uncomplicated. Routing Information Protocol
version 2 (RIP-2) provides dynamic routing of up to 15 radios in a sub-
net. Spans of these 15-radio subnets are unlimited.

RIP is primarily for networks of moderate size and has these limitations:
• Limited to sub-networks whose longest path is 7 hops (15 radios).
• Uses fixed metrics to compare alternative routes; so it is unsuited to
situations where routes need to be chosen based on real-time
parameters such a measured delay, reliability, or load.

After setting the IP address of the first-accessed radio locally, and then
configuring it as an intermediate gateway, routing tables of radios net-
work exchange and incorporate route information as the radio network
changes.

The management station, or SNMP manager, sends get and set requests
to the SNMP agents–the radios. The radio answers get and set requests
from the manager as specified by the MIB.

Proteus AMT System User’s Manual Page C-3

Radio Management Interfaces

Each radio has two IP addresses: one addresses the Ethernet interface
(LAN), and the other the over-the-air interface (WAN). The over-the-air
interface transports radio support data, including get and set requests
from the SNMP manager, over the microwave link and to other ad-
dressed radios as routing tables define.

Installing the SNMP MIB

SNMP-compliant devices, called agents, store data about themselves in
Management Information Bases (MIBs) and return this data to the
SNMP requesters. A MIB is a database of objects that a network man-
agement system can monitor. SNMP uses a standardized MIB format
that allows any SNMP tool to monitor any device defined by a MIB.
Radio data that the Proteus AMT MIB stores include status, alarms, per-
formance statistics, radio configuration, and commands to the radio con-
troller.
The product CD included with your shipment has the radio MIB file.
Open the MIB file in a text editor to view details about the managed ob-
jects.
To install the MIB
1. Insert the CD into the drive on the management station computer.
2. When the CD menu opens select MIB.
3. Copy the file proamt1.mib to the MIB support directory of your
SNMP management application.
4. Add and compile the new MIB according to the steps outlined by your
SNMP application for adding a MIB file.

MIB Tables
Figure C-2 shows the major Proteus AMT SNMP objects.
Status–view link or radio status.

Alarms–configure and monitor

current and latched radio alarms.

Notify–control and monitor traps.

Performance–monitor radio
performance statistics.

Control–perform system tests and

monitor results.

Configuration–view and change

radio settings.

Utility–use the utilities to install,

and distribute radio operating
code.

Figure C-2. SNMP MIB Tables

Page C-4 Proteus AMT System User’s Manual

 Connections

MODEM

The modem interface is a 64-kbps serial interface to the radio IP inter-

face via point-to-point protocol (PPP). This allows remote management
using an external telephony modem. The IDU negotiates the telephone
signaling to establish the dial-up serial link.

Because dial-up access uses normal telephone lines, the quality of the
connection is not always good and your data rates may be limited.

Connect and power a Configure a radio for dial-up access by connecting a modem between the
modem for PPP before phone line and the radio modem port. Set the modem to Auto-Answer.
powering the IDU. The IDU does not have dial-out capability.
If a connected modem The default modem initialization string (AT&F0) is not required for PPP
resets, reboot the radio to connection. A different value or no value (0) will not affect operation.
re-establish PPP
communication. You must connect and power a modem to the PPP modem port and re-
start (or re-boot) the IDU for a PPP session to work. This is not a
plug-and-play connection. And, if the connected modem breaks the con-
nection

1. PPP can’t hold an active line, modem will be disconnected within 5

min. Problem fixed.

2. PPP IP has to be valid when the radio boots up, if it is set to 0.0.0.0
PPP won’t work. Problem Fixed.

3. When PPP configuration is changed, reboot is necessary. Problem

fixed.

Proteus AMT System User’s Manual Page C-5

Radio Management Interfaces

Element Manager
Element Manager® (EM) is the Proteus AMT radio and link graphical
supervisory system that simplifies configuring, monitoring, and testing
your radio or link. It provides radio management from a PC using the
Windows™ operating system.

You never have to open the radio to set jumpers or switches. Proteus
AMT management interfaces, whether graphic or text based, control all
radio configuration.

EM runs on a personal computer and interfaces radios locally, through

the standard serial interface, for simple on-site radio and link manage-
ment. EM also functions remotely through an IP-based network or
through dial-up modem. Figure C-3 shows the EM display of a protected
radio configuration with LinkView enabled. LinkView summarizes per-
formance graphically for both primary/secondary and near-end (top) and
far-end (bottom) radios.

Figure C-3. Element Manager Main Screen

Page C-6 Proteus AMT System User’s Manual

 Element Manager

Key Features

Element Manager (EM) gives radio installers, maintenance personnel,

and operators an efficient tool for complete management and control of
their Proteus AMT radios—on site or from remote locations. EM is fully
functional with real-time detailed data from any connection.

EM connects on-site to the radio computer connector, or from remote lo-

cations through the SNMP connection or the serial modem connection
for dial-up networking using point-to-point protocol (PPP).

A radio manager can use EM to configure a radio, test a radio or link,

and monitor performance and alarms.

System Requirements

This version of EM is designed for Windows 9x, NT, and 2000.

System requirements:
• 700-MHz processor (recommended)
• 128 MB of RAM
• 126 MB free disk space (full installation)
• 200 MB free disk space for optimal performance

Connect the PC to the serial COMPUTER connector on the IDU using a

standard, straight-through, RS-232 cable (not provided). Chapter 2, In-
stallation, describes the cable assembly and its wiring.

Basics

EM operates in a personal computer attached to the radio serial port or

remotely through an IP network or by PTSN with a modem to let opera-
tors control and monitor any radio in a network.

In an IP network the radio acts as multi-homed device. That is, the radio
has two IP interfaces—one 10/100-Mbps Ethernet interface and one
64-kbps IP-based overhead channel. The radio uses the overhead channel
to get radio-specific data across the link.

When connecting to radios through a LAN you must know the IP address
of the target radio.

EM queries the radio that interface for configuration, events, and alarms.
EM’s graphical interface provides a clear display of radio information,
alarms, status, configuration, and logs as Figure C-4 shows. Windowed
views let you configure the display to show only the data you need.

Proteus AMT System User’s Manual Page C-7

Radio Management Interfaces

Polling and Port Indicators

EM polls the connected radio or the network for status. The status bar at
the bottom of the main screen, Figure C-4, shows that the manager is
connected and the current status of the local radio and the network link.

Figure C-4. EM Menu and Status Bar

Alarms
Colors indicators on the status bar match IDU indicators and display ra-
dio health.
• Green indicates normal operation.
• Yellow is a minor alarm. The radio link may be running but not
optimal.
• Red signals a major alarm. The radio link is down or severely
degraded.
• Blinking Yellow indicates a test control, such as loopback, is active.
• Blue shows latched alarms – past alarm conditions that EM logs.
Event and Alarm Logging
The radio logs up to 200 items: 100 radio alarms and 100 events. Events
include configuration changes and condition changes. The radio stores
the 16 most recent alarm events in protected memory. Should a power
failure occur or the radio logic get reset, the last 16 alarms are available
for fault isolation. Event (change) logs are not saved through power fail-
ures or logic reset. EM displays events in the event (change) log and
alarms in the alarm log.
Identifying Radios
Once initialized, screens identify radios as NE or FE, by radio name, and
as primary or secondary on protected systems. You can view the radio in-
formation to identify radio name and location.

Security
EM has administrator and guest security levels. A guest can view, but not
change, radio parameters. An Administrator can make changes to the ra-
dio configuration. Your password logs you into both the local and remote
radios at the same security level.

Initially, guest access requires no password, and the administrator pass-

word is mni.

Page C-8 Proteus AMT System User’s Manual

 Element Manager

EM Menus
Drop down menus display selections for radio information displays, con-
trol dialog, and application help. Use EM Help (F1) for topics about op-
erating EM. Table C-A shows and details each of the EM menus.
Table C-A EM Menus and Descriptions
Menu Description
Connect opens when EM opens or when
selected. Set the connection as serial or
Ethernet.
Default passwords are:
Guest – no password
Admin – mni
Disconnect lets you close the connec-
tion.
The RESTORE Backup Configuration lets an adminis-
CONFIGURATION trator save the radio setup to a configura-
command opens a restore tion file (.cfg) that you can reload, or load
options box. The RESTORE to another, replacement, radio.
PASSWORDS option is
Restore Configuration lets an adminis-
typically not used. The
trator load a specific radio configuration
option restores
file.
passwords that you
manually edit in your You can load configuration files in Demo
backup file. If not mode for validation and troubleshooting.
manually entered, EM Alarms and Test Settings displays are
sets passwords as three identical for near- and far-end radios, and
asterisks (***). primary/secondary radios. Green LED
icons indicate normal conditions; red LED
icons show an active alarm or that a test
is active.
Select Alarms to open the Alarm Log.
Select Event Log from the menu.
RF Statistics displays RSL*, fade margin,
and AGC voltages of the near-end/
far-end, and primary/secondary receivers.
Min, Max, and average RSL displays in
RF Statistics.
G.826 Statistics shows link error perfor-
mance statistics.
Use History to configure and display his-
torical performance data.
You can save performance data to a
comma-separated values (.csv) file man-
ually or automatically, and import these
files into database or spreadsheet appli-
cations for analysis.

Proteus AMT System User’s Manual Page C-9

Radio Management Interfaces

Table C-A EM Menus and Descriptions (continued)

Menu Description
Radio Info provide radio performance
data. Inventory provides a summary of
serial numbers, firmware, and interface
type. In EM Ver. 1.C or later you can open
and save a detailed inventory table from
this summary screen. Link View displays
near- and far-end radio performance
using a radio-link graphic.
Use Test to configure radio tests.
ODU Mute attenuates the online transmit-
ter, Loopback sets aggregate (digital;
modem) and tributary loopbacks (digital;
line interface), and BERT sets aggregate
and tributary bit error rate tests.
Use IDU to set date and time on the
radios, radio name, location, contact infor-
mation, and set passwords.
In EM Ver. 1.C or later you can update the
near-end radio using the date and time
setting of your computer. The far-end
radio updates automatically when you
make this change.
ODU lets you set the transmit frequency
and output power. Also set ATPC and the
RSL set points. The ODU display includes
ODU Mute control and mute timer.
LIMs configure a LIM to a valid type other
than the installed type. Protection Mode
sets radio protection scheme and manual
switching.
LIMA/B enables tributaries. Equipped
lines are monitored for alarms. Data still
flows on unequipped lines. Allows manual
bandwidth configuration for 2 x 100Bt
radios.
Use Service Channels to configure
orderwire (OW) station number and mode.
Configure the data rate, parity, stop bits,
and polarity of auxiliary channels.

Page C-10 Proteus AMT System User’s Manual

 Element Manager

Table C-A EM Menus and Descriptions (continued)

Menu Description
Use IP Addresses to set IP addresses
and network masks of LAN (radio), WAN
(IPO-Air), and TFTP server for updating
radio operating code.
Set and add Trap Destination. Set and
add Static Routes. Also, set trap mode to
silent–off, verbose–all data, or terse–sum-
mary.Default gateway lets you define
where the radio sends IP packets des-
tined for other IP subnets (typically a
router in the same network or subnet).
Use Alarms to configure and map alarms
to NE or FE relays.
Use VLANs to configure the 100BaseT
device and Ethernet ports for a VLAN with
up to 32-stations. See Appendix E, ”Con-
figuring VLAN Using EM”
Utility lets administrators update and vali-
date radio operating code – firmware†.
Use Download Firmware to download
application, boot, or hardware code using
TFTP.
Hardware code includes the IDU Tx, IDU Rx,
and LIM operating code.
The IDU has two image locations to pro-
tect radio firmware. New application code
always loads to the secondary image.
Reboot new code from the secondary to
verify the new code.
Copy code to primary image loca-
tions–default boot location–after verifica-
tion.
Factory Defaults discards your radio
configuration for the factory settings. You
can save your configuration to a file (File
menu) before reset.
The Windows menu lists all open win-
dows. Select a window to make it active.

User Manual displays task assistance.

About lists software release information.

*. The RSL display only reads up to -90 dBm, and does not accurately measure
RSL for radios operating beyond -90 dBm.
†. Firmware files include '.hex' files for the application image, and '.mni' for IDU
and LIM programable logic.

Proteus AMT System User’s Manual Page C-11

Radio Management Interfaces

Craft Terminal and Command Line Interface

The craft terminal interface (CTI) provides a text-based system for ac-
cessing radio data and controls with a VT100-compatible terminal or em-
ulation program.

CTI includes a character-based menu system and a limited command set,

called the command line interface (CLI), to configure a radio, check
alarms, set controls, and monitor radio performance. Like EM, CTI ac-
cesses the radio alarm log. Instead of using a mouse, you enter command
or select menu options using your terminal or computer keyboard.

The craft-terminal interface (CTI) menu opens after you log in. Select
Exit to go to the command-line prompt. CLI has a few commands for di-
rect access, scripting, and factory troubleshooting as Table C-B lists.
Type HELP and press ENTER for a list of available command. Enter HELP
MORE for an on-screen description of available commands.

Table C-B CLI Commands

TestRadio1> help
IPOAstats cpu exit g826reset g826print
help mni_prot menu odu ping
probe routes systemlog ttstats termterm
trace valid whoami

Command Description and Usage

IPOAstats,
IPOAstats Show IPOAir Channel Statistics
{reset}
cpu Monitor CPU performance statistics
exit Ends the CLI session
g826reset Reset G.826 statistics
g826print Lists G.826 statistics
help Opens the list of commands
mni_prot Vital statistics for MNI Routing Protocol
menu Starts menu-driven interface
odu Shows odu uplink and downlink information
Send an ICMP echo request. Usage: ping host [-n count(max
ping
1000)]
probe Factory use only
routes In-depth look at the routing table
systemlog Display system log messages. Crl-C to abort.
ttstats Show Terminal-to-Terminal channel statistics
Run-time debugging features for terminal-to-terminal channel
termterm
testing
Set up a trace on modem lock/unlock. Usage: trace
trace
[lock/unlock/display] (numafter(< 1000))
valid Displays all valid configurations
whoami Lists user and radio name

Page C-12 Proteus AMT System User’s Manual

 Craft Terminal and Command Line Interface

Menus

The following sections discuss the craft terminal interface (CTI) menus.
The CTI has many of the advantages of a pull-down menu system, but al-
lows the menus to be used from a key pad, is integral to the IDU, and
does not need a mouse to navigate. Performance and BER data, however,
refresh in 5-second intervals and not in a continuous real-time mode as in
the Element Manager (EM).

Data on CTI screens does The boot code is the first software loaded during power-up or IDU ini-
not refresh in real time. tialization. You can see the progress of the boot test progress when con-
nected to the IDU in serial mode. Press CTRL+C within 2 seconds to
stop the boot and use a manual boot menu.

Main Menu
Menu layout includes the menu title, menu selections, and a status line.
Status line includes the radio name, alarm condition, and link condition
Normal condition shows no alarms and the link operational.

Access top-level tasks from the main menu. Type the number of the
menu selection you want and press Enter.
--------------------------------------------------
MENU TITLE Main Menu
1. Alarms
2. Performance
MENU SELECTION 3. Test
4. Configuration
5. Utilities
0. Exit
NewRadio-99, Major Alarm, Link Down >

RADIO NAME RADIO CONDITION LINK CONDITION

Alarm Menu
--------------------------------------------------
Alarm Menu
1. Current Alarms
2. Latched Alarms
3. Alarm Log
4. Change Log
5. Clear All Latched Alarms
0. Exit
NewRadio-99, Major Alarm, Link Down >

Proteus AMT System User’s Manual Page C-13

Radio Management Interfaces

Performance Menu
--------------------------------------------------
Performance
1. Near End Primary
2. Far End Primary
3. Near End Secondary (Local)
4. Far End Secondary
5. Reset All Stats
0. Exit
NewRadio-99, Major Alarm, Link Down >

Test Menu
--------------------------------------------------
Test Menu
1. Aggregate Local Loopback
2. Aggregate BER Test
3. Tributary Loopback
4. Tributary BER Test
5. ODU Mute
0. Exit
NewRadio-99, Major Alarm, Link Down >

Configuration Menu
--------------------------------------------------
Configuration Menu
1. IDU
2. ODU
3. LIMs / Modulation
4. Service Channels
5. Hot Standby
6. IP
7. Alarms
8. Reset to factory Settings
0. Exit
NewRadio-99, Major Alarm, Link Down >

Utility Menu
--------------------------------------------------
Utility Menu
1. Download Files
2. Copy Image (Secondary to Primary)
3. Copy Image (Primary to Secondary)
4. Synchronize Secondary Images
5. Reboot To Primary Image
6. Reboot To Secondary Image
0. Exit
SWLab-100, Minor Alarm, Link Down >

Page C-14 Proteus AMT System User’s Manual

 Craft Terminal and Command Line Interface

Security and Radio Identity

Once you establish communication between the terminal and radio, the
login command displays. Log in with your user name and password. The
defaults for administrator is admin, and for guest is guest. Initially, guest
access requires no password, and administrator access password is mni.
Use the configuration menu to enter new passwords.

The software opens by identifying the radio and its operating specifics.
**********************************************************
*
* Welcome to the Proteus AMT Radio
*
* (c) 2002-2006, Microwave Networks, Inc.
*
* Software Version: 1.N (2006-07-30)
*
* Capacity: 16 E1 + 8 E1
*
* Bandwidth: IF board not installed
*
* TX Frequency: 13120.000 MHz
*
* RX Frequency: 0.000 MHz
*
* LAN IP Address: 172.16.99.99 MASK 255.255.0.0
*
* WAN IP Address: 172.111.127.1 MASK 255.255.255.252
*
**********************************************************

The product CD includes software release notes that detail new features
and fixes.

Proteus AMT System User’s Manual Page C-15

Radio Management Interfaces

Alarms

--------------------------------------------------
Alarm Menu
1. Current Alarms
2. Latched Alarms
3. Alarm Log
4. Change Log
5. Clear All Latched Alarms
0. Exit
NewRadio-99, Major Alarm, Link Down > 1
Alarms include near- and far-end current and latched alarms, the alarm
and change logs, and a command to clear latched alarms. Menus also
support primary and secondary radios in protected radios.

Current alarms are those that are active. Alarms are normally self clear-
ing, that is, as soon as the condition clears the alarm stops. Latched
alarms are past alarm conditions, which each radio logs.
After selection of the radio you want to monitor, the alarms display as a
few lines of text under the radio selection menu as shown below.
--------------------------------------------------
Current Alarms
1. Near End Primary [Normal]
2. Far End Primary [Normal]
3. Near End Secondary (Local) [Major]
4. Far End Secondary [N/A]
0. Exit
NewRadio-99, Major Alarm, Link Down > 3
MAJOR: ON
IF Board PLL Lock
Modem Receive Fail
Modem Rx Frame Loss
Rx BER > 10^-3
MINOR: ON
Terminal-to-Terminal Channel Fail
Primary Power Supply Failure
Secondary Power Supply Failure
Rx BER > 10^-6
I2C Failure
ODU Telemetry Alarm
AIS Inserted on Tributaries
Custom BER Level
LIM A Tributary 1 RX LOS
Lim A Tributary 3 RX LOS
Lim A Tributary 6 RX LOS
Lim A Tributary 8 RX LOS
Other Radio Alarm

Up to 100 user change events get time- and date-stamped to the change
log, and 100 alarm events to the alarm log as shown below. The 16 most
recent alarms are saved to non-volatile memory in the event of power
failure or unintended reset. Alarm menus let you select a log to view.
Alarm and change log menus also let you reset logs.

Page C-16 Proteus AMT System User’s Manual

 Craft Terminal and Command Line Interface

--------------------------------------------------
Near End Secondary Alarm Log Menu
1. Show Alarm Log
2. Reset Alarm Log
0. Exit
NewRadio-99, Major Alarm, Link Down > 1
2004/02/24 11:29:55, NewRadio-99, (set), ODU Telemetry Alarm, I: 33, O: 0
2004/02/24 11:29:55, NewRadio-99, (set), IF Board PLL Lock, I: 33, O: 0
2004/02/24 11:29:54, NewRadio-99, (set), Lim A Tributary 8 RX LOS, I: 33, O: 0
2004/02/24 11:29:54, NewRadio-99, (set), Lim A Tributary 6 RX LOS, I: 33, O: 0
2004/02/24 11:29:54, NewRadio-99, (set), Lim A Tributary 3 RX LOS, I: 33, O: 0
2004/02/24 11:29:54, NewRadio-99, (set), LIM A Tributary 1 RX LOS, I: 33, O: 0
2004/02/24 11:29:54, NewRadio-99, (set), AIS Inserted on Tributaries
2004/02/24 11:29:54, NewRadio-99, (set), Custom BER Level, I: 33, O: 0
2004/02/24 11:29:54, NewRadio-99, (set), Rx BER > 10^-6, I: 33, O: 0
2004/02/24 11:29:54, NewRadio-99, (set), Rx BER > 10^-3, I: 33, O: 0
Press any key to continue (CTRL-C to abort)...
2004/02/24 11:29:54, NewRadio-99, (set), Relay 1 , I: 33, O: 0
2004/02/24 11:29:54, NewRadio-99, (set), Hot Standby High Priority Alarm
2004/02/24 11:29:54, NewRadio-99, (set), Modem Receive Fail, I: 33, O: 0
2004/02/24 11:29:54, NewRadio-99, (clr), Relay 1 , I: 33, O: 0
2004/02/24 11:29:54, NewRadio-99, (clr), Hot Standby High Priority Alarm
2004/02/24 11:29:54, NewRadio-99, (set), Relay 1 , I: 33, O: 0
2004/02/24 11:29:54, NewRadio-99, (set), Hot Standby High Priority Alarm
2004/02/24 11:29:54, NewRadio-99, (set), Major Alarm - Latched, I: 33, O: 0
2004/02/24 11:29:54, NewRadio-99, (set), Major Alarm Summary, I: 33, O: 0
2004/02/24 11:29:54, NewRadio-99, (set), Modem Rx Frame Loss, I: 33, O: 0
Press any key to continue (CTRL-C to abort)...
2004/02/24 11:29:54, NewRadio-99, (set), Relay 2 , I: 33, O: 0
2004/02/24 11:29:54, NewRadio-99, (set), Hot Standby Low Priority Alarm
2004/02/24 11:29:54, NewRadio-99, (set), Secondary Power Supply Failure
2004/02/24 11:29:54, NewRadio-99, (clr), Relay 2 , I: 33, O: 0
2004/02/24 11:29:54, NewRadio-99, (clr), Hot Standby Low Priority Alarm
2004/02/24 11:29:54, NewRadio-99, (set), Relay 4 , I: 33, O: 0
2004/02/24 11:29:54, NewRadio-99, (set), Relay 2 , I: 33, O: 0
2004/02/24 11:29:54, NewRadio-99, (set), Hot Standby Low Priority Alarm
2004/02/24 11:29:54, NewRadio-99, (set), Minor Alarm - Latched, I: 33, O: 0
2004/02/24 11:29:54, NewRadio-99, (set), Minor Alarm Summary, I: 33, O: 0
End

--------------------------------------------------
Near End Secondary Change Log Menu
1. Show Change Log
2. Reset Change Log
0. Exit
NewRadio-99, Major Alarm, Link Down > 1
2004/02/24 14:46:47, 29, Admin, 172.16.99.22, Command Processor Command
2004/02/24 14:44:52, 3, Admin, 172.16.99.22, Command Processor Command
2004/02/24 14:44:24, 3, Admin, 172.16.99.22, Command Processor Command
End

Proteus AMT System User’s Manual Page C-17

Radio Management Interfaces

Performance

-------------------------------------------------
Performance
1. Near End Primary
2. Far End Primary
3. Near End Secondary (Local)
4. Far End Secondary
5. Reset All Stats
0. Exit
NewRadio-99, Major Alarm, Link Down > 1
--------------------------------------------------
Near End Primary Performance Menu
1. Last Second Statistics
2. Last Minute Statistics
3. Last Hour Statistics
4. Last Day Statistics
5. Last Week Statistics
6. All Statistics
7. History [N/A]
8. Reset Stats
0. Exit
NewRadio-99, Major Alarm, Link Down >

G.826 performance statistics for payload and the link use error detection
codes inherent to the radio. Near- and far-end statistics for last second to
last week consider the following events:

Errored Second (ES) A one second period with one or more errored
blocks or at least one defect
Severely Errored Second (SES) A one-second period, which contains ≥
than 30% errored blocks or at least one defect.
SES is a subset of ES.
Bit Error Rate (BER) The percentage of bits that have errors relative
to the total number of bits received in a
transmission, usually expressed as ten to a
negative power.
Near End Primary Performance (Last Second)
Near End Primary
Elapsed Seconds: N/A
Available Seconds: N/A
Errored Seconds: N/A
Severely Errored Seconds: N/A
Bit Error Rate: N/A
(CTRL-C to exit)

Performance statistics refresh every five seconds. You can also enable
performance history data collection and select an interval is between 1
second and 500 days as the following text describes.

Page C-18 Proteus AMT System User’s Manual

 Craft Terminal and Command Line Interface

On the performance statistics menus the All Statistics selection lists all
G.826 statistics and the significant RF performance measurements,
which include Min, Max, and Average RSL.
Near End Secondary Performance (Custom)
Near End Secondary
Elapsed Seconds: 172194
Available Seconds: 0
Unavailable Seconds: 172194
Errored Seconds: 0
Severely Errored Seconds: 0
Errored Seconds Ratio: 0.00e+00
Sev Errored Seconds Ratio: 0.00e+00
Total Codewords: 0
Bit Error Rate: 0.00e+00
Back Bit Error Rate: 0.00e+00
Current RSL: 0
Fade Margin: 70
Transmit Power: 0
(CTRL-C to exit)

The History selection lets you configure and collect performance data for
the selected radio at an interval between 1 second and 500 days. When
you enable performance history you can display or upload a file of up to
27 performance variables. Uploaded files go your TFTP server (not pro-
vided) at the interval that you set, or you can request a manual upload
anytime.

Enter the IP address of the TFTP server in the Utilities menu, Download
selection. The file saves to the directory you configure in your TFTP
server application.

--------------------------------------------------
Near End Secondary Performance History Menu
1. Data Collection Enable [OFF]
2. Data Collection Interval [15 Seconds]
3. Collected Variables [5 selected]
4. Upload Filename [phist.csv]
5. Upload Interval [0 Seconds]
6. Storage Info
7. Show History
8. Request Manual Upload
9. Clear History
0. Exit
NewRadio-99, Major Alarm, Link Down >

Proteus AMT System User’s Manual Page C-19

Radio Management Interfaces

Test

Use Test to install, commission, and maintain the radio. You can mute
the online transmitter, set local aggregate or tributary loopback, or run a
bit-error rate test on local (near end) or remote (far end) radios.
-------------------------------------------------
Test Menu
1. Aggregate Local Loopback
2. Aggregate BER Test
3. Tributary Loopback
4. Tributary BER Test
5. ODU Mute
0. Exit
NewRadio-99, Major Alarm, Link Down >

Aggregate local loopback is a digital loopback between the modem out-

put and the line interface (Figure C-5).
-------------------------------------------------
Aggregate Local Loopback
1. Near End Primary [N/A]
2. Far End Primary [N/A]
3. Near End Secondary (Local) [OFF]
4. Far End Secondary [N/A]
0. Exit
NewRadio-99, Major Alarm, Link Down > 1
--------------------------------------------------
Near End Primary Aggregate Loopback Menu
1. Aggregate Local Loopback [N/A]
2. Aggregate Loopback Time [N/A]
0. Exit
NewRadio-99, Major Alarm, Link Down > 2

Enter new value for Agg Loop Time (0 for infinity):

Tributary loopback occurs at the line interface (Figure C-5) for Ethernet
and PDH applications. Because IP is a routing protocol, remote Ethernet
loopback only supports broadcast packets.
-------------------------------------------------
Tributary Loopback
1. Near End Primary
2. Far End Primary
3. Near End Secondary (Local)
4. Far End Secondary
0. Exit
NewRadio-99, Major Alarm, Link Down > 1
--------------------------------------------------
Near End Primary Tributary Loopback Menu
1. Tributary Local Loopback
2. Tributary Remote Loopback
0. Exit
NewRadio-99, Major Alarm, Link Down >

Page C-20 Proteus AMT System User’s Manual

 Craft Terminal and Command Line Interface

NE/FE Local
Local Aggregate
Tributary
Loopback
Loopback

IDU
LIM-A ODU

Processing
Multiplex Coding
and and RF

IF
Frame Modem Processing
LIM-B

NE/FE Remote
Tributary
Loopback

Figure C-5. Radio Loopbacks

BER test mode lets you configure the test and view test results. BER is
expressed as 10 to the negative power. For example, the BER result 3e-6
would indicate that three bits were in error out of 1,000,000 transmitted.
Expressions for bits received and bits errored are hexidecimal format.
--------------------------------------------------
Tributary BER Test
1. Near End Primary
2. Far End Primary
3. Near End Secondary (Local)
4. Far End Secondary
0. Exit
NewRadio-99, Major Alarm, Link Down > 1
--------------------------------------------------
Near End Primary Tributary BER Test
1. Tributary BER Test Mode
2. Tributary BER Test Results
3. Clear Tributary Results
0. Exit
NewRadio-99, Major Alarm, Link Down > 1
--------------------------------------------------
Near End Primary Tributary BER Test Mode
1. LIM A, Trib 1 [OFF]
2. LIM A, Trib 2 [OFF]
3. LIM A, Trib 3 [OFF]
4. LIM A, Trib 4 [OFF]
5. LIM A, Trib 5 [OFF]
6. LIM A, Trib 6 [OFF]
7. LIM A, Trib 7 [OFF]
8. LIM A, Trib 8 [OFF]
9. LIM A, Trib 9 [OFF]
10. LIM A, Trib 10 [OFF]
11. LIM A, Trib 11 [OFF]
12. LIM A, Trib 12 [OFF]
13. LIM A, Trib 13 [OFF]
14. LIM A, Trib 14 [OFF]
15. LIM A, Trib 15 [OFF]
16. LIM A, Trib 16 [OFF]
17. LIM B, Trib 1 [OFF]
0. Exit
NewRadio-99, Major Alarm, Link Down >

The displays with the BER test results update every five seconds.

Proteus AMT System User’s Manual Page C-21

Radio Management Interfaces

--------------------------------------------------
Aggregate BER Test
1. Near End Primary [OFF]
2. Far End Primary [OFF]
3. Near End Secondary (Local) [OFF]
4. Far End Secondary [N/A]
5. Clear All Agg BER Results
0. Exit
NewRadio-99, Major Alarm, Link Down > 1
--------------------------------------------------
Near End Primary BER Test Mode Menu
1. Aggregate BER Test Mode [OFF]
2. Aggregate BER Test Results
3. Clear Aggregate BER Results
0. Exit
NewRadio-99, Major Alarm, Link Down > 1

Near End Primary Aggregate BER Results

Near End Primary Far End
Bits Received: 0 0
Bits Errored: 0 0
Agg BER: 0.00e+00 0.00e+00
Elapsed Time: 000 d 00:00:00 000 d 00:00:00
(CTRL-C to exit)

Page C-22 Proteus AMT System User’s Manual

 Craft Terminal and Command Line Interface

Configuration

You must have administrative access to change any setting in Configura-

tion.
--------------------------------------------------
Configuration Menu
1. IDU
2. ODU
3. LIMs / Modulation
4. Service Channels
5. Hot Standby
6. IP
7. Alarms
8. Reset to factory Settings
0. Exit
NewRadio-99, Major Alarm, Link Down >

IDU configuration lets you set the radio name, view inventory, and set
user passwords, system clocks, and the data rate of the front-panel com-
puter port.
--------------------------------------------------
Near End Primary IDU
1. Near End Primary [NewRadio-100]
2. Far End Primary [NewRadio-101]
3. Near End Secondary (Local) [NewRadio-99]
4. Far End Secondary [N/A]
0. Exit
NewRadio-99, Major Alarm, Link Down > 1
--------------------------------------------------
Near End Primary IDU Configuration Menu
1. Radio Name [NewRadio-100]
2. Inventory
3. Admin Password
4. Guest Password
5. Set Clock [2004-3-11,15:40:23]
0. Exit
NewRadio-99, Major Alarm, Link Down >

NOTE: You must have administrative access to change configuration

settings, and know the current passwords to change
administrative or guest passwords.

Radio Name provides a line for you to enter a new value. Inventory is
read-only data including serial numbers, firmware versions, interface
type, and any firmware checksum.
Near End Primary
Image Booted: Secondary
Odu Version:
Odu Serial #: 3
Odu Firmware Version: 53
Motherboard Part Number: 8000567-00
Motherboard Version:
Motherboard Serial #: HI1202020247

Proteus AMT System User’s Manual Page C-23

Radio Management Interfaces

Motherboard Firmware Part Number: 4600032-01

Motherboard Firmware Version: 1.A (2004/03/09)
IF Board Part Number: 8000568-03
IF Board Serial #: HI120402041
Idu Power Supply Part Number:
Idu Power Supply Serial #:
LIM A Part Number: 8000572-00
LIM A Version: ???
LIM A Serial #: HI112202035
LIM B Part Number: 8000574-00
LIM B Version: ???
LIM B Serial #: HI011303031
Image 1 Checksum: 19703
Image 2 Checksum: 42918
Modem TX Firmware Part Number: 4600033-00
Modem TX Firmware Version: D (2003/06/05)
Modem TX Firmware Checksum: 16781
Modem RX Firmware Part Number: 4600033-01
Modem RX Firmware Version: E (2003/08/13)
Modem RX Firmware Checksum: 23556
E1/DS1 LIM Firmware Part Number: 4600033-02
E1/DS1 LIM Firmware Version: F (2003/10/28)
E1/DS1 LIM Firmware Checksum: 24697
E3/DS3 LIM Firmware Part Number: 4600033-04
E3/DS3 LIM Firmware Version: F (2003/10/28)
E3/DS3 LIM Firmware Checksum: 5169
Ethernet LIM Firmware Part Number: 460033-05
Ethernet LIM Firmware Version: B (2003/07/02)
Ethernet LIM Firmware Checksum: 56417
Press any key to continue...

ODU configuration lets you view the RF unit information and current
settings. Admin access lets you adjust the transmit frequency and output
power, and set APC and RSL trip points.
--------------------------------------------------
ODU
1. Near End Primary [13120.000 MHz]
2. Far End Primary [12854.000 MHz]
3. Near End Secondary (Local) [13120.000 MHz]
4. Far End Secondary [N/A]
0. Exit
NewRadio-99, Major Alarm, Link Down > 1
--------------------------------------------------
Near End Primary ODU Configuration Menu
1. ODU Info
2. TX Frequency [13120.000 MHz]
3. RX Frequency [12854.000 MHz]
4. TX Power [15 dBm (min:-11, max:19)]
5. APC Mode [OFF]
6. RSL Setpoint [-60 dBm]
7. ODU Mute State [Online]
0. Exit
NewRadio-99, Major Alarm, Link Down >

Page C-24 Proteus AMT System User’s Manual

 Craft Terminal and Command Line Interface

ODU information includes the fixed sub-band and transmit/receive spac-

ing (low/high band).
Serial Number: 3
Firmware Version: 53
Frequency Band: 13 GHz
Sub-band: B
Tx Hi/Lo: Hi
Min TX Frequency: 13087 Mhz
Max TX Frequency: 13122 Mhz
Min RX Frequency: 12821 Mhz
Max RX Frequency: 12856 Mhz
T/R Spacing: 266 Mhz

Set TX Power (max power in APC): 19

Enable APC to let the radio adjust far-end transmit power in ±1 dB steps
to keep RSL within +3 dB of the RSL set point. APC works with your
RSL set point and TX Power settings.
Enter new value for APC:
1. On
2. Off
Select:

Enter new value for RSL Setpoint (in -dBm):

To configure LIMs, enable activates channels. Disable channels for ser-

vice or future use. Set the radio to monitor signals on channels 'IN USE'
for loss of signal. You can also assign LIM E1 and DS1 tributaries line
encoding. E-rate lines–AMI or HDB3, and DS-rate lines are B8ZS.
LIMs / Modulation
1. Near End Primary [16 E1/100 BaseT]
2. Far End Primary [16 E1/100 BaseT]
3. Near End Secondary (Local) [16 E1/100 BaseT]
4. Far End Secondary [N/A]
5. Configure Modem
0. Exit
NewRadio-99, Major Alarm, Link Down > 1
--------------------------------------------------
Near End Primary Lim Configuration Menu
1. Current State [VALID]
2. Proposed LIM A Type [16 E1]
3. Proposed LIM B Type [100 BaseT]
4. Equipped Tributaries
5. LIM A E1/DS1 Line Encoding [HDB3]
0. Exit
NewRadio-99, Major Alarm, Link Down > 1
--------------------------------------------------
Proposed Configuration: VALID
Channel Bandwidth: 28 MHz
Current Modulation: Unknown
Lim A Installed: 16 E1
Lim B Installed: 100 BaseT
Lim A Configured: 16 E1
Lim B Configured: 100 BaseT
Lim A Capacity(Mbs): 34
Lim B Capacity(Mbs): 73

Proteus AMT System User’s Manual Page C-25

Radio Management Interfaces

--------------------------------------------------
Configuration Menu
1. IDU
2. ODU
3. LIMs / Modulation
4. Service Channels
5. Hot Standby
6. IP
7. Reset to factory Settings
0. Exit
NewRadio, Minor Alarm, Link Down > 4
Hot Standby lets you set the radio protection mode.
--------------------------------------------------
Protection Configuration Menu
1. Near End Protection Mode [Non-Protected]
2. Far End Protection Mode [Non-Protected]
3. Online Request [OFF]
4. Near End Status
0. Exit
NewRadio, No Alarms, Link Up >

IP Configuration lets you set the radio IP address, IP mask, and routing.
You can enter static routing information of up to 50 routes or use RIP
(routing information protocol). RIP automates the population of routing
tables on your network.
--------------------------------------------------
IP Configuration Menu
1. LAN Interface [172.16.99.96]
2. WAN Interface [0.0.0.0]
3. Routing Table
0. Exit
, No Alarms, Link Up > 1

--------------------------------------------------
LAN Interface Configuration
1. LAN IP Address [172.16.99.96]
2. LAN IP Mask [255.255.0.0]
3. LAN Routing Config
0. Exit
, No Alarms, Link Up > 1
Please enter new value for LAN Address (in dotted decimal):

RIP is classified as a distance vector protocol, which means it uses dis-

tance, as measured in routing hops, to determine a packet's optimal path.
Routers send out advertisements to one another every 30 seconds. Each
router that receives a given advertisement increases the hop count by
one. If advertisements are received from multiple routers, the path to the
router with the lowest hop count is the path chosen. Should the preferred
route be unavailable, the route with the higher hop count is used as a
backup.

Page C-26 Proteus AMT System User’s Manual

 Craft Terminal and Command Line Interface

--------------------------------------------------
LAN Port Routing Settings
1. Routing Protocol [None]
2. Enable Custom Advertisement [OFF]
3. Custom Advertisement Address [0.0.0.0]
4. Custom Advertisement Mask [0.0.0.0]
0. Exit
, No Alarms, Link Up > 1
Enter new value for LAN Routing Protocol:
1. Disabled
2. RIP
Select:

Custom router advertisement allows you to enter the IP address and IP

mask of a device or gateway on your network that may be problematic
for RIP discovery. After custom advertisement, population of routing ta-
bles with the device or gateway address continues automatically.
--------------------------------------------------
LAN Port Routing Settings
1. Routing Protocol [None]
2. Enable Custom Advertisement [OFF]
3. Custom Advertisement Address [0.0.0.0]
4. Custom Advertisement Mask [0.0.0.0]
0. Exit
, No Alarms, Link Up > 2
Enter new value for LAN Custom Advertisement:
1. On
2. Off
Select:

The Service Channel Menu lets administrators set the auxiliary channel
data rate and the orderwire mode and station code.
--------------------------------------------------
Service Channels
1. Near End (Local) [9600/19200/VOICE-123]
2. Far End [9600/19200/VOICE-000]
0. Exit
SWLab-100, No Alarms, Link Up > 1
--------------------------------------------------
Near End Service Channel Menu
1. Auxiliary Channel 1
2. Auxiliary Channel 2
3. Orderwire Channel
0. Exit
SWLab-100, No Alarms, Link Up > 1
--------------------------------------------------
Near End Port 1 Auxiliary Channel 1
1. Baud Rate [9600]
2. Parity [ODD]
3. Polarity [INVERT BOTH]
4. Stop Bits [2]
0. Exit
NewRadio, No Alarms, Link Up > 1
Enter new value for Aux Chnl Rate (9600 or 19200):

Proteus AMT System User’s Manual Page C-27

Radio Management Interfaces

--------------------------------------------------
Near End Orderwire Menu
1. Orderwire Mode [VOICE]
2. Orderwire Station Code [123]
0. Exit
NewRadio,, No Alarms, Link Up >
The orderwire voice mode is for EOW with optional DTMF handset. In
data mode, the orderwire converts data at OW1 to an 'over-the-link'
64-kbps clear channel. OW2 and the handset interface become inactive
in data mode.
Utility

Since Proteus AMT is completely software configured the Utility menu

lets you update the radio operating code.
--------------------------------------------------
Utility Menu
1. Download Files
2. Copy Image (Secondary to Primary)
3. Copy Image (Primary to Secondary)
4. Synchronize Secondary Images
5. Reboot To Primary Image
6. Reboot To Secondary Image
0. Exit
NewRadio, No Alarms, Link Up >

Download code (firmware1) for bootloader (startup), application, IDU

TX, IDU RX, E1/DS1 LIM, E3/DS3 LIM, and Ethernet LIM code.
Download to the secondary image location or synchronize secondary im-
ages to copy a secondary image from another radio. Boot from the sec-
ondary image to check that the code works, before copying the code to
the primary, boot, location.
-----------------------------------------------
Synchronize Secondary Images
1. Source Radio [N/A]
0. Exit
NewRadio,, No Alarms, Link Up > 1
--------------------------------------------------
Synchronize Secondary Images Source Radio
1. Near End (Local)
2. Far End
0. Exit
NewRadio, No Alarms, Link Up > 2
--------------------------------------------------
Far End Synchronize Secondary Images
1. Source Radio [Far End]
2. Synchronize Images
0. Exit
NewRadio, No Alarms, Link Up >

1 Firmware files include '.hex' files for application images, and '.mni' for IDU and
LIM programable logic.

Page C-28 Proteus AMT System User’s Manual

 Craft Terminal and Command Line Interface

Get a trial version of an IDU and LIM code downloads to programmable logic in the IDU. The
TFTP server at source port is the Ethernet port from a TFTP server. Use any networked
http://www.solarwinds.net PC running TFTP server software to download firmware
--------------------------------------------------
Download Menu
1. Begin Download
2. Flash Destination [Bootloader Code]
3. Source Port [Ethernet]
4. TFTP File Name [plusdemo.hex]
5. TFTP Server Address [172.16.206.91]
0. Exit
NewRadio, Minor Alarm, Link Up > 0

Copy image files (code) to the primary (default boot) location after con-
firming operation. Maintain the secondary image as a backup.
--------------------------------------------------
Utility Menu
1. Download Files
2. Copy Image (Secondary to Primary)
3. Copy Image (Primary to Secondary)
4. Synchronize Secondary Images
5. Reboot To Primary Image
6. Reboot To Secondary Image
0. Exit
NewRadio, No Alarms, Link Up > 5

Reboot affects traffic. The radio loads the operating code and must again
synchronize with the facing site.
--------------------------------------------------
Utility Menu
1. Download Files
2. Copy Image (Secondary to Primary)
3. Copy Image (Primary to Secondary)
4. Synchronize Secondary Images
5. Reboot To Primary Image
6. Reboot To Secondary Image
0. Exit
SWLab-100, No Alarms, Link Up > 5
--------------------------------------------------
Reboot To Primary Image
1. Near End (Local)
2. Far End
3. All Radios
0. Exit
NewRadio, No Alarms, Link Up > 3
Are you sure you wish to reboot all radios (y/n)? y
Rebooting Online Far End Radio ...
Rebooting myself, good bye ...

Proteus AMT System User’s Manual Page C-29

Radio Management Interfaces

Page C-30 Proteus AMT System User’s Manual

 Appendix D
WAN/IPO-Air Channel Routing

Overview
Use this section to set The wide area network (WAN) interface, or IPO-Air (Internet Protocol
up and implement your over the air), channel is a dedicated channel in the microwave communi-
radio network. cation path that transmits data at 64 kbps minimum. The channel passes
Internet Protocol (IP) packets from one radio to another. Each radio has
the ability to receive packets on its Ethernet LAN interface and forward
them to the IPOAir, or WAN, interface. Any radio can also receive pack-
ets from the IPOAir interface and forward them to the Ethernet interface.
The network architecture of Proteus AMT radios allows IP access to any
radio on the network. This section provides the information you need to
administer your radio network.
LAN Port

The local area network (LAN) port is simply the 10/100BaseT Ethernet
interface accessed at the RJ-45 connector on the radio front panel. It is
called LAN because it immediately communicates with any Ethernet de-
vice on the same subnet, which typically consists of devices in the same
room or building.
WAN Port
The wide area network (WAN) port is tied directly to the IPOAir chan-
nel. The WAN port has no physical interface as it is integral to the IDU.
The channel allows a radio to communicate with its counterpart radio at
the far side of a microwave link (far-end radio). It is called WAN because
it communicates with a device several miles away, and therefore covers a
much wider area than the LAN port.
WAN Port Communication
To communicate via IP, Both radios in a link must have IP addresses on the same subnet to com-
radios in a link must municate. The address and subnet mask determine the subnet. Subnet
have IP addresses on mask is a description of values within an IP address unique to the subnet.
the same subnet. For example, a device has the IP address 172.25.10.2 and subnet mask
255.255.0.0. The subnet mask indicates that the first two numbers of the
IP address defines the subnet – 172.25.0.0. Devices with the IP address

Proteus AMT System User’s Manual Page D-1

WAN/IPO-Air Channel Routing

that start with 172.25 are part of the 172.25 subnet, and routing should
not be required to communicate between these devices.
The IP address and subnet mask may be represented by a single 32-bit
number instead of 4 decimal numbers ranging from 0 to 255. In a subnet
mask, the first, or most significant, bit of the mask must be set to binary 1
while any bit after the first 0 must also be 0. Therefore, 255.255.255.252,
binary 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111100, is a valid mask; but
255.255.255.172, binary 11111111 11111111 10101100, is not.
Because of this restriction on subnet masks, they are sometimes referred
to by the number of leading 1’s in the mask. For example, a subnet mask
of 255.255.0.0 would be called a 16-bit subnet mask, because the first 16
bits are 1’s. A common notation to describe the network in the preceding
paragraph is 172.25.0.0/16, which reports the number of bits in the sub-
net mask.
Since there are only two radios in a link (four in protected), WAN sub-
nets can be small. The following CTI Configuration screens show a
WAN interface with an address of 172.17.1.1 and a mask of
255.255.255.252. This means that the WAN port is on subnet
172.17.1.0/30 and may only communicate with other ports on the same
subnet.
Configuration Menu
1. IDU
2. ODU
3. LIMs / Modulation
4. Service Channels
5. Hot Standby
6. IP
7. Alarms
8. Reset to factory Settings
0. Exit
NewRadio-99, Major Alarm, Link Down > 6
--------------------------------------------------
IP
1. Near End Primary [172.16.200.100]
2. Far End Primary [172.16.200.101]
3. Near End Secondary (Local) [172.16.99.99]
4. Far End Secondary [N/A]
0. Exit
NewRadio-99, Major Alarm, Link Down > 1
--------------------------------------------------
Near End Primary IP Configuration Menu
1. LAN Interface [172.16.200.100]
2. WAN Interface [172.111.1.1]
3. PPP Interface [172.9.111.121]
0. Exit
NewRadio-99, Major Alarm, Link Down > 2
--------------------------------------------------
Near End Primary WAN Interface Configuration
1. WAN IP Address [172.111.1.1]
2. WAN IP Mask [255.255.255.252]
3. WAN Routing Config [None]
0. Exit
NewRadio-99, Major Alarm, Link Down >

Page D-2 Proteus AMT System User’s Manual

 IP Data Routing

If the radio does not connect to the WAN interface on the other side of
the link, the IP-OVER-AIR CHANNEL FAIL alarm activates. This could hap-
pen if the link fails or if WAN interface addresses are not on the same
subnet.

IP Data Routing
The routing engine that makes the decisions on whether or not to forward
a packet from one interface to another is on an IDU processor between
the two ports. The processor receives all packets, examines them, and de-
cides if the packet is intended for that radio or needs to be forwarded.
Configure the routing table, below, properly for routing to work.
The IPOAir channel can carry any type of IP data, including, but not lim-
ited to, Internet Control Messaging Protocol (ICMP, used for PING pro-
gram), Telnet, Trivial File Transfer Protocol (TFTP), or Simple Network
Management Protocol (SNMP). The IPOAir channel does not support
non-IP data such as AppleTalk and NetBios.
The Routing Table
The routing table tells the routing engine what to forward, and where to
forward it. The following screen shows a typical routing table for a Pro-
teus AMT radio.
IP Configuration Menu
1. LAN Interface [172.16.20.201]
2. WAN Interface [172.40.200.201]
3. PPP Interface [172.25.200.225]
4. Routing Table
0. Exit
TopRadio, No Alarms, Link Up >
ID Destination Mask Next Hop Type Int
1 0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0 172.16.40.1 IND 2
2 127.0.0.0 255.0.0.0 127.0.0.1 DIR 1
3 172.16.0.0 255.255.0.0 172.16.99.100 DIR 2
4 172.16.200.100 255.255.255.255 127.0.0.1 IND 1
5 172.17.1.0 255.255.255.252 172.17.1.1 DIR 3
6 172.17.1.1 255.255.255.255 127.0.0.1 IND 1
7 172.18.0.0 255.255.0.0 172.17.1.2 IND 3
--------------------------------------------------
Route Table
1. Add Route
2. Delete Route
3. Change Default Route [172.16.40.1]
0. Exit
TopRadio, No Alarms, Link Up >

The table is broken into six columns: ID, Destination, Mask, Next Hop,
Type, and Interface. The ID identifies a route, making it easier to delete a
route using the menu system. The destination is the address where a
packet ultimately ends. The mask, along with the destination, defines the
subnet ID of where the packet is going. For example, in ID7 above, the
destination address is 172.18.0.0 and the subnet mask is 255.255.0.0, so

Proteus AMT System User’s Manual Page D-3

WAN/IPO-Air Channel Routing

this route refers to subnet 172.18.0.0/16. The next hop address tells the
radio where to send the packet next to get it on its way. In ID7, that ad-
dress is 172.17.1.2. So any time this radio receives a packet bound for
any address that starts with 172.18, it knows to forward it on to the de-
vice at address 172.17.1.2. The type, direct (DIR) or indirect (IND) tells
us whether the radio will forward the packet directly to the final destina-
tion (DIR) or to another router (IND). The interface field tells us which
interface the radio will route the packet on. INT1 is the loopback inter-
face, INT2 is the LAN interface, and INT3 is the WAN interface. ID7 is
routing packets across the WAN interface.

Looking at the rest of the routing table, ID6 has a subnet mask with no
0’s in it; therefore it refers to the specific address 172.17.1.1. The next
hop is the loopback port of 127.0.0.1, so this route shows that packets
destined for 172.17.1.1 go to this radio. Note that 172.17.1.1 is the radio
WAN interface. There is a similar route for each active interface in the
radio, except for the loopback interface. ID4 refers to the LAN interface
at 172.16.200.100.

ID5 refers to a network at 172.17.1.0/30, and tells the radio to forward

these packets directly out the WAN port. This network is the same net-
work that the WAN port is on. This route is added automatically when
the WAN port is active, and there is a similar route for all active inter-
faces. ID3 refers to the LAN subnet, and ID2 refers to the loopback sub-
net.

ID1 is a special route called a default route. Note that it is really referring
to a network with an all 0’s mask, which would cover all conceivable ad-
dresses. This route tells the radio that when it has no idea of what to do
with a packet based upon the other routes, send the packet to address
172.16.40.1. The default route address is presumably a sophisticated
router with a much larger routing table.

Static Routes
Add static routes to Static routes are routes that you enter into a routing table. Static routes
PCs to monitor radios stay in the routing table across power-ups until the you delete them. The
on a different subnet. exception is when an interface goes down and all the routes to that inter-
See the following page. face temporarily become inactive. This can occur when the WAN inter-
face fails down as a result of microwave link or radio failure. When the
interface comes up, the routes become active.

For example, consider the example network in Figure D-1. If the net-
work does not use dynamic routing such as RIP or MNI Protection rout-
ing (page D-6 and page D-10), then you add static routes to each device
to get them to communicate.

Page D-4 Proteus AMT System User’s Manual

 IP Data Routing

Figure D-1. Example Network

The following Example: Using Static Route to Connect a PC to a Radio

paragraphs discuss
connecting a PC to a BotRadio, which knows how to get to the devices that it is directly at-
radio on a different tached to, has routes to the 172.18.0.0/16 and 172.17.1.0/30 networks.
subnet. However, it does not know how to get to the 172.16.0.0/16 network, so it
cannot communicate with the PC on that network. So, add a static route
to the 172.16.0.0/16 network; a route with an IP address 172.16.0.0, a
subnet mask 255.255.0.0, and a next-hop destination 172.17.1.1 (the
WAN port on the other radio). Note that the next-hop destination has to
be an address that the radio already knows how to reach.
Now BotRadio knows how to communicate with the PC, but the PC does
not know how to communicate with BotRadio. The PC knows nothing
about the IPOAir network or the 172.18.0.0/16 Ethernet network, so it
needs two routes. The first is a route to 172.17.1.0 address with a
255.255.255.252 mask and a next-hop address of 172.16.200.100 (To-
pRadio). This gets the PC access to the IPOAir network. The second
route is to 172.18.0.0 with a mask of 255.255.0.0 and a next-hop address
of 172.16.200.100. This gets the PC access to the 172.18.0.0/16 Ethernet
network.
At the PC, use the PING command to attempt to send packets to BotRa-
dio. PING is a simple program that sends Internet Control Messaging Pro-
tocol (ICMP) packets from one device to another, and expects the packet
to be "echoed" back. When you ping 172.17.1.2 (the WAN interface on
BotRadio), you receive replies, but do not receive replies when you ping
172.18.200.101 (the BotRadio LAN interface) because the PC is sending
all the packets to TopRadio for forwarding, and TopRadio knows how to
get to 172.17.1.2 (on a network to which it is directly attached), but does
not know how to get to 172.18.200.101.
To fix the problem, add a route to TopRadio to address 172.18.0.0, mask
255.255.0.0, and a next-hop address of 172.17.1.2. This lets TopRadio

Proteus AMT System User’s Manual Page D-5

WAN/IPO-Air Channel Routing

forward packets to the LAN interface of BotRadio. Once done, you can
ping address 172.18.200.101 from the PC.

Advantages of Static Routing

Once you understand how static routes work, they are relatively simple
to use. You enter them once, after which the network should continue to
work indefinitely. The routes are secure and cannot be modified by any
external devices.

Disadvantages of Static Routing

The routing table holds up to 32 IP addresses. For a large network, there
can be a lot of static routes that would have to be added on each device in
the network. Also, if you have a protected configuration such as a
hot-standby link or a loop network, static routes can only define one path
through the network. If the defined path goes down, you will lose com-
munication, even if an alternate microwave path is still operational. Fi-
nally, when adding new radios to an existing network, the static routing
table on each radio would have to be updated to describe the new subnets
added.

Routing Information Protocol (RIP)

Use RIP when building Routing Information Protocol (RIP) is a standard protocol that performs
large networks. Always dynamic routing. Each RIP-enabled device on the network declares in-
use RIP when formation about the networks it knows. When device receives this infor-
connecting networks of mation that describes a network that it does not already know, it adds the
hot-standby radios.
routing information of that network to its routing table.

For example, in the network in Figure D-1, if both radios have RIP en-
abled on both the LAN and WAN ports on boot up, the BotRadio will
learn about the 172.16.0.0/16 network from TopRadio and TopRadio will
learn about the 172.18.0.0/16 network from BotRadio. Both will add the
routes to their routing table, and the PC will be able to ping BotRadio
without manually adding any static routes to either radio.

Advantages of RIP
RIP helps install network communications much faster on large networks
because you don't have to setup static routing tables in any of the radios.
As new radios are added you do not have to re-visit all the other radios in
the network to update their routing tables.
When you have a protected network with multiple paths, RIP will find
the shortest path in terms of routing hops. If that path breaks for any rea-
son, RIP will find an alternate path and resume communications.

NOTE: When you install routers with protected radios you cannot use
MNI Protection Routing you must use RIP.

Page D-6 Proteus AMT System User’s Manual

 IP Data Routing

RIP is an industry standard protocol that is supported by other third-party

devices such as routers. In a complex mixed network, radios running RIP
are able to communicate with these other devices to enable communica-
tions across the network.

Disadvantages of RIP
Network Size: The RIP standard is limited to 15 routing hops in a single
line. Since each radio performs routing, there are two routing hops for
each non-protected radio link. So a network that contains more than
seven microwave links in a single line will not be able to establish com-
munications across the network using RIP alone.

Convergence: RIP is typically slow to converge. When a device stops

receiving a certain route, it can take up to five minutes for the route to
time out and be deleted from the routing table. In a large protected net-
work, when one path goes down and the routes in all the radios need to
be updated to re-establish communications, network down-time can be
significant.

Security and Faults: It is possible for a hack to send RIP packets that
lets all network data route to his or her device. Also, if one of the devices
on the network does not strictly follow the RIP standard or fails in such a
way that it starts to send incorrect RIP advertisement, the entire network
can fail.

Bypassing Network Size Limit of RIP

To help alleviate this problem, the Proteus AMT implementation of RIP
has CUSTOM ROUTING ADVERTISEMENT. This allows the radio to send out
a single, larger network advertisement that appears to RIP as if it is con-
nected directly to the radio without using multiple routers; Figure D-2.

In Figure D-2, each route RIP learns has a metric equal to the number of
routers that must be traversed to get to the network. From the perspective
of the radio with address 172.16.1.1, networks 172.16.1.0/24 and
172.16.2.0/24 (the directly connected networks) have metrics of 1. Net-
work 172.16.3.0/24, which it has learned from 172.16.3.1, has a metric
of 2. Network 172.16.4.0/24 has a metric of 3, and the metric increases
by one for each network down the line. Network 172.17.1.0/24 has a
metric of 15, which is the maximum metric allowed by RIP. So
172.16.1.1 will not learn network 172.17.2.0/24, which should have a
metric of 16.
Use CUSTOM To fix this problem, send a CUSTOM ADVERTISEMENT (using the radio
ADVERTISEMENT to management software) out of port 172.16.15.2. This advertisement will
extend a RIP enabled be the network 172.17.0.0/16, with a metric of 1 (at 172.16.15.2). By the
networks. time the route traverses to 172.16.1.1, the metric will have grown to 15,
and will be added to the routing table. Now 172.16.1.1 will know how to
get to both the 172.17.1.0/24 and 172.17.2.0/24 networks. As long as any
links added below the 172.17.2.1 radio are within the 172.17.0.0/16 "su-
pernet" they will be able to communicate with 172.16.1.1.

Proteus AMT System User’s Manual Page D-7

WAN/IPO-Air Channel Routing

All subnet masks are 255.255.255.0

LAN 172.16.1.1 172.17.2.1 LAN

WAN 172.16.2.1 172.17.1.2 WAN

WAN 172.16.2.2 172.17.1.1 WAN

LAN 172.16.3.1 172.16.15.2 LAN

LAN 172.16.3.2 172.16.15.1 LAN

WAN 172.16.4.1 172.16.14.2 WAN

WAN 172.16.4.2 172.16.14.1 WAN

LAN 172.16.5.1 172.16.13.2 LAN

Ethernet connection
microwave link
LAN 172.16.5.2 172.16.13.1 LAN
WAN 172.16.6.1 172.16.12.2 WAN

WAN 172.16.6.2 172.16.12.1 WAN

LAN 172.16.7.1 172.16.11.2 LAN

LAN 172.16.7.2 172.16.11.1 LAN

WAN 172.16.8.1 172.16.10.2 WAN

WAN 172.16.8.2 172.16.10.1 WAN

LAN 172.16.9.1 172.16.9.2 LAN

Figure D-2. Example of a Large Non-Protected Network; RIP Enabled

In the same example, the radio at 172.17.2.1 cannot learn the

172.16.1.0/24 network because of the same RIP limitation. To solve this,
send a CUSTOM ADVERTISEMENT out of port 172.17.1.1 for "supernet"
172.16.0.0/24.

Since the radio with LAN address 172.16.15.2 is sending these custom
supernet advertisements out of both ports, it is forming a border between
two RIP domains. Such routers are sometimes referred to as border gate-
ways.

Figure D-3 shows the architecture of a large network with hot-standby

protected radios. You must enable RIP for the protected radio network to
work.

Page D-8 Proteus AMT System User’s Manual

 IP Data Routing

All subnet masks are 255.255.255.0

LAN 172.16.1.1 LAN 172.16.1.3 172.17.2.1 LAN 172.17.2.2 LAN

West East
WAN 172.16.2.1 WAN 172.16.2.4 172.17.1.2 WAN 172.17.1.4 WAN
Primary Secondary Primary Secondary

WAN 172.16.2.2 WAN 172.16.2.3 172.17.1.1 WAN 172.17.1.3 WAN

East West
LAN 172.16.3.1 LAN 172.16.3.3 172.16.15.2 LAN 172.16.15.4 LAN
Primary Secondary Primary Secondary

LAN 172.16.3.2 LAN 172.16.3.4 172.16.15.1 LAN 172.16.15.3 LAN

West East
WAN 172.16.4.1 WAN 172.16.4.3 172.16.14.2 WAN 172.16.14.4 WAN
Primary Secondary Primary Secondary

WAN 172.16.4.2 WAN 172.16.4.4 172.16.14.1 WAN 172.16.14.3 WAN

East LAN 172.16.5.1 LAN 172.16.5.3 172.16.13.2 LAN 172.16.13.4 LAN West
Primary Secondary Primary Secondary

LAN 172.16.5.2 LAN 172.16.5.4 172.16.13.1 LAN 172.16.13.3 LAN

West 172.16.12.4 WAN East
WAN 172.16.6.1 WAN 172.16.6.3 172.16.12.2 WAN
Primary Secondary Primary Secondary

WAN 172.16.6.2 WAN 172.16.6.4 172.16.12.1 WAN 172.16.12.3 WAN

East West
LAN 172.16.7.1 LAN 172.16.7.3 172.16.11.2 LAN 172.16.11.4 LAN
Primary Secondary Primary Secondary

LAN 172.16.7.2 LAN 172.16.7.4 172.16.11.1 LAN 172.16.11.3 LAN

West East
WAN 172.16.8.1 WAN 172.16.8.3 172.16.10.2 WAN 172.16.10.4 WAN
Primary Secondary Primary Secondary

WAN 172.16.8.2 WAN 172.16.8.4 172.16.10.1 WAN 172.16.10.3 WAN

East West
LAN 172.16.9.1 LAN 172.16.9.3 172.16.9.2 LAN 172.16.9.4 LAN
Primary Secondary Primary Secondary

microwave link
Ethernet connection
RADIO CONFIGURATION:
Enter the radio IP address and its twin (primary and secondary) for each hot-standy radio.
Set the routing protocol to RIP. Enable CUSTOM ADVERTISEMENT on the first radio of each subnet in your larger
network to bypass the 15-radio limitation of RIP.
Monitor a radio hop by connecting a PC running EM, CTI, or Telnet to an IP address of one of the radios on the same
subnet as the PC, or add a static route on the PC to the subnet and then connect to the radio IP using EM, CTI, or
Telnet. To set a static route use the ROUTE command (see Windows™ Help for command usage).

Figure D-3. Example of a Large Protected Network; RIP Enabled

Proteus AMT System User’s Manual Page D-9

WAN/IPO-Air Channel Routing

MNI Protection Routing

MNI Protection MNI protection routing is unique to hot-standby protected Proteus AMT
Routing is primarily radios, and is useful when a single protected hop connects a network.
for single protected This protection routing lets IP data route through the hop regardless of
radio hops, and not for which IDU, main or standby, is on-line.
use with routers.
Figure D-4 shows a protected microwave link. Only one radio on each
side communicates across the link at any time, and only one of four pos-
sible paths across the link is active (either Pri-Pri, Pri-Sec, Sec-Pri, or
Sec-Sec). Therefore, only two of the radios will have an active WAN
port at any one time.

Figure D-4. Example of a Protected Link Using MNI Protection Routing

With MNI protection routing active the radio requires twin IP addresses.
The twin is the LAN address of the radio on the other side of the Redun-
dancy Switch Unit (RSU). In the example, for TopRadioPri the twin ad-
dress is 172.16.200.101, for TopRadioSec the twin address is
172.16.200.100, for BotRadioPri the twin address is 172.18.200.102, and
for BotRadioSec the twin address is 172.18.200.101.

Page D-10 Proteus AMT System User’s Manual

 MNI Protection Routing

The default Protection Also required for MNI protection routing to work is a port number. The
Routing Port number default value of 3764 is the port that MNI registered with the Internet
is always 3764. Assigned Numbers Authority (IANA) for MNI protection routing. There
should be no conflicts with other devices when using this port, but if
there are, radio management software provides an option to change the
port value.

MNI protection routing uses information known about the radio protec-
tion scheme with messages passed between twins to set up routing tables
properly on all four radios.

When the system is powered, assuming there are no failures, both pri-
mary radios and both secondary radios will be on-line. TopRadioPri will
automatically have routes to networks it is directly connected to
172.16.0.0/16 and 172.17.1.0/29. Additionally, TopRadioPri will learn
the route to 172.18.0.0/16 via 172.17.1.2. TopRadioSec, however, will
only have the automatic route to 172.16.0.0/16 because its WAN port
will not be active. It will learn the route to 172.17.1.0/29 and
172.18.0.0/16 from TopRadioPri at 172.16.200.100. The same happens
with BotRadioPri and BotRadioSec on the other side of the link. So, you
can access any of the other three radios via IP data.
If we assume that a switch occurs where TopRadioPri goes off-line and
TopRadioSec comes on-line, then the routing tables change. TopRadi-
oSec will delete its routes via TopRadioPri, and add the automatic route
to 172.17.1.0/29, since its WAN interface is now active. Additionally, it
will learn the route to 172.18.0.0/16 via 172.17.1.2. It will then advertise
this information to TopRadioPri, which will add routes to 172.17.1.0/29
and 172.18.0.0/16 via TopRadioSec. When this happens, BotRadioPri
also has to change its route to 172.16.0.0/16 from 172.17.1.1 (TopRadio-
Pri's now-inactive WAN port) to 172.17.1.3 (BotRadioPri's now-active
WAN port). Once all this occurs, any radio in the system may communi-
cate with any three radios in the system again. This typically takes less
than 5 seconds to occur.

If we have a PC connected to the 172.16.0.0/16 network, its routing table

does not have to change to accommodate the switch in the network. If the
PC has a route to always use 172.16.200.100 (TopRadioPri) for routing
to network 172.18.0.0/16, then the route will be valid, even after a
switch. In this case, when the PC sends a packet destined for
172.18.200.102 (BotRadioSec) via 172.16.200.100 (TopRadioPri), then
TopRadioPri will re-route the packet to TopRadioSec to get it to its desti-
nation. Additionally, TopRadioPri will send an IP-standard ICMP redi-
rect message back to the PC, with instruction to use 172.16.200.101 (To-
pRadioSec) for this route in the future. Most operating systems will then
update their routing tables to avoid the extra hop of routing required after
a switch.

Proteus AMT System User’s Manual Page D-11

WAN/IPO-Air Channel Routing

Advantages of MNI Protection Routing

MNI Protection MNI protection routing is very fast to converge, especially when com-
routing converges pared to RIP. Most of the time, the network on the far side is inaccessible
faster and is more for about three seconds after a switch.
secure than RIP.
Since this protocol is limited to the four radios in a protected link, it is
very unlikely that a piece of third-party equipment or a hack could bring
down the network.

Disadvantages of MNI Protection Routing

You must provide static MNI protection routing is not scalable beyond the four radios in a single
routes between protected link. If you have back-to-back protected links, you can run
back-to-back protected MNI protection routing on both links, but will need static routes to be
systems. able to send data from one side of a link to the far side of the other link.

NOTE: When you install routers with protected radios you cannot use MNI
Protection Routing you must use RIP.

If you have a loop of protected radios, MNI protection routing will not
re-direct packet direction if a link totally fails on both the primary and
secondary sides.

Setting MNI Protection Routing

This section provides steps to set MNI Protection Routing using CTI,
EM, and SNMP.
MNI protection routing uses three separate networks: the near-end, the
far-end, and the IPOAir (WAN) networks that must be separate so the ad-
dress range of one does not overlap the address range of any other.
Enter radio IP • The near-end network has LAN addresses of the two radios at the
addresses during radio local (or near-end) side of the link. The example LAN in Figure D-4
configuration. on page D-9 has addresses of TopRadioPri (172.16.200.100) and
TopRadioSec (172.16.200.101).
• The far-end network has LAN addresses of the two radios at the
remote (far-end) site. The example LAN in Figure D-4 has addresses
of BotRadioPri (172.18.200.101) and BotRadioSec
(172.18.200.102).
• The IPOAir network includes our radio WAN addresses: 172.17.1.1
(TopRadioPri), 172.17.1.3 (TopRadioSec), 172.17.1.2
(BotRadioPri), and 172.17.1.4 (BotRadioSec).
The procedures here ensure you set routing protocol on LAN and WAN
ports to MNI PROTECTION ROUTING on port 3764 to adjust routes on IDUs
automatically.

NOTE: Reboot each IDU after changing routing protocol. Ensure the port
number is 3764 after reboot, if not, set the port number and reboot
again.

Page D-12 Proteus AMT System User’s Manual

 MNI Protection Routing

Configuring MNI Protection Routing Using CTI

NOTE These steps assume you have not setup radio IP addresses in
hot-standby configuration. If you have, skip to steps that set routing
protocol and port number (d and h).

1. First, log into the CTI menu of the near-end primary radio
(TopRadioPri) to configure the radio IP.
Selection numbers are a. From the main menu select 4, 6, 1, 1 to navigate to the NE primary
provided here as short LAN IP address entry
notation. Press Enter b. Enter the LAN IP address (e.g. 172.16.200.100)
after each selection. c. Select 2 and enter the LAN IP mask (e.g. 255.255.0.0)
d. Select 3, 1, 3 to enable MNI protection routing on port 3764
e. Select 0, 0, 2, 1 to navigate to the WAN IP address entry
f. Enter the WAN IP address (e.g. 172.17.1.1)
g. Select 2 and enter the WAN IP mask (e.g. 255.255.255.248)
h. Select 3, 1, 3 to enable MNI Protection Routing
i. Select 0, 0, 0, 0, 0 to navigate to the main menu
j. Select 5, 5 to reboot to the primary image location.
k. Ensure all parameters are correct.
Reboot each IDU after changing the routing protocol. Ensure that the
port number is 3764 after reboot, if not, manually set it and reboot
again.
2. Next, configure IP on the near-end secondary radio (TopRadioSec)
a. Select 4, 6, 3, 1 to navigate to the NE secondary LAN IP address
entry
b. Enter the LAN IP address (e.g 172.16.200.101)
c. Select 2 and enter the LAN IP mask (e.g 255.255.0.0)
d. Select 3, 1, 3 to enable MNI protection routing on port 3764
e. Select 0, 0, 2, 1 to navigate to the NE secondary WAN IP address
entry
f. Enter the WAN IP address (e.g. 172.17.1.3)
g. Select 2 and enter the WAN IP mask (e.g. 255.255.255.248)
h. Select 3, 1, 3 to enable MNI protection routing
i. Select 0, 0, 0, 0, 0 to navigate to the main menu
j. Select 5, 5 to reboot to the primary image location.
k. Ensure all parameters are correct.
Reboot each IDU after changing the routing protocol. Ensure that the
port number is 3764 after reboot, if not, manually set it and reboot
again.
3. Now, log into the far-end primary radio (BotRadioPri in this example).
a. Select 4, 6, 2, 1 to navigate to the FE primary LAN IP address entry
b. Enter the LAN IP address (e.g 172.18.200.101)
c. Select 2 and enter the LAN IP mask (e.g 255.255.0.0)
d. Select 3, 1, 3 to enable MNI protection routing on port 3764
e. Select 0, 0, 2, 1 to navigate to the FE primary WAN IP address entry

Proteus AMT System User’s Manual Page D-13

WAN/IPO-Air Channel Routing

f. Enter the WAN IP address 172.17.1.2

g. Then select 2 and enter the WAN IP mask (e.g. 255.255.255.248)
h. Then select 3, 1, 3 to enable MNI Protection Routing
i. Select 0, 0, 0, 0, 0 to navigate to the main menu
j. Select 5, 5 to reboot to the primary image location.
k. Ensure all parameters are correct.
Reboot each IDU after changing the routing protocol. Ensure that the
port number is 3764 after reboot, if not, manually set it and reboot
again.
4. Next, log into far-end secondary radio (BotRadioSec in this example).
a. Select 4, 6, 4, 1 to navigate to the FE secondary LAN IP entry
b. Enter the LAN IP address (e.g. 172.18.200.102)
c. Select 2 and enter the LAN IP mask (e.g 255.255.0.0)
d. Select 3, 1, 3 to enable MNI protection routing on port 3764
e. Select 0, 0, 2, 1 to navigate to the FE secondary WAN IP address
entry
f. Enter the WAN IP address (e.g. 172.17.1.4)
g. Then select 2 and enter the WAN IP mask (e.g. 255.255.255.248)
h. Then select 3, 1, 3 to enable MNI Protection Routing
i. Select 0, 0, 0, 0, 0 to navigate to the main menu
j. Select 5, 5 to reboot to the primary image location.
k. Ensure all parameters are correct.
Reboot each IDU after changing the routing protocol. Ensure that the
port number is 3764 after reboot, if not, set it and reboot again.

NE - A (primary) FE - A (primary)
LAN 172.16.200.100 LAN 172.18.200.101
MASK 255.255.0.0 MASK 255.255.0.0
MNI Protection/Port 3764 MNI Protection/Port 3764
WAN 172.17.1.1 WAN 172.17.1.2
MASK 255.255.255.248 MASK 255.255.255.248

Computer IP 172.16.x.x
Route:
172.17.0.0, NE - B (secondary) FE - B (secondary)
255.255.255.248, LAN 172.16.200.101 LAN 172.18.200.102
172.16.200.100 MASK 255.255.0.0 MASK 255.255.0.0
MNI Protection/Port 3764 MNI Protection/Port 3764
WAN 172.17.1.3 WAN 172.17.1.4
MASK 255.255.255.248 MASK 255.255.255.248

Figure D-5. Example IP Addresses for MNI Protection Routing

5. All four radios now know how to route protection switching. The
computer connected to the radio interface must also know how to route
on radio network to see all four radios, no matter which IDU is online.
In the example, the computer should have an IP address of 172.16.X.X,
where X can be any value except 0 or 255.

Page D-14 Proteus AMT System User’s Manual

 MNI Protection Routing

a. Confirm this with ROUTE PRINT at the command prompt. If the route
is not there, configure the routing table on your computer using
ROUTE. The command usage is ROUTE [-p] [command]
[destination] [MASK netmask] [gateway]
b. Open a DOS window (command prompt)
c. At the command prompt type: route add –p [destination]
(172.17.0.0) mask [netmask] (255.255.255.248)
[gateway] (172.16.200.100) and press Enter
d. Then type: route add –p [destination] (172.18.0.0)
mask [netmask] (255.255.0.0) [gateway]
(172.16.200.100) and press Enter
The –P switch is used with the ADD command to make the route
persistent across power cycles and reboots. If you followed these
steps, the computer should see all four radios, no matter which IDU
is online.
Configuring Protection Routing Using EM
Set IP addresses and masks to the values previously described using the
Configuration/IP Addresses selection of EM. You can configuration all
sites using the two setup displays. Reboot the IDU when complete.

Figure D-6. EM Screens for MNI Protection Routing

Proteus AMT System User’s Manual Page D-15

WAN/IPO-Air Channel Routing

Configuring Protection Routing Using SNMP

In order to do SNMP gets or sets, the community string should be set to
the administrative account password for the IDU. To accept traps, the
community string needs to match the configuration in the IDU Trap Des-
tination table.
Set IP addresses and masks as previously described. No additional con-
figuration is needed for SNMP set, get, getnext access. For the IDU to
send traps to an EMS/NMS when an event (alarm) occurs, set the trap
mode parameter on the IDU to TERSE (major/minor summary alarms
only), or VERBOSE (all alarms).
Also, add an entry to the Trap Destination table to specify the IP address
of the NMS and community string. In EM, find these parameters in the
Configuration menu, IP addresses selection, which opens a dialog to set
Trap Mode and Trap Destinations.

Page D-16 Proteus AMT System User’s Manual

 Appendix E
Configuring Virtual Local Area Networks
and Rate Limiting on 100BaseT LIMs

Introduction
Virtual LAN, VLAN, is a network of computers that behaves as if con-
nected to the same wire even though physically located on different seg-
ments of a LAN. VLANs are configured through software rather than
physical cable and hardware, which makes them extremely flexible, and
organizations can segregate network communication with less concern
about physical location. Along with mobility, VLAN provides traffic
management capabilities such as traffic class prioritization and limiting
data rates.

You set VLAN membership with software on the device. LAN manage-
ment on the Proteus AMT radio works in two modes: a port-based ap-
proach, and a frame-tagging approach. Segment LIM ports to a specific
VLAN, or filter MAC-layer frames using VLAN identity tags in the
packet frames.

The VLAN-capable Proteus AMT radio lets you configure up to 32 sepa-

rate stations on the four ports of a 100BaseT LIM, revision B and IDU
using firmware revision H or later.

VLAN Features
VLAN implementation on Proteus AMT radios feature:

• IEEE 802.1q (VLAN) compliance

• Up to 32 unique LANs per LIM
• Both tag-based and port-based modes
• Handles 802.1p priorities and Type of Service (ToS) traffic
• Rate limiting per port based on priority
• Three methods of setting priority:
• Ingress port filtering
• Setting the ToS value to a IPv4 / IPv6 Header
• Setting 802.1p VLAN tags
• Supports eight traffic priorities mapped to four traffic queues.

Proteus AMT System User’s Manual Page E-1

Configuring Virtual Local Area Networks and Rate Limiting on 100BaseT LIMs

VLAN Feature Notes

VLAN implementation in the Proteus AMT radio includes the following
limitations.
1. VLAN does not support 802.1q Generic VLAN Registration Protocol
(GVRP) or Generic Attribute Registration Protocol (GARP).
2. VLAN IDs must be consistent across the link. A VLAN ID cannot be
routed on the Far End radio if it is not in the Near End VLAN table.
3. With WEIGHTING disabled high-priority traffic can pass different than
expected. A gap in high-priority traffic can let low-priority traffic pass.
This can cause a delay of additional high-priority traffic when that
traffic reaches the channel.

Setting VLAN Membership

VLAN devices must have a way of understanding which stations belong

to which VLAN (membership). You can assign Proteus AMT radio
Ethernet lines as a member of a specific LAN in two modes: a port-based
approach, and a frame-tag approach. Port-based VLANs uses the port
number of the LIM to set VLAN segments. In the tagged frame ap-
proach, a header with VLAN ID (VID) and user priority information gets
inserted into each frame to identify the frame’s VLAN membership.

Each LAN is physically cabled into a specific port on the VLAN switch.
A network manager can use EM or the CTI application to set member-
ship mode. To use EM to configure port-based membership see ”Setting
Up the Port-Based VLAN Configuration with EM” on page E-8.

To following sections detail the VLAN configurations. For a background

to VLANS refer to ANNEX D of IEEE Std. 802.1q (http://stan-
dards.ieee.org). This standard defines an architecture for virtual bridged
LANs, the services provided in virtual bridged LANs, and the protocols
and algorithms involved in the provision services.

Page E-2 Proteus AMT System User’s Manual

 Configuring VLAN Using EM

Configuring VLAN Using EM

The following explains VLAN configuration using the Element Manager
– the radio management application. Figure E-1 shows the VLAN con-
figuration menu.

Figure E-1. Element Manager’s VLAN Configuration Menu

VLAN Device (LIM) Configuration

LIM device configuration involves setting VLAN parameters for each

100BaseT LIM, and affects all ports and packets.

NOTE: In VLAN configuration discussions the term 'traffic class' defines

how LIMs prioritize data. However, to avoid confusion with
802.1p priorities, we use the term traffic class, not priorities.

There are four traffic classes: 0, 1, 2, and 3. Traffic class 3 has the high-
est priority, while 0 has lowest priority.

You can enable traffic classes with VLANs disabled. Parameters relating
to traffic class – order, weighting, mapping, and rate limiting – will not
work with traffic class disabled. Table E-A details the VLAN configu-
ration settings for the 100Base-T LIM.

Proteus AMT System User’s Manual Page E-3

Configuring Virtual Local Area Networks and Rate Limiting on 100BaseT LIMs

Table E-A VLAN Device Configuration Parameters

VLAN Enable Switch LIM from a standard learning bridge to a 802.1Q VLAN. The VLAN membership and packet for-
warding rules get set from VLAN configuration table and port defaults.
Ignore When set to IGNORE the LIM port ignores any VLAN ID (VID) tag on incoming Ethernet frames, and adds
Incoming Tags a tag based on the ingress port number. The LIM preserves the incoming tag across the link.
Use to switch from a tag-based (USE TAGS) to port-based VLAN.
Traffic Class Sets the device to recognize different traffic classes. Required for rate limiting or for prioritizing packets
Enable based on ingress port, 802.1p priorities, or differentiated service (DiffServ) values.
Traffic Class Determines how packets separate into traffic class. Use the priority field of the
Order VLAN tag, the DiffServ information in the IP header, or the default traffic class of
the port, or combine the three. For example, look at VLAN tag first, then, if there is
no VLAN tag, the IP header, and then, without DiffServ information in the IP header,
use the default traffic class.

Traffic Class Sets how the 100BaseT LIM queues packets for transmission. If UNWEIGHTED, high traffic-class packets
Weighted transmit before low traffic-class packets. If WEIGHTED, packets transmit with 8-4-2-1 weighting. Use
weighting to ensure low traffic-class streams do not completely shut down during extreme activity.
Traffic Class These parameter selections let you define how IP differentiated services (DiffServ), called Type of Ser-
Mapping vice (TOS), or 802.1p priorities are mapped into traffic classes.
Type of Service Differentiated services is a method that providers may use to guarantee a particular level of QoS (qual-
(DiffServ) ity of service) to their subscribers. The selection maps the six-bit differentiated service fields defined in
IETF RFC 2474 to the four traffic classes allowed by the 100BaseT LIM.
The DiffServ field is found in the second octet of an IP header, where the six most significant bits define
the differentiated services. The two least significant bits are now unused and are assumed to be zero.
The value that goes into the map is the value of the entire octet, meaning that any value entered must
be evenly divisible by four. Each of the four traffic classes has a maximum DiffServ value that defines
a “watermark” point between traffic classes. Below is a For example, take the following configuration:

Page E-4 Proteus AMT System User’s Manual

 Configuring VLAN Using EM

Table E-A VLAN Device Configuration Parameters

In this configuration, any IP packet that has
a value of 80 or less in its second octet will
be considered a part of traffic class 0 Type
of Service (DiffServ).
Since the last two bits are ignored, a packet
with a value of 83 will be considered part of
traffic class 0.
Any packet with a value between 84 and
144 will belong to traffic class 1.
Any packet with a DiffServ value between
148 and 196 will be considered part of traf-
fic class 2, and any packet with a value of
200 or greater will belong to traffic class 3.

Important: the maximum value for traffic class 3 must be greater than the maximum value for traffic
class 2, which much be greater than the maximum value for traffic class 1, etc. Therefore, first set the
value for traffic class 3, followed by traffic class 2, then 1, and finally traffic class 0.
VLAN Priority VLAN priorities are set by the priority bits defined in IEEE 802.1p (now in IEEE 802.1D). The standard
defines three priority bits; making eight levels of priority (0 to 7– 7 being highest).
Priorities determine the order in which traffic,
for each of the four traffic classes (0 to 3), gets
transmitted. The priority may or may not be
rate-limited, depending upon how it has been
configured
Unlike DiffServ mapping, you can assign the
traffic classes in any order.

Link Loss Sets how the device behaves if the microwave link drops-off.
Forwarding
NONE all ports stay enabled
ALL all ports disabled
LINK PORT ONLY the port transmitting packets (invisible to the user) disables. Use when the radio is
used to connect networks locally, but you don’t want the buffers in the device to fill
up with data destined for the (dead) microwave link.

Proteus AMT System User’s Manual Page E-5

Configuring Virtual Local Area Networks and Rate Limiting on 100BaseT LIMs

Port-Based VLAN Configuration

Port grouping is the most common method of defining VLAN member-

ship. Port-based VLAN configuration is fairly straightforward.

Port-based VLAN is a network that restricts data packets to the physical

ports they enter. For example, packets entering Port 1 on the near-end ra-
dio only leave port 1 on the far-end radio. Likewise, packets on ports 2,
3, or 4 on one end are restricted to ports 2, 3, or 4 on the other end.

Figure E-2 shows how packets are forwarded when using port-based
VLAN. Although the radio link operates as a single connection,
port-based VLAN operates like the four ports on each radio are individ-
ual links.

Figure E-2. Port-Based VLAN Example

Table E-B, starting on the next page, details the port-based VLAN con-
figuration settings.

Page E-6 Proteus AMT System User’s Manual

 Configuring VLAN Using EM

Table E-B VLAN Parameters for Port-Based Configuration

Default VLAN ID Works with VLAN enabled. Use this parameter to assign a VLAN ID to any untagged packet entering
this port. This will also be the VLAN ID assigned with IGNORE INCOMING TAGS enabled.
Ingress Filtering Works with VLAN enabled. With ingress filtering OFF, the port allows any packet to enter, and then
routes the packets based on VLAN ID and the VLAN tables. Packets which are members of VLANs
not listed in the VLAN table, are dropped.
With ingress filtering ON the port only accepts packets with VLAN IDs in which the port is a member.
Setting IGNORE INCOMING TAGS overrides this option.
Line Type In auto-negotiate the port adjusts data rate and duplex type. Available modes: 10BaseT Half Duplex,
100 BaseT Half Duplex, and 100 BaseT Full Duplex.
Default Traffic The traffic class assigned to all ingress packets on the port, unless the packet has VLAN priority tag
Class or IP DiffServ information and those features are enabled (see traffic class order and mapping).
Ingress Rate Works with traffic class enabled. Set the ingress rate limit of each of the four traffic classes.
Traffic class 0 packets can be set to be limited to from 128 Kbps to 8 Mbps. All other traffic classes
can be set either equal to, or twice, the rate of the next lower traffic class, for a maximum rate limit of
64 Mbps for traffic class 3 packets.
Also, all the rate limits may be set to UNLIMITED.

NOTE: If rate limiting reaches a threshold, the additional packets

received will be dropped, and flow control will not be asserted.
This is because it would not be desirable to assert flow control
when you are getting too many priority 0 packets, thus blocking
the reception of priority 3 packets.

Proteus AMT System User’s Manual Page E-7

Configuring Virtual Local Area Networks and Rate Limiting on 100BaseT LIMs

Setting Up the Port-Based VLAN Configuration with EM

Use the following steps to set up a port-based VLAN quickly.
1. Set up the VLAN table for four entries, with one member port per
entry. The example has VLAN ID 1 for port 1, VLAN ID 2 for port
2, and so on for simplicity, but any four distinct VLAN IDs (from 1
to 4094) work.

2. Set all frames to UNTAGGED so that packets leaving one radio are the
same as packets that enter the opposite side of the link.
3. Set the default VLAN IDs for each port. In this example, the default
VLAN ID for port 1 should be 1. This means that any packet that
comes in Port 1 is assigned to VLAN 1, which has Port 1 as the only
member in the group. So, the packet cannot be sent to any of the
other ports. Similarly, the default VLAN ID for Port 2 is 2, and so
on.

Page E-8 Proteus AMT System User’s Manual

 Configuring VLAN Using EM

4. Finally, set the device (LIM) to enable VLANs, and ignore

incoming tags.

This means that if the device receives packets that have VLAN tags
on them, these tags are ignored and port-based VLAN takes
precedence.

When the packet leaves from the radio link, the original VLAN tag
remains for use on the network.

The port-based VLAN operates as follows:

An untagged frame comes in port 2. The port adds a VLAN tag with
VLAN ID 2. The tagged frame goes across the microwave link. If the
LIM on the far end has the same settings, the tagged packet enter the
LIM from the radio side, and goes to port 2 (the only member port of
VLAN-Id 2). The port removed the VLAN ID tag, and the packet trans-
mits to the network.

NOTE: Since ports add VLAN ID tags to data transmitted over the link,
extra overhead is used, and the device does not operate at 100%
throughput.

This configuration helps relieve congestion, since without VLAN, data

coming in one port would potentially egress the other ports on the same
radio, and on all four ports on the far side of the link.

Proteus AMT System User’s Manual Page E-9

Configuring Virtual Local Area Networks and Rate Limiting on 100BaseT LIMs

VLAN Table Configuration

Table E-C VLAN Table Parameters

VLAN ID A value specified in a IEEE 802.3ac tag placed between

the Ethernet header and the IP header of a packet that
defines the VLAN. To add a new record to a table enter
a VLAN ID value between 1 and 4094. Edit or delete a
record that you select one at a time.
Member Ports This tells us which ports are members of the VLAN. In
the 100BaseT LIM, the unseen port that goes across the
radio is a member of every VLAN. So, VLAN always has
visibility to the other side of the link.
Untagged Ports Ports strip the VLAN tag from the packet before sending
it to the outside world. With IGNORE INCOMING TAGS set,
the packet contains two tags: the original ingress tag
plus the tag with the default VLAN ID from the ingress
port. If the port is set as tagged, the packet gets trans-
mitted on the network with both tags intact. If the port is
set untagged, then the default tag gets removed, but the
original ingress tag remains on the packet for transmis-
sion to the network.

Page E-10 Proteus AMT System User’s Manual

 Configuring VLAN Using EM

Rate Limiting Configuration

The term 'traffic class' is The 100BaseT LIM can set up four different traffic classes. The traffic
used here in the context of class for a particular packet may be set up in one of three ways:
the operation of the
priority handling and • IPv4 / IPv6 header information
queueing functions of the • IEEE 802.1p tag
forwarding process as • Ingress port
IEEE Std. 802.1Q, 2003
describes. For IPv4 / IPv6 and IEEE 802.1p priorities, the traffic class is deter-
mined by a mapping the header information into a traffic class. Each port
can be assigned a default traffic class. The LIM can be set up to use or ig-
nore this traffic class information in any order. Each traffic class on each
port may be rate-limited to 128-, 256-, or 512-kbps, or 1-, 2-, 4-, 8-, 16-,
32-, or 64-Mbps.

For example, if you want to guarantee 50 Mbps on Port 1 of a 100-Mbps

pipe with the other three ports sharing the remaining bandwidth you
would set the ports as follows on the CONFIGURATION, VLANx PORT
screen of Element Manager (EM) or the same menu selection of the craft
terminal interface (CTI).

Port # Default Priority Priority Level Rate Limit

0 Unlimited
1 Unlimited
1 3
2 Unlimited
3 Unlimited
0 4Mbps
1 8Mbps
2 2
2 16Mbps
3 16Mbps
0 8Mbps
1 8Mbps
3 2
2 16Mbps
3 32Mpbs
0 8Mbps
1 16Mbps
4 1
2 16Mbps
3 32Mbps

In this example, we ignore IPv4 / IPv6 and IEEE 802.1p information.

This means that all packets coming into the port are set to the default pri-
ority, and only the highlighted rows have any meaning to rate limiting in
this example.
Also note that since rate limiting is performed on a per-port, per-priority
basis, it is not necessary to have different default priorities on each port.
They could all have the same default priority, and the rate limit for that
priority can be set differently on each port to achieve the same result.
In this example, data on ports 2, 3, and 4 is limited to 16 Mbps, which
leaves 52 Mbps (100 - 16*3) for port 1. Appendix E-3 shows the EM
port configuration screens with example settings for rate limiting.

Proteus AMT System User’s Manual Page E-11

Configuring Virtual Local Area Networks and Rate Limiting on 100BaseT LIMs

Figure E-3. Element Manager VLAN Port Configuration Screens - Rate Limiting Example

When ports try to output more packets than the rate limiting set up, the
excess packets get dropped. Flow control is not used in this case, so that
the rejection of low-priority packets do not affect the acceptance of
high-priority packets.

Page E-12 Proteus AMT System User’s Manual

 Configuring VLAN Using EM

If the port inputs exceed the overall bandwidth of the radio, then the de-
fault traffic class and traffic class weighting for the port decide which
packets get dropped.

For example, with 16 Mbps of data on each of ports 2, 3, and 4 (the max-
imum rate limiting allows), and 70 Mbps of data on port 1, then the total
data rate attempted to be sent through the switch is 118 Mbps. If the ra-
dio throughput is 100 Mbps, then 18 Mbps of data is dropped.

If traffic class weighting is set to unweighted, then the lowest traffic

class data drops first. Since port 4, in the example above, has the lowest
default traffic class, all 16 Mbps of data drops. Additionally, ports 2 and
3, which share the next-lowest traffic class, drop 2 Mbps of data.

Note: In the example above, data will not flow through port 4 at all.

If you set traffic class weighting in the example above to WEIGHTED, the
device will then send eight packets of the highest traffic class, four pack-
ets of the next highest traffic class, two packets from the next highest
traffic class, and one packet from the lowest traffic class.

In the example above, most of the data still drops from port 4, but it
would have some of its pass through the radio link.

Note: With weighting disabled high-priority traffic can pass different

than expected. A gap in high-priority traffic can let low-priority
traffic pass. This may cause a delay of additional high-priority
traffic when that traffic reaches the channel

Proteus AMT System User’s Manual Page E-13

Configuring Virtual Local Area Networks and Rate Limiting on 100BaseT LIMs

Configuring VLANs Using CTI

You can also configure your VLAN with the Proteus AMT craft terminal
interface (CTI). Select LIMs/Modulation, the radio to set up, and VLAN
Set-up. The selection shows the VLAN capable LIM
Configuration Menu
1. IDU
2. ODU
3. LIMs / Modulation
4. Service Channels
5. Hot Standby
6. IP
7. Alarms
8. Reset to factory Settings
0. Exit
NewRadio, No Alarms, Link Up > 3
--------------------------------------------------
LIMs / Modulation
1. Near End Primary [N/A]
2. Far End Primary [N/A]
3. Near End Secondary (Local) [16 E1/100 BaseT]
4. Far End Secondary [N/A]
5. Configure Modem
0. Exit
NewRadio, No Alarms, Link Up > 3
--------------------------------------------------
Near End Secondary Lim Configuration Menu
1. Current State [VALID]
2. Proposed LIM A Type [16 E1]
3. Proposed LIM B Type [100 BaseT]
4. Equipped Tributaries
5. LIM A E1/DS1 Line Encoding [HDB3]
6. VLAN Set-up
0. Exit
NewRadio, No Alarms, Link Up > 6
-------------------------------------------------
Near End Secondary VLAN Set-up
1. LIM A [N/A]
2. LIM B [VLAN Capable]
0. Exit
NewRadio, No Alarms, Link Up > 6

The VLAN set-up selections, explained below, include selections to con-

figure the VLAN device, port, table, 802.1P traffic class, and to config-
ure DiffServ traffic class.
Near End Secondary LIM B VLAN Configuration Menu
1. Device Configuration
2. Port Configuration
3. VLAN Table Configuration
4. 802.1P to Traffic Class Mapping
5. DiffServ to Traffic Class Mapping
0. Exit
NewRadio, No Alarms, Link Up >1

Page E-14 Proteus AMT System User’s Manual

 Configuring VLANs Using CTI

These are the device-specific options:

Near End Secondary LIM B VLAN Device Menu
1. Traffic Class Enable [OFF]
2. Traffic Class Order [DEFAULT]
3. Traffic Class Weighted [OFF]
4. Link Loss Forwarding [NONE]
5. 802.1Q VLANs [ON]
6. Ignore Incoming Tags [ON]
0. Exit
NewRadio, No Alarms, Link Up >

Traffic Class Enable Lets the device recognize different traffic classes. Re-
quired for rate limiting or for prioritizing packets by type
of service.
Traffic Class Order Organizes packets into traffic classes. Each port has
four classes. Selections for priority field of the VLAN tag,
the type of service information in the IP header, or the
default port priority. Or, selection for a combination of
the three. For example, first look at the VLAN tag, then
if no VLAN tag–the IP header, and then if no traffic class
information in the IP header–use default priority.
Traffic Class Weighted Sets the device egress policy. If OFF, high priority pack-
ets always egress before low priority packets. If ON, the
packets egress with 8-4-2-1 weighting.
Link Loss Forwarding Sets device behavior if the microwave link fails. If set to
NONE, all ports on the device remain enabled at all
times. If set ALL, all ports disable on a failed link. If set
LINK PORT ONLY, the port that sends packets across the
link (indistinct) turns off on a link failure. Useful when the
radio connects networks locally, but you don't want de-
vice buffers to fill with data destined for the failed link.
802.1Q VLANs Must be ON to enable VLAN capability.
Ignore incoming tags This tells the device to ignore any incoming tags, and
add its own tag based upon the ingress port. The incom-
ing tag will be preserved across the link.

Proteus AMT System User’s Manual Page E-15

Configuring Virtual Local Area Networks and Rate Limiting on 100BaseT LIMs

These are the port-specific options:

Near End Secondary LIM B VLAN Port Configuration
1. Port 1
2. Port 2
3. Port 3
4. Port 4
0. Exit
--------------------------------------------------
Near End Secondary LIM B Port 1 VLAN Port Menu
1. Default Traffic Class [0]
2. Default VLAN Id [24]
3. Ingress Filtering [OFF]
4. Line Type [AUTO-NEG]
5. Rate Limiting
0. Exit
NewRadio, No Alarms, Link Up >1

Default Traffic Class The traffic class you assign to all ingress packets on the
port, unless the packet has VLAN priority tag or IP DiffServ
information and you enabled those features (Traffic Class
menu, page E-18).
Default VLAN Id VID assigned to any untagged packet entering this port. Al-
so, the VID assigned if ignore incoming tags is ON.
Ingress Filtering If ON, the port rejects packets that do not have a VID of the
VLAN group in which the port is a member.
Line Type If AUTO-NEG, the port auto-negotiates the data rate and du-
plex type. Also has selections for 10BaseT Half Duplex,
100BaseT Half Duplex, and 100BaseT Full Duplex.
Rate Limiting Select the ingress rate limit for each of the four priority
classes. Priority 0 packets can be limited from 128 KBPS to
8 MBPs. All other priorities can be either equal to or twice
the rate of the next lower priority for a maximum rate limit
of 64 Mbps for Priority-3 packets. All rate limits can also be
set to UNLIMITED.

Setting Up the Port-Based VLAN Configuration with CTI

Use the following steps to set up a port-based VLAN from the craft ter-
minal interface.
1. Use the port configuration menu above and the VLAN table entries
on page E-17 to set the VLAN table for four entries, with one
member port per entry. For example has VLAN ID 1 for port 1,
VLAN ID 2 for port 2, and so on for simplicity, but any four distinct
VLAN IDs (from 1 to 4094) work.
2. Set all frames to UNTAGGED so that packets leaving one radio are the
same as packets that enter the opposite side of the link.
3. Set the default VLAN IDs for each port. In this example, the default
VLAN ID for port 1 should be 1. This means that any packet that
comes in Port 1 is assigned to VLAN 1, which has Port 1 as the only
member in the group. So, the packet cannot be sent to any of the
other ports. Similarly, the default VLAN ID for Port 2 is 2, and so
on.
4. Finally, set the LIM (page E-15) to enable VLANs, and ignore
incoming tags. This means that if the device receives packets that

Page E-16 Proteus AMT System User’s Manual

 Configuring VLANs Using CTI

have VLAN tags on them, these tags are ignored and port-based
settings take precedence.

When the packet leaves the radio link to a network device, the
original VLAN tag remains for use on that network.
The following screen shows the VLAN configuration table and configu-
ration selections. When adding an entry, CTI asks for a VLAN ID and
name, and then asks if each of ports 1 to 4 should be a member port and
untagged port. Once you answer the set up prompts, CTI adds the VLAN
entry.
ID VID Name Egress Untagged
65 1 1 1
66 2 2 2
67 3 3 3
68 4 4 4

----------------------------------------
Near End Secondary LIM B VLAN Table
1. Add Vlan Entry
2. Delete Vlan Entry
0. Exit
NewRadio, No Alarms, Link Up >1

ID an identifier field used to delete rows from the table

VID VLAN-ID. A value specified in a IEEE 802.3ac tag placed be-
tween the Ethernet header and the IP header of a packet that
defines the VLAN. To add a new record to a table enter a
VLAN ID value between 1 and 4094. To edit or delete a record,
first select the record.
NAME an ASCII identifier for the VLAN. The name is not saved in
non-volatile memory
EGRESS ports that any packet belonging to this VLAN are allowed to
exit. These are the member ports. This tells us which ports are
members of the VLAN. In the 100BaseT LIM, the unseen port
that goes across the radio is a member of every VLAN. So,
VLAN always has visibility to the other side of the link.
UNTAGGED Ports strip the VLAN tag from the packet before sending it to
the outside world. With IGNORE INCOMING TAGS set, the packet
contains two tags: the original ingress tag plus the tag with the
default VLAN ID from the ingress port. If the port is set as
tagged, the packet gets transmitted on the network with both
tags intact. If the port is set untagged, then the default tag gets
removed, but the original ingress tag remains on the packet for
transmission to the network.

Proteus AMT System User’s Manual Page E-17

Configuring Virtual Local Area Networks and Rate Limiting on 100BaseT LIMs

The following is the 802.1P traffic class menu. This menu lets you map
the priority field of the VLAN tag (a value from 0 to 7) to a priority traf-
fic class within the device (a value from 0 to 3).
Near End Secondary LIM B Traffic Class Menu
1. Priority 0 TC [0]
2. Priority 1 TC [1]
3. Priority 2 TC [2]
4. Priority 3 TC [3]
5. Priority 4 TC [3]
6. Priority 5 TC [3]
7. Priority 6 TC [3]
8. Priority 7 TC [3]
0. Exit
NewRadio, No Alarms, Link Up >1

The following is the DiffServ to Traffic Class Mapping selection.

Diffserv (differentiated services) is one way providers use to assure QoS

(quality of service) to their subscribers. The selection maps the six-bit
differentiated service fields defined in IETF RFC 2474 to four traffic
classes allowed on the Proteus AMT 100BaseT LIM.
Near End Secondary LIM B TOS Menu
1. DiffServ Maximum for TC 0 [20]
2. DiffServ Maximum for TC 1 [124]
3. DiffServ Maximum for TC 2 [200]
4. DiffServ Maximum for TC 3 [252]
0. Exit
NewRadio, No Alarms, Link Up >1

This selection lets you map the type of service field in IP headers. It uses
bits 7:2 of the field, so all values input into this table must be a multiple
of 4 and no greater than 252. Each entry represents the maximum service
value for mapping into one of the four priority traffic classes on the de-
vice.
In the example above, IP data with a TOS field of 20 or below goes to
traffic class 0, with a TOS field between 24 and 124 to traffic class 1,
with a TOS field between 128 and 200 to traffic class 2, and IP traffic
with a TOS field between 204 and 252 goes to traffic class 3.

Page E-18 Proteus AMT System User’s Manual

 Appendix F
North American Frequency Licensing

Overview
The Federal Communication Commission (FCC) establishes and en-
forces frequency coordination in the United States to ensure that the fre-
quency spectrum you want to use will not interfere with existing, or pro-
posed, microwave paths and stations. FCC rules, Part 101, contains
procedures for the filing radio station licenses in the fixed microwave
services.

The Proteus AMT radio is very flexible, and you can configure an in-
stalled radio remotely with the associated radio management software.
This flexibility also lets you potentially set a radio mode that exceeds
your licensed emission.

Once you license your radio it must remain in the mode indicated by
your license. This is most notable for 100BaseT configurations, which
have high throughput and high gain modes. High throughput mode uses
32QAM modulation, therefore the frequency coordination uses the lower
power output associated with 32QAM. High gain mode increases trans-
mitter output power, but violates the license of a high throughput radio.

Table F-A and Table F-B provide the configuration information needed
for FCC license applications.

Table F-A Frequency Licensing Data; Standard Data Rates

Data Rate Bandwidth (MHz) Modulation Aggregate Data Rate (bps) Emission Designator
2E1 3.5 QPSK 5,292,000 3M50D7W
4E1 3.5 8-PSK 10,600,000 3M50D7W
100BT HG 3.5 QPSK 5,832,000 3M50D7W
100BT 3.5 8-PSK 8,712,000 3M50D7W
2E1+100BT 3.5 8-PSK 8,712,000 3M50D7W
2E1+100BT HG 3.5 QPSK 5,832,000 3M50D7W
4DS1 5 QPSK 7,968,000 5M00D7W
8DS1 5 16-QAM 15,936,000 5M00D7W
100BT HG 5 QPSK 8,208,000 5M00D7W
4DS1+100BT HG 5 8-PSK 12,336,000 5M00D7W
2DS1+100BT 5 16-QAM 16,512,000 5M00D7W
100BT 5 16-QAM 16,416,000 5M00D7W

Proteus AMT System User’s Manual Page F-1

North American Frequency Licensing

Table F-A Frequency Licensing Data; Standard Data Rates (continued)

Data Rate Bandwidth (MHz) Modulation Aggregate Data Rate (bps) Emission Designator
4DS1+100BT 5 16-QAM 16,512,000 5M00D7W
8DS1+100BT 5 16-QAM 16,512,000 5M00D7W
4E1 7 QPSK 11,148,000 7M00D7W
8E1 7 16-QAM 22,296,000 7M00D7W
12E1 7 32-QAM 29,080,000 7M00D7W
100BT HG 7 QPSK 11,664,000 7M00D7W
2E1+100BT HG 7 QPSK 11,664,000 7M00D7W
4E1+100BT HG 7 QPSK 11,664,000 7M00D7W
8E1+100BT HG 7 16-QAM 23,328,000 7M00D7W
100BT 7 16-QAM 23,256,000 7M00D7W
2E1+100BT 7 32-QAM 29,160,000 7M00D7W
4E1+100BT 7 32-QAM 29,160,000 7M00D7W
8E1+100BT 7 32-QAM 29,160,000 7M00D7W
12E1+100BT 7 32-QAM 29,160,000 7M00D7W
8DS1 10 QPSK 16,608,000 10M0D7W
12DS1 10 8-PSK 24,912,000 10M0D7W
16DS1 10 16-QAM 33,216,000 10M0D7W
24DS1 10 32-QAM 41,616,000 10M0D7W
100BT HG 10 QPSK 16,608,000 10M0D7W
2DS1+100BT HG 10 QPSK 16,608,000 10M0D7W
4DS1+100BT HG 10 QPSK 16,608,000 10M0D7W
8DS1+100BT HG 10 QPSK 16,608,000 10M0D7W
12DS1+100BT HG 10 8-PSK 24,720,000 10M0D7W
16DS1+100BT HG 10 16-QAM 33,280,000 10M0D7W
100BT 10 32-QAM 41,600,000 10M0D7W
2DS1+100BT 10 32-QAM 41,600,000 10M0D7W
4DS1+100BT 10 32-QAM 41,600,000 10M0D7W
8DS1+100BT 10 32-QAM 41,600,000 10M0D7W
12DS1+100BT 10 32-QAM 41,600,000 10M0D7W
16DS1+100BT 10 32-QAM 41,600,000 10M0D7W
8E1 14 QPSK 22,620,000 13M7D7W
16E1 14 16-QAM 45,488,000 13M7D7W
20E1 14 16-QAM 45,552,000 13M7D7W
24E1 14 32-QAM 56,880,000 13M7D7W
E3+4E1 14 32-QAM 56,820,000 13M7D7W
E3+8E1 14 32-QAM 56,920,000 13M7D7W
100BT HG 14 QPSK 23,292,000 13M7D7W
2E1+100BT HG 14 QPSK 23,292,000 13M7D7W
4E1+100BT HG 14 QPSK 23,292,000 13M7D7W
8E1+100BT HG 14 QPSK 23,292,000 13M7D7W
12E1+100BT HG 14 8-PSK 34,923,000 13M7D7W
16E1+100BT HG 14 16-QAM 46,488,000 13M7D7W
100BT 14 32-QAM 58,100,000 13M7D7W
2E1+100BT 14 32-QAM 58,100,000 13M7D7W
4E1+100BT 14 32-QAM 58,100,000 13M7D7W
8E1+100BT 14 32-QAM 57,620,000 13M7D7W
12E1+100BT 14 32-QAM 58,100,000 13M7D7W
16E1+100BT 14 32-QAM 58,100,000 13M7D7W
16DS1 20 QPSK 33,216,000 20M0D7W
24DS1 20 8-PSK 49,680,000 20M0D7W

Page F-2 Proteus AMT System User’s Manual

 Overview

Table F-A Frequency Licensing Data; Standard Data Rates (continued)

Data Rate Bandwidth (MHz) Modulation Aggregate Data Rate (bps) Emission Designator
28DS1 20 8-PSK 49,856,001 20M0D7W
32DS1 20 16-QAM 66,432,000 20M0D7W
DS3 20 8-PSK 49,872,000 20M0D7W
DS3+2DS1 20 16-QAM 66,112,000 20M0D7W
DS3+4DS1 20 16-QAM 66,464,000 20M0D7W
DS3+8DS1 20 16-QAM 66,384,000 20M0D7W
DS3+12DS1 20 32-QAM 82,800,000 20M0D7W
DS3+16DS1 20 32-QAM 83,280,000 20M0D7W
100BT HG 20 QPSK 33,216,000 20M0D7W
2DS1+100BT HG 20 QPSK 33,216,000 20M0D7W
4DS1+100BT HG 20 QPSK 33,216,000 20M0D7W
8DS1+100BT HG 20 QPSK 33,216,000 20M0D7W
12DS1+100BT HG 20 QPSK 33,216,000 20M0D7W
16DS1+100BT HG 20 QPSK 33,216,000 20M0D7W
100BT 20 32-QAM 83,200,000 20M0D7W
2DS1+100BT 20 32-QAM 83,200,000 20M0D7W
4DS1+100BT 20 32-QAM 83,200,000 20M0D7W
8DS1+100BT 20 32-QAM 83,200,000 20M0D7W
12DS1+100BT 20 32-QAM 83,200,000 20M0D7W
16DS1+100BT 20 32-QAM 83,200,000 20M0D7W
24DS1 25 QPSK 41,546,000 25M0D7W
28DS1 25 8-PSK 61,590,000 25M0D7W
32DS1 25 8-PSK 61,974,000 25M0D7W
DS3 25 8-PSK 61,590,000 25M0D7W
DS3+2DS1 25 8-PSK 62,358,000 25M0D7W
DS3+4DS1 25 8-PSK 61,350,000 25M0D7W
DS3+8DS1 25 8-PSK 62,358,000 25M0D7W
DS3+12DS1 25 16-QAM 82,760,000 25M0D7W
DS3+16DS1 25 16-QAM 83,144,000 25M0D7W
2xDS3 25 32-QAM 103,860,000 25M0D7W
100BT HG 25 QPSK 41,636,000 25M0D7W
2DS1+100BT HG 25 QPSK 41,636,000 25M0D7W
4DS1+100BT HG 25 QPSK 41,636,000 25M0D7W
8DS1+100BT HG 25 QPSK 41,636,000 25M0D7W
12DS1+100BT HG 25 QPSK 41,636,000 25M0D7W
16DS1+100BT HG 25 QPSK 41,636,000 25M0D7W
DS3+100BT HG 25 8-PSK 62,358,000 25M0D7W
100BT 25 32-QAM 104,080,000 25M0D7W
2DS1+100BT 25 32-QAM 104,080,000 25M0D7W
4DS1+100BT 25 32-QAM 104,080,000 25M0D7W
8DS1+100BT 25 32-QAM 104,080,000 25M0D7W
12DS1+100BT 25 32-QAM 104,080,000 25M0D7W
16DS1+100BT 25 32-QAM 104,080,000 25M0D7W
DS3+100BT 25 32-QAM 104,080,000 25M0D7W
24DS1 28 QPSK 46,500,000 27M5D7W
28DS1 28 8-PSK 69,750,000 27M5D7W
32DS1 28 8-PSK 69,990,000 27M5D7W
DS3 28 8-PSK 69,750,000 27M5D7W
DS3+2DS1 28 8-PSK 69,750,000 27M5D7W
DS3+4DS1 28 8-PSK 69,333,999 27M5D7W

Proteus AMT System User’s Manual Page F-3

North American Frequency Licensing

Table F-A Frequency Licensing Data; Standard Data Rates (continued)

Data Rate Bandwidth (MHz) Modulation Aggregate Data Rate (bps) Emission Designator
DS3+8DS1 28 8-PSK 69,750,000 27M5D7W
DS3+12DS1 28 8-PSK 69,846,000 27M5D7W
DS3+16DS1 28 16-QAM 93,304,000 27M5D7W
2xDS3 28 32-QAM 116,250,000 27M5D7W
2DS1+100BT HG 28 QPSK 46,564,000 27M5D7W
4DS1+100BT HG 28 QPSK 46,564,000 27M5D7W
8DS1+100BT HG 28 QPSK 46,564,000 27M5D7W
12DS1+100BT HG 28 QPSK 46,564,000 27M5D7W
16DS1+100BT HG 28 QPSK 46,564,000 27M5D7W
DS3+100BT HG 28 8-PSK 69,846,000 27M5D7W
2DS1+100BT 28 32-QAM 116,660,000 27M5D7W
4DS1+100BT 28 32-QAM 116,660,000 27M5D7W
8DS1+100BT 28 32-QAM 116,660,000 27M5D7W
12DS1+100BT 28 32-QAM 116,660,000 27M5D7W
16DS1+100BT 28 32-QAM 116,660,000 27M5D7W
DS3+100BT 28 32-QAM 116,660,000 27M5D7W
16E1 28 QPSK 46,200,000 27M5D7W
E3 28 QPSK 46,056,000 27M5D7W
20E1 28 QPSK 46,584,000 27M5D7W
E3+4E1 28 QPSK 46,584,000 27M5D7W
24E1 28 8-PSK 68,840,001 27M5D7W
32E1 28 16-QAM 91,680,000 27M5D7W
E3+16E1 28 16-QAM 91,680,000 27M5D7W
100BT 28 QPSK 46,564,000 27M5D7W
2E1+100BT HG 28 QPSK 46,564,000 27M5D7W
4E1+100BT HG 28 QPSK 46,564,000 27M5D7W
8E1+100BT HG 28 QPSK 46,564,000 27M5D7W
12E1+100BT HG 28 QPSK 46,564,000 27M5D7W
16E1+100BT HG 28 QPSK 46,564,000 27M5D7W
100BT 28 32-QAM 115,700,000 27M5D7W
2E1+100BT 28 32-QAM 116,430,000 27M5D7W
4E1+100BT 28 32-QAM 116,180,000 27M5D7W
8E1+100BT 28 32-QAM 116,180,000 27M5D7W
12E1+100BT 28 32-QAM 115,700,000 27M5D7W
16E1+100BT 28 32-QAM 115,700,000 27M5D7W
DS3+2DS1 28 8-PSK 69,846,000 27M5D7W
DS3+4DS1 28 8-PSK 61,350,000 27M5D7W
DS3+8DS1 28 8-PSK 69,846,000 27M5D7W
E3+8E1 28 8-PSK 69,300,000 27M5D7W

Page F-4 Proteus AMT System User’s Manual

 Overview

Table F-B Frequency Licensing Data; All Data Rates & LIM Profile
BW (MHz) MOD Data Rate LIM A LIM B Aggregate Rate (bps) Emission Designator
3.5 4-QAM 2E1 2XE1 5292000 3M50D7W
3.5 4-QAM 2XE1 5292000 3M50D7W
3.5 8-PSK 4E1 4XE1 10600000 3M50D7W
3.5 16-QAM 2XE1 2XDS1 8740000 3M50D7W
3.5 4-QAM 100BT 100BT 5832000 3M50D7W
3.5 8-PSK 100BT 8712000 3M50D7W
3.5 8-PSK 100BT 100BT 8712000 3M50D7W
3.5 4-QAM 100BT 100BT 5832000 3M50D7W
3.5 8-PSK 2E1+100BT 2XE1 100BT 8712000 3M50D7W
3.5 4-QAM 2XE1 100BT 5832000 3M50D7W
5 4-QAM 4DS1 4XDS1 7968000 5M00D7W
5 16-QAM 8DS1 8XDS1 15936000 5M00D7W
5 16-QAM 2DS1+100BT 2XDS1 100BT 16512000 5M00D7W
5 16-QAM 100BT 100BT 16416000 5M00D7W
5 16-QAM 100BT 100BT 16416000 5M00D7W
5 16-QAM 4DS1+100BT 4XDS1 100BT 16512000 5M00D7W
5 16-QAM 8DS1+100BT 8XDS1 100BT 16512000 5M00D7W
5 4-QAM 100BT 100BT 8208000 5M00D7W
5 4-QAM 100BT 100BT 8208000 5M00D7W
5 4-QAM 2XDS1 100BT 8208000 5M00D7W
5 8-PSK 4DS1+100BT 4XDS1 100BT 12336000 5M00D7W
7 4-QAM 4E1 4XE1 11148000 7M00D7W
7 4-QAM 2XE1 2XDS1 11666000 7M00D7W
7 8-PSK 4XE1 4XDS1 17499000 7M00D7W
7 4-QAM 4XE1 11148000 7M00D7W
7 16-QAM 4XE1 4XE1 22296000 7M00D7W
7 16-QAM 8E1 8XE1 22296000 7M00D7W
7 16-QAM 8XE1 22296000 7M00D7W
7 32-QAM 12E1 8XE1 4XE1 29080000 7M00D7W
7 32-QAM 4XE1 8XE1 27900000 7M00D7W
7 32-QAM 12XE1 27900000 7M00D7W
7 4-QAM 100BT 100BT 11664000 7M00D7W
7 16-QAM 100BT 23256000 7M00D7W
7 16-QAM 100BT 100BT 23256000 7M00D7W
7 4-QAM 100BT 100BT 11664000 7M00D7W
7 32-QAM 2E1+100BT 2xE1 100BT 29160000 7M00D7W
7 4-QAM 2XE1 100BT 11664000 7M00D7W
7 32-QAM 4E1+100BT 4xE1 100BT 29160000 7M00D7W
7 4-QAM 4XE1 100BT 11664000 7M00D7W
7 16-QAM 8E1+100BT 8XE1 100BT 23328000 7M00D7W
7 32-QAM 8XE1 100BT 29160000 7M00D7W
7 32-QAM 12E1+100BT 12XE1 100BT 29160000 7M00D7W
10 4-QAM 8DS1 8XDS1 16608000 10M0D7W
10 8-PSK 12DS1 12XDS1 24912000 10M0D7W
10 8-PSK 8XDS1 4XDS1 24912000 10M0D7W
10 16-QAM 16DS1 16XDS1 33216000 10M0D7W
10 16-QAM 8XDS1 8XDS1 33216000 10M0D7W
10 32-QAM 24DS1 16XDS1 8XDS1 41616000 10M0D7W
10 32-QAM 100BT 100BT 41600000 10M0D7W

Proteus AMT System User’s Manual Page F-5

North American Frequency Licensing

Table F-B Frequency Licensing Data; All Data Rates & LIM Profile (continued)
BW (MHz) MOD Data Rate LIM A LIM B Aggregate Rate (bps) Emission Designator
10 32-QAM 100BT 100BT 41600000 10M0D7W
10 32-QAM 2DS1+100BT 2XDS1 100BT 41600000 10M0D7W
10 32-QAM 4DS1+100BT 4XDS1 100BT 41600000 10M0D7W
10 32-QAM 8DS1+100BT 8XDS1 100BT 41600000 10M0D7W
10 32-QAM 12DS1+100BT 12XDS1 100BT 41600000 10M0D7W
10 32-QAM 16DS1+100BT 16XDS1 100BT 41600000 10M0D7W
10 4-QAM 100BT 16608000 10M0D7W
10 4-QAM 100BT 100BT 100BT 16608000 10M0D7W
10 4-QAM 2DS1+100BT 2XDS1 100BT 16608000 10M0D7W
10 4-QAM 4DS1+100BT 4XDS1 100BT 16608000 10M0D7W
10 4-QAM 8DS1+100BT 8XDS1 100BT 16608000 10M0D7W
10 8-PSK 12DS1+100BT 12XDS1 100BT 24720000 10M0D7W
10 16-QAM 16DS1+100BT 16XDS1 100BT 33280000 10M0D7W
14 4-QAM E1/DS1 4XE1 4XDS1 23282000 13M7D7W
14 8-PSK 8XE1 8XDS1 34923000 13M7D7W
14 4-QAM 8E1 4XE1 4XE1 22620000 13M7D7W
14 4-QAM 8XE1 22620000 13M7D7W
14 4-QAM 8XE1 22620000 13M7D7W
14 16-QAM 16E1 8XE1 8XE1 45488000 13M7D7W
14 16-QAM 16XE1 45488000 13M7D7W
14 16-QAM 16XE1 45488000 13M7D7W
14 16-QAM 20E1 4XE1 16XE1 45552000 13M7D7W
14 16-QAM 16XE1 4XE1 45552000 13M7D7W
14 32-QAM 24E1 8XE1 16XE1 56880000 13M7D7W
14 32-QAM 16XE1 8XE1 56880000 13M7D7W
14 32-QAM E3+4E1 4XE1 E3 56820000 13M7D7W
14 32-QAM E3 4XE1 56820000 13M7D7W
14 32-QAM E3+8E1 8XE1 E3 56920000 13M7D7W
14 32-QAM E3 8XE1 56920000 13M7D7W
14 4-QAM 100BT 100BT 23292000 13M7D7W
14 4-QAM 100BT 100BT 23292000 13M7D7W
14 32-QAM 100BT 58100000 13M7D7W
14 32-QAM 100BT 100BT 58100000 13M7D7W
14 4-QAM 2E1+100BT 2XE1 100BT 23292000 13M7D7W
14 32-QAM 2XE1 100BT 58100000 13M7D7W
14 4-QAM 4E1+100BT 4XE1 100BT 23292000 13M7D7W
14 32-QAM 4XE1 100BT 58100000 13M7D7W
14 4-QAM 8E1+100BT 8XE1 100BT 23292000 13M7D7W
14 32-QAM 8XE1 100BT 57620000 13M7D7W
14 8-PSK 12E1+100BT 12XE1 100BT 34923000 13M7D7W
14 32-QAM 12XE1 100BT 58100000 13M7D7W
14 16-QAM 16E1+100BT 16XE1 100BT 46488000 13M7D7W
14 32-QAM 16XE1 100BT 58100000 13M7D7W
14 32-QAM 2XE1 DS3 58330000 13M7D7W
20 4-QAM 16DS1 8XDS1 8XDS1 33216000 20M0D7W
20 4-QAM 16XDS1 33216000 20M0D7W
20 8-PSK 24DS1 16XDS1 8XDS1 49680000 20M0D7W
20 8-PSK 28DS1 16XDS1 12XDS1 49856001 20M0D7W
20 16-QAM 32DS1 16XDS1 16XDS1 66432000 20M0D7W
20 8-PSK DS3 DS3 49872000 20M0D7W

Page F-6 Proteus AMT System User’s Manual

 Overview

Table F-B Frequency Licensing Data; All Data Rates & LIM Profile (continued)
BW (MHz) MOD Data Rate LIM A LIM B Aggregate Rate (bps) Emission Designator
20 16-QAM DS3+2DS1 2XDS1 DS3 66112000 20M0D7W
20 16-QAM DS3+4DS1 4XDS1 DS3 66464000 20M0D7W
20 16-QAM DS3+8DS1 8XDS1 DS3 66384000 20M0D7W
20 32-QAM DS3+12DS1 12XDS1 DS3 82800000 20M0D7W
20 32-QAM DS3+16DS1 16XDS1 DS3 83280000 20M0D7W
20 32-QAM 100BT 100BT 83200000 20M0D7W
20 32-QAM 100BT 100BT 83200000 20M0D7W
20 32-QAM 2DS1+100BT 2XDS1 100BT 83200000 20M0D7W
20 32-QAM 4DS1+100BT 4XDS1 100BT 83200000 20M0D7W
20 32-QAM 8DS1+100BT 8XDS1 100BT 83200000 20M0D7W
20 32-QAM 12DS1+100BT 12XDS1 100BT 83200000 20M0D7W
20 32-QAM 16DS1+100BT 16XDS1 100BT 83200000 20M0D7W
20 32-QAM DS3 100BT 83200000 20M0D7W
20 4-QAM 100BT 100BT 33216000 20M0D7W
20 4-QAM 100BT 100BT 33216000 20M0D7W
20 4-QAM 2DS1+100BT 2XDS1 100BT 33216000 20M0D7W
20 4-QAM 4DS1+100BT 4XDS1 100BT 33216000 20M0D7W
20 4-QAM 8DS1+100BT 8XDS1 100BT 33216000 20M0D7W
20 4-QAM 12DS1+100BT 12XDS1 100BT 33216000 20M0D7W
20 4-QAM 16DS1+100BT 16XDS1 100BT 33216000 20M0D7W
20 16-QAM DS3 100BT 66560000 20M0D7W
25 4-QAM 24DS1 16XDS1 8XDS1 41546000 25M0D7W
25 8-PSK 28DS1 16XDS1 12XDS1 61590000 25M0D7W
25 8-PSK 32DS1 16XDS1 16XDS1 61974000 25M0D7W
25 8-PSK DS3 DS3 61590000 25M0D7W
25 8-PSK DS3+2DS1 2XDS1 DS3 62358000 25M0D7W
25 8-PSK DS3+4DS1 4XDS1 DS3 61350000 25M0D7W
25 8-PSK DS3+8DS1 8XDS1 DS3 62358000 25M0D7W
25 16-QAM DS3+12DS1 12XDS1 DS3 82760000 25M0D7W
25 16-QAM DS3+16DS1 16XDS1 DS3 83144000 25M0D7W
25 32-QAM 2xDS3 DS3 DS3 103860000 25M0D7W
25 32-QAM 100BT 100BT 104080000 25M0D7W
25 32-QAM 100BT 100BT 104080000 25M0D7W
25 32-QAM 2DS1+100BT 2XDS1 100BT 104080000 25M0D7W
25 32-QAM 4DS1+100BT 4XDS1 100BT 104080000 25M0D7W
25 32-QAM 8DS1+100BT 8XDS1 100BT 104080000 25M0D7W
25 32-QAM 12DS1+100BT 12XDS1 100BT 104080000 25M0D7W
25 32-QAM 16DS1+100BT 16XDS1 100BT 104080000 25M0D7W
25 32-QAM DS3+100BT DS3 100BT 104080000 25M0D7W
25 4-QAM 100BT 100BT 41636000 25M0D7W
25 4-QAM 100BT 100BT 41636000 25M0D7W
25 4-QAM 2DS1+100BT 2XDS1 100BT 41636000 25M0D7W
25 4-QAM 4DS1+100BT 4XDS1 100BT 41636000 25M0D7W
25 4-QAM 8DS1+100BT 8XDS1 100BT 41636000 25M0D7W
25 4-QAM 12DS1+100BT 12XDS1 100BT 41636000 25M0D7W
25 4-QAM 16DS1+100BT 16XDS1 100BT 41636000 25M0D7W
25 8-PSK DS3+100BT DS3 100BT 62358000 25M0D7W
28 4-QAM 24DS1 16XDS1 8XDS1 46500000 27M5D7W
28 8-PSK 28DS1 16XDS1 12XDS1 69750000 27M5D7W
28 8-PSK 32DS1 16XDS1 16XDS1 69990000 27M5D7W

Proteus AMT System User’s Manual Page F-7

North American Frequency Licensing

Table F-B Frequency Licensing Data; All Data Rates & LIM Profile (continued)
BW (MHz) MOD Data Rate LIM A LIM B Aggregate Rate (bps) Emission Designator
28 8-PSK DS3 DS3 69750000 27M5D7W
28 8-PSK DS3+2DS1 2XDS1 DS3 69750000 27M5D7W
28 8-PSK DS3+4DS1 4XDS1 DS3 69333999 27M5D7W
28 8-PSK DS3+8DS1 8XDS1 DS3 69750000 27M5D7W
28 8-PSK DS3+12DS1 12XDS1 DS3 69846000 27M5D7W
28 16-QAM DS3+16DS1 16XDS1 DS3 93000000 27M5D7W
28 32-QAM 2xDS3 DS3 DS3 116250000 27M5D7W
28 32-QAM 2DS1+100BT 2XDS1 100BT 116660000 27M5D7W
28 32-QAM 4DS1+100BT 4XDS1 100BT 116660000 27M5D7W
28 32-QAM 8DS1+100BT 8XDS1 100BT 116660000 27M5D7W
28 32-QAM 12DS1+100BT 12XDS1 100BT 116660000 27M5D7W
28 32-QAM 16DS1+100BT 16XDS1 100BT 116660000 27M5D7W
28 32-QAM DS3+100BT DS3 100BT 116660000 27M5D7W
28 4-QAM 2DS1+100BT 2XDS1 100BT 46564000 27M5D7W
28 4-QAM 4DS1+100BT 4XDS1 100BT 46564000 27M5D7W
28 4-QAM 8DS1+100BT 8XDS1 100BT 46564000 27M5D7W
28 4-QAM 12DS1+100BT 12XDS1 100BT 46564000 27M5D7W
28 4-QAM 16DS1+100BT 16XDS1 100BT 46564000 27M5D7W
28 8-PSK DS3+100BT DS3 100BT 69846000 27M5D7W
28 4-QAM 16E1 8XE1 8XE1 46200000 27M5D7W
28 4-QAM 8XE1 8XDS1 46564000 27M5D7W
28 8-PSK 16XE1 16XDS1 69846000 27M5D7W
28 8-PSK DS3+2DS1 2XE1 DS3 69846000 27M5D7W
28 8-PSK DS3+4DS1 4XE1 DS3 61350000 27M5D7W
28 8-PSK DS3+8DS1 8XE1 DS3 69846000 27M5D7W
28 16-QAM DS3+16DS1 16XE1 DS3 93304000 27M5D7W
28 16-QAM E3 DS3 93304000 27M5D7W
28 4-QAM 16XE1 46200000 27M5D7W
28 4-QAM 16XE1 46200000 27M5D7W
28 4-QAM 20E1 16XE1 4XE1 46200000 27M5D7W
28 4-QAM 4XE1 16XE1 46200000 27M5D7W
28 8-PSK 24E1 16XE1 8XE1 68840001 27M5D7W
28 8-PSK 8XE1 16XE1 68844000 27M5D7W
28 16-QAM 32E1 16XE1 16XE1 91680000 27M5D7W
28 16-QAM E3+16E1 16XE1 E3 91680000 27M5D7W
28 16-QAM E3 16XE1 91680000 27M5D7W
28 4-QAM E3 E3 46056000 27M5D7W
28 4-QAM E3 46056000 27M5D7W
28 4-QAM E3+4E1 4XE1 E3 46584000 27M5D7W
28 16-QAM E3 E3 91680000 27M5D7W
28 8-PSK E3+8E1 8XE1 E3 69300000 27M5D7W
28 4-QAM 100BT 100BT 46564000 27M5D7W
28 4-QAM 100BT 100BT 46564000 27M5D7W
28 32-QAM 100BT 115700000 27M5D7W
28 32-QAM 100BT 100BT 115700000 27M5D7W
28 4-QAM 2E1+100BT 2XE1 100BT 46564000 27M5D7W
28 32-QAM 2XE1 100BT 116430000 27M5D7W
28 32-QAM 4E1+100BT 4XE1 100BT 116180000 27M5D7W
28 4-QAM 4XE1 100BT 46564000 27M5D7W
28 32-QAM 8E1+100BT 8XE1 100BT 116180000 27M5D7W
28 4-QAM 8XE1 100BT 46564000 27M5D7W

Page F-8 Proteus AMT System User’s Manual

 Overview

Table F-B Frequency Licensing Data; All Data Rates & LIM Profile (continued)
BW (MHz) MOD Data Rate LIM A LIM B Aggregate Rate (bps) Emission Designator
28 4-QAM 12E1+100BT 12XE1 100BT 46564000 27M5D7W
28 32-QAM 12XE1 100BT 115700000 27M5D7W
28 32-QAM 16E1+100BT 16XE1 100BT 115700000 27M5D7W
28 4-QAM 16XE1 100BT 46564000 27M5D7W

Proteus AMT System User’s Manual Page F-9

North American Frequency Licensing

Page F-10 Proteus AMT System User’s Manual

 Appendix G
Optional ODU and RFU Mounting

Overview
RF units typically mount and latch directly to push-fit antennas to form
the ODU. RF units can mount separate from antennas using the offset
pole mount kit or the rack mount kit. Antennas for these configurations
use a standard rectangular waveguide feed.
Offset ODU Mounting
Use antennas from a variety Use the ODU offset mounting kit, Table G-A and Figure G-1, to mount a
of vendors that use a non-protected or 1+1 protected RF unit on a pole separate from an an-
standard rectangular tenna that uses a standard waveguide feed. Employ the offset ODU op-
waveguide interface. tion where a Proteus AMT push-fit antenna is not available, a site has an-
tennas for reuse, or to meet customer mounting requirements.

Note: Do not use a push-fit antenna. The kit does not convert the
push-fit antenna feed to a standard waveguide interface.

When using the offset pole mounting kit, a length of flexible or elliptical
waveguide connects the RF unit to an antenna that uses a standard
waveguide feed. The kit has an adapter that connects the RF unit RF I/O
port to a standard rectangular waveguide interface. This interface is a
cover flange with threaded screw holes in a square pattern.
The flexible waveguide you choose may have either a choke or cover
flange, but must have a groove for an O-ring to provide an environmental
seal. The waveguide flange must also have un-tapped screw holes or
pre-placed screws to secure the flange to the adapter on the mounting
plate, and to the antenna at the opposite end.
Table G-A ODU - RFU Offset Mounting Kit
Description P/N
7/8-GHz ODU Offset Mounting Kit, Circular I/O 8708271-07
13-GHz ODU Offset Mounting Kit, Rect. I/O 8708271-00
15-GHz ODU Offset Mounting Kit, Rect. I/O 8708271-01
18-GHz ODU Offset Mounting Kit, Circular I/O 8708271-18
23/26-GHz ODU Offset Mounting Kit, Circular I/O 8708271-23
38-GHz ODU Offset Mounting Kit, Circular I/O 8708271-38

Proteus AMT System User’s Manual Page G-1

Optional ODU and RFU Mounting

Figure G-1. ODU Offset Mount Kit, P/N 8708271-xx

Page G-2 Proteus AMT System User’s Manual

 Overview

Table G-B lists components of the ODU offset kit. Table G-C lists the
suggested waveguide size and flange type for each RF frequency.

Table G-B Offset Mounting Kit Components, P/N 8708271-xx

Description P/N Qty
Kit, Bolt (3/8")/Bracket, Pole Mount 8708225-00 1
Plate, Offset Mounting, NP/HSBY 8509698-02 1
Screw, 6-32 x 0.438, Phillips-head Flat, SS 1304105-14 10
Nut, 6-32, English, w/ext tooth lock washer 0285556F03 8
Striker, Offset Mounting, NP/HSBY 8509697-01 4
Adapter, ODU (Table G-C) 38000xx-xx 1
O-Ring, 1.612" ID, 0.103" diameter, BUNA-N 3900009-09 1
O-ring Lubricant, 10cc 52500-118 1
Paste, Anti-Seize, 7.5g Tube 6900048-01 1

Table G-C Waveguide Adapters on Offset Mounting Plate

Flex Waveguide Waveguide
ODU P/N
Size Flange
7/8 GHz 3800061-01 WR112 circular PBR84
13 GHz 3800060-01 WR75 rectangle PBR120
15 GHz 3800059-01 WR62 rectangle PBR140
18 GHz 3800064-00 WR42 circular PBR220
23/26 GHz 3800065-00 WR42 circular PBR220
38 GHz 3800066-00 WR28 circular PBR320

Proteus AMT System User’s Manual Page G-3

Optional ODU and RFU Mounting

RFU Rack Mounting Kit

Use antennas from a variety The ODU rack mounting kit,Table G-D, provides hardware for mounting
of vendors that use a a non-protected or 1+1 protected RF unit indoors in a standard 19-inch
standard rectangular equipment rack separated from the outdoor antenna.
waveguide interface.
When using the offset pole mounting kit, a length of flexible or elliptical
waveguide connects the RF unit to an antenna that has a standard
waveguide feed. The kit has an adapter,Table G-E, that converts the RF
unit RF I/O to a standard rectangular waveguide interface. This interface
is a cover flange with threaded screw holes in a square pattern. The
waveguide you choose to interface with the adapter may be either a
choke or cover flange, but must have a groove for an O-ring that pro-
vides the environmental seal, and un-threaded screw holes for screws
that secure the waveguide to the adapter at the RF unit and the interface
at the antenna.

Note: Do not use the offset pole mount kit with a Proteus AMT push-fit
antenna. The kit does not have an adapter to convert the push-fit
antenna feed to a standard waveguide interface.

The ODU rack mount kit will normally be used with standard antennas
from a variety of vendors using a traditional rectangular waveguide feed.
Table G-E lists components of the ODU rack mounting kit. Table G-F
lists suggested waveguide size and flange type for each RF frequency.

Table G-D RFU Rack Mounting Kit

Description P/N
7/8GHz, Rack Mounting Kit, Circular I/O 8708272-07
13GHz, Rack Mounting Kit, Rectangular I/O 8708272-00
15GHz, Rack Mounting Kit, Rectangular I/O 8708272-01
18GHz, Rack Mounting Kit, Circular I/O 8708272-18
23/26GHz, Rack Mounting Kit, Circular I/O 8708272-23
38GHz, Rack Mounting Kit, Circular I/O 8708272-38

Table G-E ODU Rack Mounting Kit Components

Component P/N Qty
RFU Mount 8509738-01 1
Screw, 6-32 x 0.438, Phillips-head Flat, SS 1304105-14 10
Waveguide adapter, see Table G-F 38000XX-XX 1
Nut, 6-32, English, w/ext tooth lock washer 0285556F03 8
Striker, Offset Mounting, NP/HSBY 8509697-01 4
Screw,12-24, self-tap, slot hex-head, SS 38531400 8
O-ring,1.612" ID, 0.103" diameter, BUNA-N 3900009-09 1
O-ring Lubricant, 10cc 52500-118 1

Page G-4 Proteus AMT System User’s Manual

 Overview

Figure G-2. RFU Rack Mount Kit, P/N 8708272-xx

Table G-F Waveguide Adapters on Rack Mounting Plate

Flex Waveguide Waveguide
ODU P/N
Size Flange
7/8 GHz 3800061-01 WR112 circular PBR84
13 GHz 3800060-01 WR75 rectangle PBR120
15 GHz 3800059-01 WR62 rectangle PBR140
18 GHz 3800064-00 WR42 circular PBR220
23/26 GHz 3800065-00 WR42 circular PBR220
38 GHz 3800066-00 WR28 circular PBR320

Proteus AMT System User’s Manual Page G-5

Optional ODU and RFU Mounting

Installing the Mounting Kits

Installing the Offset Mounting Kit

Install the coax cable, IDU, and antenna as Chapter 2 describes.

Prior to installing nuts on To install the offset mounting kit:

bolts, place a small amount
of anti-seize paste on the Step 1: If not attached, secure the waveguide adapter and strikers to the
bolt threads. mounting plate with the include screws and nuts. Figure G-1
shows hardware placement.
Step 2: Use the 3/8-16" U-bolts in the kit to secure the offset mounting
plate (Figure G-1) to a vertical pole that is 1.9 to 4.5 inches (48
to 115 mm) in diameter.
Step 3: Torque bolts to 31 ft.-lbs. (42.036 Nm).
Step 4: Place a small amount of lubricant in the groove on the adapter
and coat the O-ring, and then slide the O-ring in place.
Step 5: Push the RF unit onto the adapter, keeping proper polarization,
and latch the unit to the mounting plate.
Step 6: Screw one end of the flexible waveguide to the adapter on the
back of the mounting plate, and screw the opposite end to the
antenna feed.

Installing the Rack Mounting Kit

Use the rack mounting kit at sites where you need to keep the RF unit in-
doors. The IDU-to-ODU cable may only have to be a few feet long, but
the length of ellipical waveguide between the RF unit and antenna will
depend on the site.

To install the rack mounting kit:

Step 1: If not attached, secure the waveguide adapter and strikers to the
mounting bracket with the included screws and nuts.
Figure G-2 shows hardware placement.
Step 2: Use #4-40 screws to secure the mounting bracket (Figure G-2)
to the equipment rack.
Step 3: Place a small amount of lubricant in the groove on the adapter
and coat the O-ring, and then slide the O-ring in place
Step 4: Push the RF unit onto the adapter, keeping proper polarization,
and latch the unit to the bracket.
Step 5: Screw one end of the elliptical waveguide to the adapter on the
back of the bracket, and screw the opposite end to the antenna
feed.

Page G-6 Proteus AMT System User’s Manual

 Selecting Waveguide

Selecting Waveguide
Adapters on the offset mounting kit and rack mounting kit have rectan-
gular and circular interfaces depending on ODU frequency. Table G-G
list waveguide mechanical dimension and type for the adapter and for the
flex- or ellipical waveguide interface.

Note: Flex- and elliptical waveguide flanges must have O-ring seals.

Table G-G Adapter to Waveguide Interface Dimensions1

Dimension (inch)
Waveguide
ODU A B C D E Flex Waveguide Type
Flange
screw
7/8 GHz 1.474 1.352 1.178 0.900 8-32 Circular - WR112 PBR84
13 GHz 1.122 1.040 0.750 0.375 6-32 Rectangular - WR75 PBR120
15 GHz 0.956 0.994 0.622 0.311 6-32 Rectangular - WR62 PBR140
18 GHz 0.670 0.640 0.420 0.170 4-40 Circular - WR42 PBR220
23/26 GHz 0.670 0.640 0.384 0.250 4-40 Circular - WR42 PBR220
38 GHz 0.530 0.500 0.280 0.177 4-40 Circular - WR28 PBR320
1. 18-GHz waveguide interface illustrated for example and dimensioning.

Table G-H lists some of the flexible waveguide available for use with the
ODU offset mounting option. Contact MNI sales for different lengths.

Proteus AMT System User’s Manual Page G-7

Optional ODU and RFU Mounting

Table G-H Flexible Waveguide for Offset Mounting Option

Frequency
Part Number Waveguide Assembly1 Equivalent
(GHz)
12.40-18.00 905533-36A Flex-Twist, WR62 - 36" Microtech - MTPS62
18.00-26.50 905500-36A Flex-Twist, WR42 - 36" Microtech - MTPS42
18.00-26.50 9900289-00 Flex-Twist, WR42 - 36" Microtech - MTPS42
18.00-26.50 9900219-00 Flex-Twist, WR42 - 48" Microtech - MTPS42
26.50-40.00 905534-30A Flex-Non Twist, WR28 - 30" MicroTech - MCKS28
1. For other lengths contact MNI Sales or your Customer Response representative
(U.S. 281-263-6500)

Page G-8 Proteus AMT System User’s Manual